Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.

com

FED.TESTMETHODSTD,No. 228
April
14,1%7
SUPERSEDING
Fed.
Spec.
J-C-98
Sepiember
11,1951

FEDERAL TEST METHOD STANDARD

CABLE AND WIRE , INSULATED;

MZTHODS OF TESTING

This standard was approved by the Commissioner,

Federal Supply Service, General Services Admin-
istration for the use of all Federal agencies.

,Orders for this publication are to be placed with General Serv-

ices Administration, acting as an agent for the Superintendent of
Documents. Single copies of this standard are available without
charge at the GSA Bus$ness Service Centers in Boston, New York,
Atlanta, Chicago, Kansas City, Me., Dallas, Denver, San Francisco,
Los Angeles, and Seattle, Washington, Additional copies may be
purchased for cents each from the General Services Administra.
tiou, Specifications Activity, lWinted Materials Supply Division,
/ Building 197, Naval Weapons Plant, Washington, l), c, 20407.
\

FJC61A3
 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

‘)

INFORMATION SREET
on

FEDERAL TSST UET’HODSTANDARDS

This Federal Test Method Standard is issued in

loose leaf form to permit the insertion or removal of
D—.. new or revised-sect~ons and test methods.

All users of Federal Test Method Stsndards should keep

them up to date by Inserting revised or new stictionsand
test methods as issued and removing superseded and canceled
pages,

New and revised material and cancellations will be issued

under change notices which will be numbered consecutively and
will bear the date of issuance, Change notices should be
retained and filed in front of the alphabetical index of the
standard until such time as they are superseded by a reissue )
of the entire standard.
 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

FED.TCSTMETMOOSTD.W. 221
April 14, 1967

SECTIONi

SCOPE,CONTENTS,ANOWMBERIN6SYSTEM

1. SCOPE
1,1 This standard gives the general 1000 Geometrical !dessurements.
physical, electrical, and chemical methods 2000 — Mechanical Tests.
for testing insulated wire and cable for 3000 — Tension Tests.
electrical purposes for conformance with 4000 — Accelerated Aging Tests.
the requirements of Federal and Military 5000 -. Thermal Tests.
apscitications, and other related docu- 6000 - Electrical Tests.
ments. It was prepared in order to elimi- 7000 - Chemical Tests,
nate Unnecessmy or undesirable variation 0000 Miscellaneous Tests.
in testing procedures. This standard does
not include special test methods applicable 4. Subject Index.
to certain wires and cables which are de- 5. Definition of Terms.
cribed in the appropriate detail spacifica- 6. Temperature and Humidity of Condi-
tiona, nor does it include all the test tioning Room.
methods for wires and cables used in the 7. Notes.
industry. In case of conflict between the 8. Test Methods.
provisions of those methods and those of
the individual test procedures or specifi- 3. NUMBERING SYSTEM
cations for particular material, the latter
shall take precedence. 3.1 New methods. A method number will
be assigned so that the new method is lo-
2. CONTENTS cated close to methods of similar or relat-
ed tests.
2,1 The contents of this standard are as
follows: 3.2 Revision of existing methods. When
a teChLiCal change or modification is
Section issued, it will be identified by adding a
decimal poznt to the basic method number or
1, Scope, Contents. and Numberin~ System. by increasing the decimal by one digit;
2. Alphabetical Index of Test Method e.g., 3111, if modified or changed, would
SubJecrs. Be 3111.1; and 2v11.1, If modiXied or
3. Numerical Index of Test Methods. changed, would he 2011.2.

FED.TI?STMCTHOOSTD.
NO.228
 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

FED. TEST METHOO$10. MO.=

April 14, 1967

SECTION1

MPM3ETICAL IMEX OF TEST NETWOSUBJECTS

Title Method Title Method

No. Ho.

Abrasion Resistance.—-—--- —---’.- 2211 Overlap, Cotton TapeA——-— ------ 1711

Air Oven Test, Insulation and Oxygen Pressure Test, Insulation
Sheatk------------ —----—----—-- 4031 and Sheath----------------— ------ 4011
Air Pressure Test, Insulation and Picks Per Inch, 2raid--— ------ 8011
SbeatL------------— ---------- 4021 Resistance, Electrical, Conductor-- 6021
Angle, i)rai~———-—-------———— 1611 Resistance, Electrical, Insulation- 6031
Angle, Wra&._--------—------ 1621 Resintance, Electrical, Steel Armor. 6011
Angle of 2raid, Metal Armor-—--- 1631 Resistance to Acid and Alkali_-—- 7011
Suffing, Insulation and SheatL--- 3011 Resistance to Heat, Oxygen, Air,
Calibration, Tension Testing Light, and Ozone; General------- 4001
Machine--—.--------—— -------- 3016 Resistance to Light, heulation
Capacitance Change with Time in and Sheath—-—-—------— ----- 4131
Water-------—------—-------— 6271 Resistance to Oil, Insulation and
Curlers, Ends per Carrier, and Ply Stiatk——---.—--.—---—---- 4221
of Yarns; Braid------------------ S021 Resistance to 011, Insulation and
Chemical Tests; tWneral------——---- 7001 Sheath (Recovery Method)--------- 4223
Cticumference ----------------------- 1441 Resistance to @one, Insulation and
Conductor Coating, Ammonium SheatL ------------— -------------- 4111
krsulfate--------—--------—----- 7123 Resistance to Petrolatum, Varnished
Conductor Coating, Sodium Poly- clotL-—---— --------------------- 4211
sulfide--—----- ------------—---- 7121 Size, Conductor--------------------- 1431
Coverage, Braid, Metal Armor----- 8121 Specific Gravity; Hydrostatic----- a322
Coverage, Wrap or Serving---——-- 8131 Specific Gravity; Pycnometer------ 8321
Diameter, Armor W;.re---————-—_ 1421 Springiness, Arnor Wire--_-— ------ 2161
Dielectric Strength, Cloth and Tape_ 6221 Surface Resistance, Finished Wire
Direction of Lay---—----_— ----- 8111 and Cable-------------------------- 0041
Drip, Cable----—-----------------— 5141 Tearing Strength, Sheath --------- 3111
..
Drip, Flmuus ~~veriag-------------– 5131 Tensile Strength, Insulation and
Elongation, Armor-----—---——---- 2111 Sbeatk---------------------— 5021
Elongation, Insulation and Sheatk___ 3031 Tensile.Strength, Varnished Cloth
Flammability, Iiorizontal---——------ 5211 IMulatio*----—----.-----—--- 3171
Flammability, Spuk MethoL—-—--- 5231 Tensile Strength and Elongation,
Flammability, VerticaL-----—-—--- 5221 Mediub -—---.—----— ---------
Flexibility, Armored Cable, Low Eard-Drawn or Had-Drawn ]
Tem~rature—-.---—--———--— 2021 Conductors------— —--- -.— 3212
~lexlbility, Cotton Covered Elec- Tensile Strength and Elongation,
tric Coal--—-------—— ------- 2031 Soft or Annealed Conductors------ 3211
Flexibility, 2xtenmile and Tensile Stress, Insulation and
Retractile Cord-—------------- 2051 Sheath.-—------—---------—---- 3041
Flexibility, Fibrous Coverings----- 2041 Tension Set, Insulation and Sheatl& 3161
Flexibility, Fibrous Coverings, tiw Tension Tests, Insulation and
Temperature-----—---- —------—. 2043 Sheath; mineral------—----—---- 3001
Flexibility, Insulation, tiw Test Tube lIoat-Aging,Insulation
Tem~rature---—..---—------— 2011 and Sheath—-—-.---—--—--—--- 4041
Rest Distortion, Insulation--------- 6021 Thickness, Sedding; Diameter Taps-. 1173
Heat Shock, Insulatio&:----—--- 5011 Thickness, Sedding; Micrometer
Identification, Synthetic Elastome- Caliper—--—+- —------— —-—. 1171
ters, Insulation and Sh.atk—_—— 72S1 Thicknees, srai~--—---——---—--- 1111
Insulation tMfects, Spwk Test---- 6211 Thickness, Cotton Tape; Dial
Insulation Shrinkage (Molten Solder Micromter--—-----— ----------- 1124
Method)-—--—--—-—-— ----- 6231 Thicknems, Cotton Tape; Micrometer
Lay of Twist, Armor Wtie--— ----- 1511 Caliper---- —-—-- -----——.— 1121
Lay of Twist, Cable -—-——— ----- 1521 Thickness, Insulation; Dial
Lead Sheath, ComPositio&—...———_ 7231 Micronter--------—-—--——-— 1013
Length of Lay, Wrap or Serving---- 1s31 Thicknese, Insulation; Micrometer
Melt, Fibrous Covering--—--.-—-. Sill Caliwr--—-——---—--------—-— 1011
Mineral Content, Coverings------ 7211 Thickness, Insulation, Minimum;
Moisture Absorption, Flhroun Pin-Gage Dial Micrometer--——------ 1014
Covering-—--.-——--——--——— 8221 Thickness, Insulation; Optical----- 1018
Moisture Absorption, Inaulatior&-- 8211 Thickness, Lead Sheath; Micrometer
Openiag, Armor-----——--_---— 2181 Caliper (Flat Anvil)-_-_—-_-_— j 1313

WD.TEST.MET100 STO.W.~
I
 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

7227 METNOO5T0. NO.=

FED.
April 14, 1967

IND2X OF YWT M2TEOD SUBJ2CTS-Cent inuod

Method Method
Tit 10 NO. Tit1, No.

Thickness, Lead Sheath; Micrometer Toughnesm, Armor Wire-------—-- 2131

Caliper (Round Anvil)—--------- 1311 Voltage Withstand, Iosulated Wire
Thickness, Metal Tape Armor-—--- 1211 and Cable------------- --—--- -— 6111
Thickness, Serving; Diambter Tape- 11s3 Voltage WltUtand, Insulation,
ThicknemII,Sarving; Micrometer ~lexin~---------=-.---—- 6121
Calipsr---— ---------------- 11s1 Voltage Withstand, Insulation,
Th%cknema, ShemtL----.-—___ 1331 ?lexing, Low Temperature--._-_— 6131
Thlcknsse, Varnished Cloth----- 10s1 woigm, Wire or Cable, Conductor
Thlcknesa, Woven or Braided Metsl ●nd Covering Material--.---.---- 8311
Armor; Diameter Taw----.---—— 1223 Vidth, Metal Taps ArmOr—----- 1411
Thicknes8, woven or Braided Mstal Yartu per Inch, Fibrous Covering-. 8031
Armor; micrometer Caliper---- 1221 Tarns per 2nch, Vwni8hed CIOtk-- 8033
Tbicknesa, Wrap ----------- 1141 Yarn Size, Wrap and S*rvimg----- 8041
Tightness, Armor--_.—---- 2171 Zinc Coating, steel Armor------ 7111
{ i

FED.TEST METNOOSTO. NO. =

2
 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

FED. TEST METHOD STD. NO. 228

APril 14. 1967

SECTION 8
NUMERICAL INDEX OF TEST METHODS

Group 1000- GeometricalMeasurements

11
Title Title , Method
1 No,

Thickness,XnsuiatioW MicrometerCaliper-! 1011 / Thickness, Woven or BraidedMetal I

Thickness,hsulatio~DialMicrometer-- - 1013 1 Armor; DiameterTape- --- -- --1 1223
Thickness,Insulattoq Minimum; Pin-Gage Thickness,Lead Sheath; Micro meter
Dial Micrometer -------- ------ 1014 Caliper (Round Anvil) -------- I 1311
Thickness, b9d9tiO~ @tiCd -------- 1018 Thickness, Lead Sheath; Micrometer ]
‘ThkknssS, Varnished cloth ----- ---- 1051 Caliper (FldAnvfl)--- -------- I 1313
Thickness,Braid----------- ---- 1111 TN&ness, Sheath ---------- - 1331
Thickness,CottonTape;Micrometer Wid@ Metal Tape Armor-- --- --! 1411
-r ------------------- 1121 Diameter, Armor Wire ------- - 1421
Thickness, Cotton Tape; Dial Micrometer- - 1124 Size, Conductor ---------- -- 1431
TNcknes6, Wrap ----------- ---- 1141 Circumference ------------- 1441
Thickness,Serving; MicrometerCaliper -- 1151 lay of Twis~ Armor Wire -- - - -- / 1511
Th.icknees, Servm Diameter Taps - ---- X153 [ Layof Twis~ Cable ---------- I 1521
Thickness, Bedding Micrometer Caliper ~ - 1171 ; Length ofLay, Wrti or Serving- - - - 1531
Thickness, Beddi% Diameter Tape- ---- !173 Angle,Braid------------- - 1611
I
Thickness,MetalTape Armor ---- ---- 1211 Angle,Wrap ------------ -- 1621
TNckness, Woven or Braided Metal Armor; Angle of Braid, Metal Armor -- - -- 1631
Micrometer Caliper --------- ---- 1221 Overiap, Cotton Tape -------- - 1711

Group 2000- Mechanical Tests

, — -.—
Flexibility, Insulatio% Low Temperature- - 2011 Flexiblllty, Extensile and Retractile
Flexibility, Armored Cable, Low Cord ----------------- 2051
Temperatur e ------------ ---- 2021 Elongatio& Armor --------- --, 2111
PlexibUlty, Cotbm Covered Electiic Cord- - 20s1 Toughness, Armor Wire- ----- -- 2131
Flexibility, Fibrous Coverings- ------- 2041 Springiness, Armor Wire ------- 2161
Flexlbilltg, Fibrous Coverings, Low Tightness, Armor ---------- - 2171
Temperature ------------ ---- 2043 *dW, *mar ------------ 2181
Abrasion Resistance -- - -- -- - -- 2211

Group 3000- Tension Tests

I
Tension Tests, Insulation and Sheath; Tearing Stre@ Sheath ----- --: 3111
General ---------------- --- 3001 Tension Seg Insulation and sheath -- ‘ 3161
‘BuCfln& &asulation and Sheath -------- 3011 Tensile Strew Vmiishsd Cloth
C~Uo% Tension Testing Mschlne ---- 3016 Insulation -------------- 1 3171
Teasile S&e@ Insulation ad sheath --- .9021 Tensile S&ength M Elongatio% Soft
Ekmgatiq XnsulaUon and sheath ------ 3031 or Anneaisd Conductors - - - - - - - 3211
Tensile Stress, Lnsuhtion and Sheath ---- 3041 Tensile Strength ami ElongatioIL
Medium HiUd-Drawn or Hard-Drawn
Conductors ------------- - 3212

FED. TEST, METWI STD. NO. 228

1
 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

F.ED. TEST METtIuD STD. NO. 228

[April14,1967
NllJMRICAL INDEX OF TEST tdJHWOD$-Ccmt inued
A@ng Tmrts
Group 4000- Accelerated

Title Method Title Method

No. No.

Resistance tDHeal Oxyge% Air, LighG Resistance to Ozone, Insulation and Sheath- 4111
and Ozone ; Genera l------ ------ 4001 Resistance to Ligh\ Insulation and Sheath - 4131
Oxygen Pressure Tes4 Lnsulatlon and I Resistance tn Petrolatum, Varnished
Sheath ----------------- ‘-~ 4011 ~ cloth -------------------- 4211
Air Pressure Tes~ Insulation and Sheath -~ 4021 Resistance to Oil, insulation and Sheath -- 4221
Air Oven TesL Insulabon and Sheath - - - 4031 Resistance @ 011,Insulation and Sheath
Test Tube Heat-Aging, Insulation and (Ttecovery Method) ------------- 4223
Sheath ---------------- --- 4041
-———-

Group 5000- Thermal Tests

Heat Sh6ck1nsulaUon ------ ----- 5011 Drip, Cable ------------- ---- 5141
Heat Distortion Insulation -- - - -- -- - 5021 Flammability, Horizontal -- -------- 5211
MeL Fibrou6 Covering ---------- 5111 Flammability, Vertical -- - -------- 5z21
Drip, Fibrous Covering - - - - - --- -- 5131 ~aLOMabtiiQ,~kMeW----- . . . 5231
.— 1. -——— —.. —----- - --

Group 6000 ~ Electriczd Testi

. ..— — .. ---— .— -—
Resist.ace, Electrical, Steel Armor - - -’I ::;; Voltage Withstmui, InsulationFlexing - - - 6121
Resistance, Electrical, Conductor- - - - - Voltage WithsUmd, Insulat.io% Flexing,
Resistance, Electri@ Insulation- - - -- 6031 Low Temperature -------- ----- 6131
Surface Resistance, Finished Wire and hSUlatiOn DSfeCtS, Spark Test ------- 6211
Cable ------ ------------1 6041 Dielectric Strengtk ClothandTape - --- 6221
Voltage Withstand, : E.uidteu ‘,V,rc
and :~~:~.t.~npe Clwgc withTmc inVJlter- - 6271
Cable ---------------- ---: 6111 II
—— .-—

Group 7000- Chemical Testa

Chemical Testi; General- --- -- -- -- 7001 Mineral Conten~ Coverings- ----

Resistance to Acid and Alkali ------- 70~l kad Sheath, Composition- -----‘7TlT- -- -- 7231
ZincCoaUn& Steal Armor --------- ~111 ldentificatio% Synthetic Elastomers,
Conductor Coating, Whim Polysulfide - -I 7121 / I.nsulation end Sheath --------- --- ?~l
Conductor Coating, Ammonium Persulfate \ 7123
‘

Group 8000- Miscelkuwous Tests

——— .— .
Picks per Inch, Braid ------ ----- 8011 Coverage,Wrap or serving-- - -- - -- -’ 8131
Carriers, Ends per Carrier, md Ply Moisture Abeorptloz Insulation ---- --1 8211
ofYarns;Braid--------- ‘---- 8021 Moisture Abeorptioni Fibrous Covering -- 8221
Yarns per inc~ FibrousCovering----- 8031 InsulationShrinbge (MoltenSolder
Yarns per Incm Varn!shedCloth------ 8033 Method) --------------- ‘-- e~l
Yam Size,Wrap axl Serving------- 50’41 Weigh% Wire or Cable,Conductorand
Direction of Up ----------- ‘-- 8111 tI Cwering Matertal --------T.- --- e~ll
Coverage, Bral$ Metal Armor -- ---- 8121 Specific Gravity: Pycmmeter ------ --1 8321
Specific Gravi~ Hydrostatic ------- -I 8322
— .—. .—. — - L—

FED, TEST METHOD STD. NO, 228 2

 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

FED. TEST METNDD$70. ND.228

April 14. 1967

SECTION4
W2JECT INDEX

Subject Index Subject Index

Acid, alkali test: Fibrous Carriers:

coverings and armor.--—— Method 7011 &ai&-----_-—_-—-_--_--.- Method 8021
Air oven test: Insulation Definition of--------- Section 5
and 8heatk-----_-_--_---— Method 4031 Chemical teats--——----—. Group 7000
Ati pressure test: Insula- Circular roil: Definition of4- Section 5
tion and mheatk------- ; Method 4021 Circumference:

4
Angle: Cable and wire--—------—-. Method 1441
BraiL-----...——-------— Method 1611 Contictora----—--— --------- Method 1441
Metal armor, braide&----- Method 1631 Coatings:
Wrap----..-.---— ------- Method 1621 Armor, zinc coated steel-_— Method 7111
Armor: Conductor coatings:

1
Brtided metal: tiraulfste--——-----—-—_- Method 7123
Angle--------- --——- Uethod 1631 klyaulfide----------—--- Method 7121
Covarav---—----—----—- Method 6121 Completed wire and cable:
Elongatio~--—-----”—-- Uethod 2111 Definition of________ Section 5
Thickness_--__--— ----- Methods 1221 Composition:
Metal tape: Insulation and aheath------ Method 7251
Coating, uniformity--— Method 7111 Lead sheat~-------------—-- Method 7231
Elongatio~-.------_-_-—- Method 2111 Concentric lay: Definition
Flexibility, low of-------------------------- Section 5
tem~rature------------— Method 2021 Conductor:
Lay, direction of-----_— Method 8111 Circuderenca---—-— -------- Method 1441
Omning----—------------ Method 2181 Coating, uniformity:
Thickness------------.—— Method 1211 Nraulfate---—----------- Method 7123
Tightness-..------------—--Method 2171 ~l~ulfide---.------------- Method 7121
Width ---------------------Method 1411 Definition of------------ SectIon 5
Nonmetallic: Acid and Elongation:
..ae+e+.!,,,,e
~~~=~~ .---- ..... --------- ~et~@~ ?Q~~ Earc!-flraW- .__--___-__-_——___ jfPthnr!?21?
steel: Soft, annealed--—------ Method 3211
Coating, zinc, uniformity- Method 7111 Insulated, definition of-—-- Section S
Xlongatio~--—---------- Method 2111 Lay, direction of-------- Method 8111
Flexibility, low Reaiatance, electrical------ Method 6021
temperature--...---——— Method 2021 Size-_—-__—__—_—- Method 1431
~ning.----.-—.------— method 2181 Stranded, definitio~--——- Section 5
Resistance, electrical---- Method 6011 Tensile strength:
Tightneaa---—------— — Method 2171 H=d-draw~-.------—-.--—- Method 3212
uira: Dimmeter----_—_- Method 1421 Soft, annealeL__--_—---- Method 3211
Armor wire: Weight--------------------- Method 8311
Lay : Cord, electric: Flexibility- Method 2031
Direction of-—-— -------- Method 8111 Coveragw:
of twist--—.— ---------— Method 1511 Armor, braided •etal--~---_- Method”8121
Springiness-------------- — Method 2161 Wrap or nerving--------------Method 8131
Touglmesa---—--- ---e-- Method 2131 Covering, fibroun:
Bedding: Acid and alkali resistance--- Method 7011
Lay, direction of----_—_— Method 8111 Flammability:
Thitineaa-----.-— ------ Methods 1171 Horizontal_———-—_—— Method 5211
and 1173 Spuk -----—--— -—------- Method 5231
Braid: Vertical--------------- Method 5221
Angle----— ------------- Method 1611 Mineralcontent-----------W Method 7211
Csrriars------------------ method 8021 Moisture abeorptio&—---- - Method 8221
Ende—-.-__— ________ N6thod 8021 Yarns ‘per inch--_-_-—-- Method 8031
Picks per inck-_-------_- Method 8011 Weight---------------------- Method S311
Ply of ysrL.___-—_---—_ Method S3021 Defects:
Thickness------— -.-— Nethod 1111 Insulation, apsrk teat___— Method 6211
Buffing: Insulation and Definitions of terme------_- Section 5
sheath ----------------- Method 3011 Diameter: Armor, wi~e_---- Method 1421
Bunched lay: Definition of-- Section 5 Dielectric strength: Cloth
Calibration: Tension test- and ta~----__------_--.-- Method 6221
ing machine--—------- ---- Method 3016 Direction of lay:
Capacitance: Insulation, Definition of_— _________ Section 5
change-------------------- Method 6271 Determination of--------- Method 8111

FED.TE$TM=HDD S7D.m.Z2E
1
 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

FED. TuT, MC71QD STD. W. 2S

April 14, 1967

SUSJE~ INDEX-rO”+ inued

Subject Index Subject I Index

Distortion, heat: Insula- Set, tension--------------- Method 6031

tioL-. ----.------—--—--- Method 5021 Spark test-----------------— Method 6211
Drip test: L’pecificgravity:
Cable--.-------— ---------- Method 5141 Hydrostatic------------------Method 8322
Fibrous covering------- Method 5131 Pycnoneter------—---------- Method 8321
Elastomers: Qualitative Tensile strength:
tests-_-----.------------— ~ Slethod7251 Rubber------—------— ------- Method 3021
Elongation: Varnished clotk ------------ Method 3171
&mor-.--_--——------—-- -1 !nethod2111 Tensile stress--------------— Method 3041
Conductors: Tension set--------— --------- Method 3161
Hard-drawn---------------- Method 3212 Test tubs heat-aging test--—-- Method 4041
Soft annealed----—--—- Method 3211 T’lickneas:
Definition of----—-.——- Section S Dial micrometer-.-------.--—- Method 1013
Insulation and sheatk--—- Method 3031 Micrometer caliper----------- Method 1011
Ends : Optical-.--.--— ------------ Method 1018
Definition of----—---—---- Section 5 Pin-gage dial microneter--- Method 1014
Ends Per carrier, braid-— i Method 8021 Voltage withstand:
FlaMability--—----——--- Methods 5211 Insulated wire and cable--- Method 6111
-1 and 5221 After flexing---------------- Method 6121
Spark test----------------- Method 5231 AFter flexing at low
Flexibility: temperature----------------- Method 6131
Armored cable, low Lay:
temperature--------------- Method 2021 Sunched, definition of-------- Section 5
Cord$ electrlc, cotton Cc,?centrlc,definition of---— Section 5
covere~------------------ Method 2031 Direction of:
Cord, Extensile and Definition of-----— -------- Section S
Retractile----------------I Method 2051 L?termination of------------ Method 8111
F>brous covcrlngs: Leugth of:
Low temmrature ---------—_! Method 2043 Definition of-----------—-—— Section 5
Room ternperature----------~ Method 2041 Wrap or serving-------------- I MethOd 1S31
Insulation, low temperature Method 2011 Rope, definition of--------- Section S
Heat distortion: lnsulatio Method 5021 mist !
Heat shock: Insulatio~-—- Method 5011 Definition---_-— ----- Section 5
Insulation: Armor wire-----—— -------- Method 1S11
Air oven test--_—---_-— Method 4031 Cable.--------—--——--— Method 1521
Air pressure test--------- Method 4021 Unidirectional, definition of Section 5
Capacitance test---—--- Method 6271 ~lnilay, definition 0!------— SeCtiOn S
Composition, qualitative 1 Lead: Chemical analysls ----- Method 7231
tests--------------------- Method 7251 Length of lay:
Defects, spark test-------- Method 6211 Definition of-------------- Section 5
Definition of-----------—. 4 Section 5 Wrap or serving------_—--— Method 1531
Elastomers, qualitative Light resistance: Insulation
tests----------—-----—-- Method 7251 and Sheath ----------------- Method 4131
Elongation -------------- < Method 3031 Median: Definition of--——- SeCtiOn 5
Flyability--___-——---- Methods 5211 Melt test: Fibrous covering- Method 5111
5221, and Mineral content: Fibroum
~ 5231 coverin~ --——-------——- Method 7211
Flexibility, low Moisture absorption:
te~erature------------ Method 2011 Fibroue covering_-------—---- mthod 8221
Flexin&-—-—------—---- Methods 6121 I~ulatid~-—----——-----— 1 , Method 8211
4 and 6131 Oil resistance: Insulation
Heat distortio~-_---—-- ifsthod5021 and sheath--------—-——--- Methods 4221

4
$ieatshock—-—--——-——— Method 5011 and 4223
Light reBistance---—--- Method 4131 opening: Armor---------- Method 2181
Moisture absorption, Werlap: Cotton tape------- Method 1711
mechanical-----------——- Method 8211 Oxygen pressure test:
Oil resistance--------— Methods 4221 Insulation and Sheath—----- Method 4011
and 4223 OZone resistance: Insulation
Oxygen pressure test___— Method 4011 and sheat~----------------- Method 4111
Ozona resistance--------- Method 4111 Pair:
Petrolatum resistance----- Method 4211 Shielded, definition of----- I Section 5“
Resistance: . Twisted, definition of------- SeCtiOn 5
Defia.tion of----_------— Section 5 Petrolatum: Resistance,
Determination of--------q Method 6031 insulation and sheat~ ---—-y 1 Method 4211
PCD.TEST MH~D STD. W.22S
.
 {
Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

FED. TEST METHODSTD. MO. 22S

April 14, 1967

SUBJECT INllEX-Continued

SubJect I Index Subject Index

Picks: Softening point: Fibrous

Braids, picks per inch--—- Method 8011 coverin~-------------------- Method 5111
I%r inch, definition of--- Section 5 Specific gravity:
Pitch diameter: Definition Insulation:
of------------------------ Section 5 Hydrostatic----------------- Method 8322
Ply : ~cnometer ------------------ Method 8321
Braid, ply of yarn-------- Method 8021 Springiness: Armor wire---- Method 2161
Definition of-------- Section S Stranded conductor:
Yarn, definition of-------- Section S Definition of----------- Section 5
Resistance: Tape:
Abr-io&.--------------- Method 2211 Cotton:
Surface, Finished Wire and Flexibll”ity--------— ------- Method 2031
Cable-----—--.——- Method 6041 Lay, direction of------ Method 8111
Resistance, electrical: Werlap-----_-_----------- Method 1711
Armor, steel--_——------— Method 6011 Thickness:
Conductor---— -------------- Method 6021 Dial micrometer--------—-- Method 1124
Insulatio~-----------.--_- Method 6031 Micrometer caliper------- Method 1121
Rope lay: Definition of----- Section 5 Varnished cloth:
Serving or wrap: Dielectric strength______ tiethod6221
Angie ----------------------- Method 1621 Flamabillty-------—------ $Iethods5211,
Coverage-------------------- Method 8131 5221. and
Lay: 5231
Direction of--------------- Method 8111 Lay. direction of---------- Method 8111
Length of--—------ -------- Method 1431 Tensile strengtL---------- Method 3171
Thickness: Thickness---------------—- Method 1051
Diameter tape-------- tietnotiii53 .9vL&~ge
. ,~. ‘*ithstaii&__------ !.!c$!x?ds 6:21
Micrometer caliper------- Methods 1141 and 6131
and 1151 Tearing strength:
Yarn size----------------—- Method 8041 Definition of---------------- Section 5
Sheath: Insulation and sheath ------ Method 3111
Lead: Temperature: Testing room
ComWsitio~--------------- Method 7231 humidity and temperature----- Section 7
Thickness: Tensile strength:
Micrometer caliper, flat Conductors:
anvil-------------------- Method 1313 Hard-drawn copper---------- Method 3212
Micrometer caliper, round Soft, annealed copper---- Method 3211
anvil-------------------- Method 1311 Definition of----------------Section 5
Plastic, rubber: Insulation and Sheath ------ Method 3021
Air oven test------------- Method 4031 Varnished clotL ------------ Method 3171
Air pressure test--------- Method 4021 Tensile stress:
Composition, qualitative Definition of---------_--_— Section 5
tests------------------- Method 72S1 Insulation and sheatk ------- Method 3041
Elastomer, qualitative Tension set:
tests-----------—-.---M- ethod 7251 Definition of-------------- Section 5
Elongatio,~---.---.------- Method 3031 Insulation and sheath -------- Method 3161
Light resistance----------- Method 4131 Test tube heat-aging: Insu-
Oil resistance------------ blethods4221 lation and sheatk.-----_--- !dethod4041
and 4223 Thickness:
Oxygen pressure test------- Method 4011 Armor:
Ozone resistance---_—--- Method 4111 Braided metal:
Petrolatum resistance------ Method 42Il Diameter tape-------__— Method 1223
Specific gravity------- Methods 8321 Micrometer caliper--------- Method 1221
and 8322 Metal ta~_--------_--_----- Method 1211’
Trearing strengtL -------- Method 3111 Brai&----—-------_--.----- Method 1111
Tensile strengtL-----__-- Method 3021 Insulation.
Tensile stress------------- Method 3041 Dial micrometer------------- Method 1013
Tension set--------------- Method 3161 Micrometer Caliper----------’Method 1011
Test tube heat-aging------- . Method 4041 Optical-----------— ------- Method 101EI
Thickness---------------- Method 1331 Pin-gage dial mlcrometer--- hlethod1014
Shielded pair: Definition Jute bedding:
of -------------- ---—--- --- Section S Diameter tape-------------- Method 1173
Size: Micrometer caliper--------~ Method 1171
Conductor------------------- , Uethod 1431
YarL------_--_---------7 Method 8041 i
FED. TESTMET~D S~.NO.~

3
 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

~EO. TEST METHOD STD. NO. 218

April 14, 1967

SUSJECT INDEX-Cent inued

I
Subject I Index Subject ~ Index
I

Serving: Resistance to petrolatu~---- hfethod 2021

Diameter tape..--------- Method 1153 Tensile strength ----------- i Method 3171
Micrometer caliPer------—— Method 1151 Thickness----------------- Method 1051
Sheath: Voltage withstand, after
Lead, micrometer caliper: flexing:
Flat anvil--------------- Method 1313 Low tem~rature------------- Method 6131
Round anvil-------------- Method 1311 Room temperature---------
-—- Method 6121
Plastic. rubber------------ Method 1331 Voltage withstand:
Shrinkage------------- ---- Method s231 Cable and wire-------------- Method 6111
Tapes: / Insulation------------------ dethods 6121
Cotton: 1 and 6131
Dial micrometer--.-—--- Method 1124 Weight:
Micrometer caliper-------1 Method 1121 Cable and wire-—---- ----- Method 8311
Metal --------------- ------- Method 1211 Conductor------------------- Method 8311
Varnished cloth and tape--- Method 1051 Covering material-------- Method 8311
Wrap--------------------—- Method 1141 Width: Armor, metal tape--- Method 1411
Thread: Fibrous covering---- Method B031 Wire Definition of----------- Section 5
Tightness: Armor-------- Method 2171 Wrap and serving:
Toughness: Armor wire----- Method 2131 Angle of yarn---------------4 Method 1621
Twisted pair: Definition Of-- Section 5 Coverage-------------------- Method S131
Varnished cloth and tape: Lay:
Dielectric strength -------- Method 6221 Direction of--------------- Method 8111
Flammability----------------- Methods 5211, Length of------------------ Method 1531
5221, anti Thickness---------:---------- )vethod1141
5231 Yarn size-------------------- Method 8041
Flexina, reSl5tance---—---- Method 202~ Yarn: Size, definition 1
Lay . direction Of---------- j s,ettioti
8lii Gf------- ----------------- ~‘.-(:tion 5

FED. TES7MET~0STB. ==

4
 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

FED. TEST METHOD STD. NO. 228

Amil 14. 1967

SECTION 5
DEFINITION OF TERMS

1. DEFiNITION
L 1 The following definitions cover general
2. Q End. An end is an individual warp yarn
terms.
2.10 Finished conductor. A finished con-
2. GENERAL TERMS ductor 1s the meTal COndUCtOr with insulation and
any covering present before assembling into a
2.1 Bunched lay. In a bunched lay conductor, complete cable.
the strands are twisted together in the same
dtrectton wtthout regard to geometrical arrange- 2.11 Insulated conductor (insulated wire). An
ment insulated conductor (Insulated wtre) is a conductor
(wf.re) surrounded by a layer or layers of non-
2.2 Carrier. A carrierIstheyarnor com- conducting matertal (insulation) which tsolates
bination of several yarns latrf parallel
inthe the conductor (wire) from other conducting
bratdby a single bobbin of the braiding
machine. materials or from ground,

2.3 Circularroil.A ctrcular mt.1isa unitoi 2.12 Insulation. Inaulatton 18 nonconducting

=ea equaltov/4 or 78.54percentofa square material used to separate a conducting material
roil. The cross-section area of a circle in ctr- from other concfuctore or from ground.
CULU roilsis,therefore, equal to the square of .
its dtameter tn mfls. A circular inch 1s equal 2.13 Insulation resistace. The haulation
to 1, 000, 000 circular mik, resistance o! an insulated conductoristheelec-
trical resistance offered by Itsinsulation toan
2.4 Completedwireor cable.A completed impresseddtrect- currentpotential tendingto
wtre or cqble is one on which all manufacturing producea leakageofcurrentthroughthesame.
operations have been complsted and which is
offered for inspection 2.14 Lay o! twist. The lay ot tvnst M the
ratio of the length of l’ay to the diameter of an
2.5 Concentric lay. A concentric laycon- individual finLahed conductor or to the pitch
ductoror cabletacomposed of a central core diameter of any layer of conductors of which the
Q eurrounkf by oneor more layersofhelically cable is composed,
wouti strandsor tneulated conductors. It is
optional for the successive layew to be 2.15 Length of Isy. The length of lay of
alternately reversed In direct.tml of lay (true any helically wouti strand of lnaulated cenductor
concentric lay) or to be in the same direction is the axial length of one complete turn of the
(undfrectional lay). hel@ ueually expressed in inches.

2.6 Conductnr.A conductorisa wireofctr- 2, 16 Median. When thenumerical values for

cularcrosssectionora groupofwiresnot a given properry are arranged in ascending or
usuallyinsulated
from one another,suitable
for descending order, the median is obtained as
trsmemitttrqra
singleelectric
currenk follows :

2.7 Direction of Iry. The direction of lay ie a. When the number of values is odd, the
the lateral direction, either right-hand or left- medtan is the middle value in the eeries.
hand, fn which a atrand or insulated conductor
passes over the top as it recedes from an b, When the number of valuea is eve% the
observer looking a(ong the axis of the conductor median ts the arithmet.tc average of the two
or cable. middle valuee,

2.8 Elongation. Elongation is the perm-ent 2.17 Picks per inch. Picksper inchisthe
extension in the gage length of a test epeci~e~ number ofcarriersin either direcUon contained
measured after rupture, and expressed a9 a in 1 inch of the braid measured parallel to the
percentageof the original we length. Ultimate axis of the finished wire or cable,
elongation is the extension measured at the
moment of rupture and expressed as a percentage 2.18 Pitch diameter. The pitch diameter
oftheoriginal gagelength.For example,ifa of any layer of conductors of a cable M the dia-
1-inchgage is marked on an unstretched specimen meter of the circle passing through their centers.
and the specimen la stretched until the gage
marks are 7 inches apar$ elongation is 7 2.19 Ply. A ply is an individual stngle yarn
- 1 inch = 6 inches or 600 percenL in a ply yarn.

FED, TEST, METHOD STD, NO, 228

1
 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

FED. TEST METHOD STD. NO. 228

Aprd 14, ‘1967 .
DEFINITION OF TERh&-Continued

2.20 Ply yarn. A ply yarn is the product 2.2’7 Tension se~ Tension set is the elonga-
formed by twietmg together *O or more tion remaining after a specimen has been stretched
single yarns. and held at a spectiled elongation for a given
period of time, thenhas been relieved of the
2.21 Ro}e. lay. In a rope-lay conductor the force, and is allowed to rest for a definite
stranded meumers are *isLed together with a period of time. It is emreseed, as a percentage of
concentric lay, and the stranded members the distace between the bench marks on the
emselves may have either a bunch~ concen- unstretched spechnerb For e-lple, a specimen
b7 c, or rope lay. ‘is stretch~ from 1 to 5 inches for a period
of 10 minutes and then released. Itslengthafter
2.22 Shielded pair. A shielded pair M a the 10 minutes rest is 1.2 inches; therefore, the
iwis ted pti over which a close braid of copper set under these conditions is O. 2 inch or 20
wire has been applied. percenL

2.23 Stranded~onductor. A stranded con- 2.28 Twisted pair. A twtsted pair is com-
ductor is a conductor composed of more titan pcmd of two irrsdated conduckwa lwisted
one wire, together.

2.24 Tearing stravgth. Tearing strength is 2.29 Unidirectional lay. Unidirectional lay is
the ratio of the maximum force applied during that variation of concentric lay in which all the
tear of a specimen to the thicicness of the helical layers of strands comprising the concen-
unstretched specimen. tmc conductor have the same direction of lay.
The construction includes normal unidirecuonai
2.25 TensiJe strength. Tensile strength is lay, i]] which each successive layer has a greater
the maximum force per unit of the original lay length than the preceding layer, and unidirec-
cross-6 ectiomal area of the specimen which tional equal lay (unilay), generally limited to 19
~pqlj!t~ !n~h~ rq3tirpof t!he spectmen. rt is strands; in which all helical layers have the
calculated by riividimg the m~mum force in same length of lay.
pounds by the original cross-sectional area in
square inches. 2.30 Unilay. See “’unidirectional ecfud lay”
under Wn.i&zectionsl lay. “
2.26 Tensile stress. Tensile stress is the
force per unit of original cross-sectional area 2.31 Wire. A wire ta a slemier rod of ,
of the unstretched specimen rquired to stretch filament o! drawn metal.
the specimen to a stated elongation It is
expressed in pounds of tmaion force per squm-e 2.32 size.
Yam Yarn size (yarn number)
inch at the stated eiongatiom For example, is a conventionalrelative mexure of fineness
1, 000 pounds per square inch at S00 percent or dimension. it is expressed as the number of
eiongatiom It is often designated in rubber standard lengths per standard weight of the
techrmIogy by the term “’modulus” material.

FED. TEST h’lETHOD STD. NO, 228

2
 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

FED. TEST METNOD STD. NO. 228

APril 14, 1967

SECTION G
TEMPERATURE AND HUMIDITY OF CONDITIONING ROOM

L CONDI’TXOMNG 1.2 Dispute testing. In the case of dispute

or disagreement between the laboratories,
1.1 Standard atmosphere. Unless otherwise unless otherwise specified, the specimen shall
specified all physical tests of wire and cable be conditioned h an atmosphere of 50 ●4
shall be made at a room temperature of 27° percent relative htity and a temperature of
+5” C. (8o” ●9° F, ) except in the case of dis- 23° *X* c. (?3. 5“ i2° r).
pute or disagreement between laboratories. It
is intended that the laboratory be maintained a6 L 3 Time of cotilUontng. Unless otherwtse
closely as possible to 23” C. and a relative SpeClfIed, the” specimens shall be Cotiitioned
humidity of 50 percenL The tolerances tndicated for not less than 3 hours before being tested
are meant to cover variations from these speci- and shall be tested in the same atmosphere.
fied cond~tiona which maY occur atdifferent
locatlons in the room.

FED, TEST METHOD STD. NO, 228

1
 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

FED. TE$T. METW3DSTD.MD.=

April 14, 1967

SECTION.
7
NOTES

(Activities outside the Federal ~vernment may obtain copies O! Federal Specifications.
Standards, and Handbooks as outlined under General Information in the index of Federal
Sy?cifications and Sttin rds and at the Prices indicated in the Index. The Index, which
includes cumulative monthly supplements as issued, is for sale on a subscription basis by
the Superintendent of Documents, U. S. Government Printing office, Washington, D.C. 20402.

(F ,le copies of this specification and other product specifications required by activ-
itie. outside the Federal (kwern!uent for bidding purposes are available without Charue at
tts General Services Administration Regional Offices in Soston, New York, Washington,
D, c,, Atlanta, chiCagO, Kansas City, MO., Dallas, Denver, San ?ranci.eco, Los Angeles, and
Seattle, Wash.

(Federal Government activities maY obtain copies of Federal Specifications, Standards,

and Handbooks and the Index of Federal specifications and Standards from established dis-
tribution points in their agenciea,)

J2USTODIANS:
Army - EL Army - None
Navy - SH Navy - YD, MC
Air Force - 17 Air Force - None

REVIEW A~IVITIES: PREPARING ACTIVITY~

Army - EL, MI, MO, MU krmy - EL
Navy - SH, UP
Air FUrce - ~1. 15 X4. 85

FED. TEST METHOD STD.~.=

1
 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Method 1011
April 14, 1%7

THICKNESS, INSULATION; MICROMETER CALIPER

L SCOPE into contact with the surface of the conductor
1.1 This method is intended for use in de- in such a manner that the conductor is not dis-
termining the thickness of the insulation of i.n- torted. The criterion of contact is the initial
suhted wire and cable. It. is not mcmnmended development of frictional r&stance to move-
for use when the thickness of the insulation is ment of the conductor betwwm the micrometer
lees than 3/64 inch. Surfaces.
Z SPECIMEN 4A3 Three sets of meaaunmenta equally
Z1 The specimen shall bes piece of the in- spaced along tie length of the specimen shall
spection unitatleast2 feet in length fmm which be made. Each set of mee.vurementa shall con-
any covering over the insulation has been sist of the maximum and minimum diametem
removed. at the place measured. The diameter over the
3. APPARATUS AND REAGENTS insulation and over the oonductor or separator
3.1 The apparatus and magenta shall be as (if one is used) shall be determined as nearly
followe : as practicable at the same poink
3.1.1 il(a%rorwtm IMZiper graduated to mad 42 Minimum thickn-
in roils or 0,001 inch and having flat surfmes on 4.2.1 The inspection unit shall be examined
both until and end of spindlq each approxh for thin placw in the insulation. The specimcw
mntaly 0.25 inch in diameter. The surfaces of shall be taken from the inspection unit so as to
anvil and spindle shaLl be parallel b within include the point where the insulation is consid-
(l~i ;K1l. ered thn thinnest nnd shall be fr& from mechan-
3.1.2 Wiv”no cloth. ical damage. Any saturan~s or extraneous ma-
SL3 i/’Akwufo?vn0?’ other MdaN4? 80&?ni?. terials shall be removed from the inazdation by
4 PROCEDURE menns of the cloth and solvent. The insulation
&l Average thicknm * shall be removed from the specimen on the side
Ul The specimen shall be free from me opposite the point considered thinneeL A
ohanical damagfk Any saturants or other measurement including the thickneaa of the
extraneous rntiriale shall be removed from the insulation at the point considered thinnest and
specimen by means of the clor,h and eolvenk the diameter of the conductor or separator (if
The rmcrometar caliper ahdl be applied directly one is used) shall be made by applying the cal-
over the insulation so that the specimen can just iper in the manner described in 4.1.1 for deter-
be moved between the anvil and the spindle mining the diameter over the insulation and the
without distortion of the insulation. The di- value recorded as &
ametir over the insulation shall be read from 422 The insulation at the point considered
the micmmeter diper aoale and the value m- thinn* ehall then-be removed from the con-
Corded as D1. ductor and the diameter over the conductor or
&l~ The insulation ehd then be removed wparator (if one is used ) mensured as described
from the conductor and the diameter over the in 4.1.2 and the value recorded as d~.
conductor or the separator (if one is used) 423 The measurement over the insulation
measured as described above and the value re- and the dkneter over the conductor or separa-
oorded as D,. If B separator is prwen$ the tor shall be determined as nearly as practicable
diameter over the eeparatir shall be measured at the same poinL
as described for the diameter over the insula- 424 If no thinnest point is located in the
tion. If s sepamtor is not preean$ the anvil insulation of the inspection unit, the procedure
and spindle of the caliper shall just he brought shall be se described in 4.1.

FED, TEST METHOD STD. NO. 228

I
 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Method 1011

6. RESULTS specification, three specimens from each inspec-

5.1 Calculation% tion unit shall be tested.
5.1.1 Average thicknw. The thiclmees of 54!Jl The sverage thickness of the insula-
the insulation at any point shall be caiculat.ed sa tion of the inspection unit shall be the average
follows : of the results obtained from the specimens
Thicknem, inch=D,-DJ tested.
2
53 Minimum thickness.
Where:
~,=~e dlamet~ o?er tbe insulation
at thepOhlt 53.1 If s thinnest pwnt is found in the in-
mesmnad, inches sulation of the inspection unit (4.2), the mini.
D,=~e d~meter oTer the conductor
or separator
at mum thickness of the insulation of the insp
thepointmeasured, lnclm tion unit shrill be the thickness of the insulation
5.1.2 Minimum thiCk$88. The minimum obtained at that poinL
thickness of the insulation shall be calculated as 53.2 If no thinnest paint is found in the
follows : insulation of the inapecti’ n unit (4.2), the min-
ThIckneq Incb=drdi imum thickness of the insulation of the inspec-
Where: tion unit shall be the smallest of all valuee
d,-the thlckneee o?er tbe insulation
and conductor
or eeparator atthetbkmat polnkInches averaged in determining the avemge thicknq
or eeperator, 5.2.2.
&=tbe diameteroverthe condnctor
Inchrn 5.4 The a~erage thickness and minimum
5.2 Average thickness. thickness of the insulation of the inspection unit
5.2.1 Unless otherwise specified in the detail shall be recorded to the nearest rnil or 0.001.

FED. TEST METHOD STD. NO 228

2
 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

# Method 1013
April 14, 1967

THICKNESS, IIWJLAT?ON; DIAL MICROMETER

1. SCOPE 4.L3 Three sets of mensnrement.9 equally
1.1 This method is intended for use in de- spaced along the length of the specimen-shall
termining the thickness of the insulation of be made. Erich set of measurements shall con-
insulated wire end cable. It ia not recom- sist of the maximum and minimum diameters
mended for use when the nominal thicknses of It the place measured. The diameter over the
the insuldion is less than %4 inch, It is fact.sr insulation and over the conductor or sepErntor
than method 101L (if one is used) shall be determined as.nearly
Z SPECIMEN as practicable at the same point.
2.1 The specimen shall bes pieoe of the in- 42 Minimum thicknm
spection unit ●t least 2 feet in length from 4.2.1 The inspection unit shall be examined
which any cwering over the inaulstion has been for thin plnree in the insulation. The specimen
removed. shall be taken from the inspection unit so as to
3. APPARATUS AND ItEAGENTS include the point where the insulation is con-
3J The apparatus and reagente shaU be as sidered the thinnest and shrill be free from
follows : mechanical dnmnge. Any snturnnts or extra-
3.1.1 Dial micrometer with a flat and and neous mnterinls shrill be removed from the in-
a tit p~eme? foot 0.078*0,003 inch wide and sulation by means of the cloth and solvent.
0.975 a 0.015 inch long which exerts a total force 42.2 The insulation shall be removed from
of 10*2.0 grams on the specime~ the force the specimen on the side opposite the point con-
being applied by meana ofs weight. The eur- sidered thinnest- A measurement including the
faces of the anvii nrid piwwr foot shrill be par- thicluwss of tl:e insuli~tion at the point con-
allel to within 0.0001 inch. The dial ehall be sidered thinnest and the diameter of th~ ccm-
gmduated to read in mile or 0.001 inch+ ductor or separator (if one is used) shall be
3X4 Wi$ingO&t& made by applying the dial micrometer in the
~w3 C?lhf- 0?Oth$r 81bitid/4 80hW?d. manner deecribed in 4.1.1 for determining the
& PROCEDURE diameter over the insulation snd the value re-
4.1 Avemge thickness corded as d,. The insulation at the point con-
4.1.1 The epecimen ehall be frte from m* sidered thinnest shall then be removed from the
chanical damage. Any eaturantsor other ex- conductor and the diameter over the conductor
traneous materials till be removed from the or separator (if one in used) measured as de-
epecimen by meana of the cloth and aolvenk
scribed in 4.1.2 and the value recorded as d,.
The specimen ehall be placed on the anvil of the
4.23 The mwsurement over the insulation
micrometer and the preaaer hot lowed gently
and the diameter over the conductor or aapam-
(not dropped) until it contaeta the surface of
tor shall be determined x nearly as practicable
the insulation. The diameter over the inmb
tion ehall be read from the did and the vsltte St the same point.
recorded aa Da. 424 If no thinneet point is located in the
&.12 The inmhtion shall then be mtnovad insulation of the inspection uni~ the procedure
from the canductor uid the diameter over the shall be ae described in 4.1.
canductor or the eepsrator (if one in used) & RESULTS
measured M dmcribed ●bove and the due re- 3.1 The reaulte shall be aa described in
corded as Z)p method 1011.

FED, TEST METHOD STD. NO. 228

I
 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Method 1014
~PKll14, 1967

THICKNESS, INSULATION, MINIMUM; PIN-GAGE DIAL MICROMETER

L SCOPE sidered the thinn~ and shall be free from
lJ This method is intended for use in de- mechanical damage. Any saturants or extrane-
mrmining the minimum thickness of the in- ous materials shall be removed from the insula-
sulation of insulated win and cable. It is rec- tion by means of the cloth and solvent. The
ommended for use when the thicknem of the specimen slmll be alipped over the pin of the mi-
insulation is 1- than Y64inch. It is more rapid crometer and the presser foot lowered gently
than method 1018 but is W accurate. It is not (not dropped) until it contacta the outer sur-
applicable to the inmktion from ● stranded face of the insulation. The thickness of the in-
conductor or when the diametar of the cmnduc- sulation shall be read from the dial immedlataly
tor is less than 0.042 incL after the presser foot has come to rest on the
2 SPECIMEN specimen, The specimen shall be rotated and
2.1 The specimen shall be a piece of the in- ●t least 5 measurement made ●round the cir-
spection unit appmxixnately 8 inchse in length cumference of the specimen in order to find the
fmm which any covering owr the insuhtion, minimum thickness which ahnll be recorded,
and the separator and conductor have been re- The presser foot of the gage shall not be in
moved without splitting the insulation. The contnct with the specimen while it is being ro-
inner wall of the specimen shall not be tom or tated.
dsmnged in removing the separator or con- 42 If no thinmst point is located in the in-
ductor. sulation of the inspection uni~ and unless other-
8. APPARATUS AND RdAQENTS wise specified in the detnil specification, three
3.1 The appimacus nmi reageriti shal! bc as +ecim~ns from the inspection unit shall be
follows : teeted.
2Ll A @n-gag@ dial microwwtcwwith s 5. RESULTS
b \ fixed pin 0.042=0.001 inch in diameter Bnd %*” 5.1 If a thinnest point is found in the insula-
N ~ %6 in~ in ~ength u the ~vil ~d ● flat Pmr tion of the inspection uni$ 4.1, the minimum
\ foot 0.04!2=0.001 iIICh wide and 0.312=0.002 thickness of the insulation of the inspection unit
inch long, whichexerts a total force of 2S * ehall be the thickness of the insulation obtsined
grams on the 8pecimen, the force being applied
at that poin~
by means ofs weight. ‘I’he micrometer shall be
5J2 If no thinnest point is found in the in-
graduated to reed in mile or 0.001 inch.
SJ2 wiping cloth. sulation of the inspection uni$ the minimum
US CMurojom or otbr sw”tab?e8oZwnt. thickness of the insulation of the inspection unit
& PROCEDURE shall be the smnllest of all vaiu= obtained from
4.1 The impactionunit aid be examined the spacimena taated.
for thin placesin the insulation. The specimen 53 The minimum tilckness of the insulation
Aallbet skenfromt heinspectionu niteoaa to of the inspection unit shall be recorded to the
include the point whare the insulation ia con- neamet mil or 0.001 incL

FED, TEST METHODSTO. NO. 228

 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Method 1018
April 14, 1%7

THICKNESS, INSULATION; OPTICAL

I. SCOPE “ the rulings. If the thickness is such that it does
1.1 This method is intended for use in do- not all lie in the field of view and cannot be read
tamining the thickness of the insulation of in- directly, the specimen shall be moved by means
mdated wire and cable. It is more acawmte of the mechanical stage until the inner edge of
than methods 1011 and 1018. This method is the insulation is tangent to a cross hair in the
recommended for use where a high degree of ocular. The specimen shall be moved by means
accuracy and precision is desired. In caee Q of the stage until the outer edge of the insula-
dispute ariaw as to method for detmnining the tion is tangent to the cross hair. The @ings
thickness of insulation, this method shall be on the disc or slide passed over during the mov-
used wherever applicabh ment shall be counted and the value recorded.
2 SPECIMEN 4.L3 When an apparatus with a scale in the
21 The specimen shall be a abort ]ength of eyepiece is used, the ruled glass disc shall be
the inspection unit with full croaa-section of the placed in the ocular and calibrated. The speci-
insulation cut perpendicular to the axis of tbe men shall be placed on the stats so as to expose
wire or cnble. the full thicknc.ss of the insulation. The micro-
3. APPARATUS AND REAGENTS scope shall be focused on the specimen and the
&l The appamtus and reagents shall be as thickness of the insulation determined by count-
follows : ing the divisions of the ruled disc in the eye-
&Ll Afimoacope equipped with devices ca- pieee which cover the distance from the inner
pable of making measurements accurate to at edge to the outer edge of the insulation and the
least 0.0002 inch. vnlue recorded.
3.12 A suitable instrument is a standnrd mi- 4.L4 One set of mcusurement.s orI each speci-
croscope equipped with ● 6- or t3-power eyepiece, men shall be made. Each *t of measurement.s
an objective of 48-millimeter focal lengtt+ a shall consist of the maximum and minimum
znechanicnl stage, and a ruled glass disc or thickness.
slide 42 Minimum thicknese.
3.L3 wiping Czotk 421 The inspection unit shall be examined
!LL4 L’hlowform m otkr mdd$le solvent. for thin plnceM in die insulation. A specimen
4. PROCEDURE shall be cut perpendicular to the axis of the
4.1 Average thicknem. wire or cable so as to expose for maummement
4Al The specimen shall be free from me- the point wherw the insulation is conaidemd
chanical damage and shall be cut perpendicular the thinnes~ The ti]ckness of the thhnest
to the axis of the win or cable so as to expose point of the insulation shall then be measured
the full cross-sectional area of insulation. Any as described in 4.1.
anturanta or other extraneous materials shall be 422 lf no thinnestpoint is located in the
removed from the specimen by means of the insulation of the inspection uni~ the procedure
cloth and solvent. shall be as described in 4-1.
4.12 When the apparatus dmcribed in 3.12 5. RESULTS
is used, the ruled glass disc or slide shall be &1 Average thickn=
placed on the cut aurfaes of the cross section of 5J.1 Unless otherwise specified in the detail
the specimen with the ruled surface in contact specification, five specimens from each inspec-
with the insulation. The thickness of the in- tion unit shall be tested.
sulation, if not more than 1A inch, will be in 5.12 The average thickness of the insula-
the field of view and shall he read dirmtly from tion of the inspection unit shall be the average

FED. TEST METHOD STD. NO. 223

1
 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Method 1018

of the &ndta obtined from the qecimona 622 Iinothinnmtpoint iafoundintlwin-

suldion of the inspedon uni~4~ the minimum
S3 Minimu& thicknw. thicknem of the inmdatiori of the i.nspdon unit
52.1 If a thinnest point in found in the in- shall be the snmllest of 011Yaluea averaged in
sulation of the inspection unit, 4.2, the mini- determining tha average tLiclrn~ 5X2.
mum thicknese of the insulation of the inspec- 53 l%e ma-rage thiclmuia and minimum
tion unit shall be the thicknem of the insulation thicknew of the insulation of the inspection unit
obtained St that point. W be reconied ta the nauwt nil of 0.001 inch.

‘&
%

FED, TEST METHOD STO. HO. 228

 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Method 1051
APril 14, 1967

THICKNESS, VARNISHED CLOTH

1. SCOPE 4J The specimen shall be placed on the anvil
1.1 This method is intended for use in deter- of the dial micrometer and the presser foot
mining the thickness of varnished cloth. lowered gently (not dropped) until it contacta
2. SPECIMEN the surface of the tripe. The thickness of the
21 The specimen shall be a piece of the var- specimen shall be read from the dial and the
nished cloth at least 12 inches in length taken value recorded. Five measurements equally
from R single tripe layer of the inspection unit. spaced along the length of the specimen shall
9. APPARATUS be made.
3J The apparatus shall consist of a dial 5. RESULTS
micrometer having a flatanvil not less than 5.1 Unless otherwise specked in the detail
0.25 inch in diameter and 8 flat presser foot speci fkation, one specimen from each tape se-
0.25 *0.01 inch in diameter which exerts a total lected for test, 4.1, shall be measured.
force of 3.0= 0.1 ounce on the specimen, the 5.2 The average thickness of the tape shall
force being applied by means of a weight. The be the average of the five measurements made
surfaces of the nnvil and prmer foot shall be on the specimen teated.
parallel to within 0.0001 inch. The dial shall 5.3 The minimum thickness of the tape shall
be the smallest of n]] values averaged in deter-
be graduated to read in roils or 0.001 inch,
mining the nverage thickness, 5.2,
4. PROCEDURE 5.4 The m~ximurn thicknes.. of the tape shall
4.1 At least 12 inches of ench tripe layer shall be the largest of uII vnlues averaged in de(er-
be removed from the inspection unit+ Unless minil)g tlm avrruge ti]ilkness, 3.2.
otherwise specified in the detail specification, 10 55 The avernge, minimum, and maximum
percent of the tnpcs but not less than five tapes thicknesses of each tnpc tested shall be recorded
$hau be *!ec!ed at random for trot. to the n~nmst mil or 0.001 inch.

FED. TEST METHOO STD. NO, 228

 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

l$fethod 1111
Amil 14. 1%7

BRAID
L SCOPE over the laps of tape or over the tops of any
1.1 This method is intanded for win deter. braid marks in the insulatio~
mining the thickness of braids over the immla- 4.3 Three measurements eqmlly spaced
t:on of insulated wire and cable. along the length of the specimen shall be made.
2 SPECIMEN The diameter over the braid and over the core
!&I The specimen shall be a pica of the in. shall be determined aa nearly as practicable at
spection unit at least 2 feet in length from which the samepoink
any covering over the bmid has been removwi 4.4 If two braids are pmeen~ the thiclmeas
& APPARATUS AND REAGENTS of the outer braid ehall be determined from the
3.1 The appamtue and magenta shall be es the diameter over the inner braid.
follow?l : 43 in detenrdning the thicknas of the
over-all braid of s twin-conductor cable, the
w Acic?wmet+w odiper graduatedto read
in mileor U.UUI inch and having flat aurfacee diameter over the core, D, in 4.2, shall be equal
on both anvil and end of spindle, each approxi. to 1.64 times the diameter of the individual
matxly 026 inch in diameter. The surf- Of
conductor.
~nvil and spindle shall he parallel to within 5. RESULTS
0, ?001 inch. 5.1 Calculation. The thickness of the braid
at any point shall be calculated as f ollows:
u Wipiflyda%.
%13 (?h&TO&Wb
or other Juit&b 80k71t. TMckrteee, lnch~
LA-D,
4. PROCEDURE
where:
4.1 The specimen shall be fme from mec- D,-the diameter over the brnhi at thepointmeee-
hanical damage. Any saturnnts or extraneous ured. Inches
materials shall he removed fmm the braid by G=the diameter oTer the core at the point meaeured,
means of the cloth and aolvenk The microm. lnchee
etar caliper shall he applied directly over the 52 Unless otherwise specified in the detail
braid so that the specimen can just he moved specification, three specimens from each inspec-
between the anvil and spindle without distor- tion unit shall he tested.
tion cf the braid. Tbe diameter over the braid 53 The average thickneea of the bmid of
aldl be read from the micrometer caliper ecale the inspection unit ehall be the average of the
and the value recorded aa D,. results obtained from tbe specimens tested.
4.2 The bmid shall then be rwmoved froru %4 The minimum thMmess of the braid of
the speoimen and any eatumnts or other ax. the inspection unit shall be the smallest of all
traneous materials removed from the mwfaca of values averaged in detmmining the average
the CON (assembly under the braid) by means tbickneee, 6.3.
of the cloth and solvent. The diameter over 5.5 The average thickness and minimum
the core shall then be determined as described thickness of tbe braid of the inspection unit
for diameter over the braid and the value m- shall be recorded to the nearest mil or 0.001
recordedM D,, This me e.aurement shallhemade inch.

FEO, TEST METHOD STD, NO, 228

 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

lkbthod 1121
ADtil 14, 1%7

7WCKNESS, CO’ITON TAPq MICROMETER CALIPER

L SCOPE ebth and eolvenk The diameter owr the core
1.1 This method is intended for us in deter- Adl then be determined ee deecribed for di-
mining the thicknem of cotton tapa over the ameter over the tqe md the value ~tded M
inwlution of insulated vrim ●nd cabla It is D, Thismsuwrn@ ehd be made over the
aot considered as ●cumto as met.bl ll%L Aspsof arty tqe or over the top of q marh
Z SPECIMEN in tha W(IIL
Zl The specimen shall bes pieoeof tho in- U!rhree ~ti equally qwed
quxtion unit St least 9 * in langth fxwn along the qecimen shall h made. The diam-
which any exwering orer the tape has heart eter over the tape and over the com shall be
!wnOved. determined u nearly es p~cable st the same
& APPARATUS AND REAGENTS poink
si The sppllrmus md reagents shall be 8a U If more thut orie layer of tape is p~~
follo=e : each layer shall be meaeumd eepamtely.
&Ll Mi~mn~ttr mzh’pm ~duated to read & RESULTS
in mile or U.W1 wh ah(l ha VIIIg tint surfaces on &l CaleaJation. The thkknese of the tape
both snril and end of spindle, ●ach approxi- at any point ahmll be calculated as followu:
mately0.2S inch in diumeter. The surfaces of
•n~il and spindle shall be paral)el to within ~ hwb=~
0.0001 inch, When
8.1.2 Wipiny .-?oth. D,=tbe diametm ever tbe tam at the UOlu: mea-
3.12 (:lllorofmn or ofk miitnh?e solvent. wed! heba.
&m~@ da- OTU ~ ~~ ●t tb~ @nt ~
4. PROCEDURE
UN& luck
4.1 The specimen shrill be free from me-
C}scr,ics! denmge. ~h~ miwometer cnliper sbnll S4 Unk otherwise specified in the detail
be tppliad directly over the tape so that the spemlkation, time ape&ueua frahi ad iDspOC -

8pecimen can just be moved between the snvil tion unit shall be =ed.
and the spindle without distortion of the tap S3 The wemge thicknees of the tape of the
TIM diameter over the tripe shrill be rnd from inspection anit almll be the avrruge of tho reP
the micrometer caliper scule and the due re- suits ob~ined from the epecinws tested.
corded ●s D,. If psible, the measurement &4 The ntirhum thickness of the tipe of
shrill be:made st places wham the tqe is rtot the inspection unit shall be tho emnllest of ●ll
lapped. WIluea ● veqed in determining the ●verage
42 The tape shall then be mnoved fmm the t.hic~ 5.8.
specimen and any aeturents or other erttmeoue 6.S The ●verage tbickneee ●nd minimum
matarids removed from the Burfam of the eom thickneee of the tape of the inspection unit shall
(~bly under the tqw) by means of the be recorded to the nearest mil or 0.001 inch.

FED. TEST METHOD ST& MO, ~1

 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Method 1124
April 14.1967

THICKNESS, COTTON TAPE; DIAL MICROMETER

L ‘SCOPE it contacts the surface of the specimen. The
1.1 This method is intended for use in deta- thicknees of the tape shall be read from the dial
ining tho thickness of cotton tape over the and the w,! ue rmrded. Three measurement
insul~tion of insulated wire and cable. equally spaced along the length of the specimen
2 SPECIMEN shall be made.
2.1 The specimen shall be a piece of the tape 4.2 If thn wire or cable contains tapes ap-
at least 2 feet in length taken from the inspec- plied in more than one layer, each layer shall be
tion unit. tested separately.
3. APPARATUS . 5. RESULTS
3.1 The apparatus shall consist of a dial mi- 5.1 Unlms otherwise specified in the detail
cromet.a having a flat anvil not 18s than 0.25 apacfication, three specimens f mm each inspec-
inch in diameter and a flat preaaer foot tion unit shall be trxted.
0.25 *0.01 inch in diameter which exerts a total 5.2 The average thickness of the tape of the
force of 3.0* 0.1 ounce on the specimen, the
inspection unit shall be the average of the re-
fome being npplied by means of A weight. The
sults obtained from the specimens tested.
surfaces of the anvil and pr-r foot shall be
5.3 The minimum thickness of the tape of
parallel to within 0.0001 inch, The dial shell
be graduated to resd in roils or 0.001 inch. the inspection unit shall be the smallest of all
A PROCEDURE values averaged in detemnining the nvemge
4.1 The specimen shall be free from me- thickness, 5.2.
chanical damage. The specimen shall be placed 5.4 The average thickness and minimum
on the anvil of the dial micrometer and the thickness of the tape of the inspection unit shall
p-r foot lowered gentiy (not dropped j until be recm%d ta the nesrest mil or 0,001 inch.

FED, TEST METHOD STD. NO. 228

 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

M@hod 1141
Amil 14. 1%7

THICKNESS, WRAP
1. SCOPM core shall be measured in the came manner as
1.1 This method is intended for use in deter- described for diameter over the wrap and the
mining the thickness of wraps of insulated wim value recorded as D~.
and cable. 43 Three m-urements equnlly spaced
Z SPECIMEN along the length of the specimen shall be madw
2.1 The specimen shall be a piece of the in- The diameter over the wrap and over the com
spection unit a~ least 2 feet in length from shall be measured as nearly as practicable at the
which any covering over the wrap has been same poin~
removed. 4.4 If two wraps are present, the thickneae
3 APPARATUS AND REAGENTS of the outer wrap shall be detemnined from the
3,1 The apparatus and reagente shall be as diameter over the inner wrap.
follows : 6. RESULTS
“3J.I M“wrornde cd+wr graduated to read 5.1 Calculation. The thiclmess of the
in mile or 0.001 inch and having flat surfaces on wrap at any point shall be calculated as follows: .
both anvil and end of spindle, each approxi- .
‘Xldckaeaa,hlCb=~I-~, -
mately 0.25 inch in diameter, The eurfaws of 2
anvil and spindle shaIl be parallel to within Where:
0.0001 inch, Z),=t.be dhmeteroverthewrap at thepointrDeaa-
3.12 Wiping cloth. ured, inches
3J9 Chloroform or other suitable uolvent. D,=the ,liamet@r o~er Lhe core at ths point m-
are.% inchee
4. PROCEDURE
4.1 ‘T’he specimen shail be free irom me- 52 I?iihxs ct!iervisc spc%cc! k t!:e dctsi!
chanical damage. The micrometer culiper shall specification, three specimens from each inspec-
be applied directly over the wrap so that the tion unit shall be tested.
specimen can just be moved between the anvil 53 The average thickness of the wrap uf
and the spindle without distortion of the wrap. the inspection unit shall be the average of the
The diameter over the wrap ehaIl be read from remdte obtained from the specimens tedd
the miorometar scale and the value recordod 6.4 The minimum thickness of the wmp of
m D,. the inspection unit ehall be the anmlleat of s11
4.2 The vrmp shall then be removed from values ave~ in determining the average
the specimen and any fibers, eaturant+ or othar thicknq 6.9.
extraneous materials removed from the surface ‘“53 The avenge thiclrnesa and minimum
of the core (msembly under the wrap) by meana thickncns of the wrap of the inspection unit shall
of the cloth and eolvent. The diameter over the be =orded to the neared mil or 0.001 inch

FED. TEST METHOD STD. NO. 228

 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Method 1151
April 14, 1967

THICKNESS, SERVING; MICROMETER CALIPER

L SCOPE 42 The serving shall ty removed from the
1.1 This method is intanded for use in deter- specimen and any fibem, sRturants, or other
mining the thickness of the outside serving of extmmeous materials removed from the slirftm
armored Cab]a It is recommended for use of the core (assembly under the serving) by
when the wire or wble has a diameter of l= means of the cloth and solvent.
than one inch. 4S The diameter over the core shall be
2 SPECIMEN muwmed in the same manner as described for
21 The specimen shall be a piece of the in- diameter over the serving, and the value re-
apeotion unit A least 6 inches in length from corded as D,, The diameters over the serving
which any cxwering over the serving has bean and over the com shall be determined as nearly
ramovd as practicable at the same point.
& APPARATUS AND REAGENTS & RESULTS
S.1 The appamtus and magenta shall be as 5.1 Calculation. The thickness of the
follows : serving at any point shaIl be calculated as
3.L1 Uiorome ter odiper graduated to read follow19:
in mila or 0.001 inch and having flat surfaces D,—D,
on both anvil and end of spindle, each approxi- Thlcbeee,tnch=—
2
mately 0.25 inch in diameter. The surfaces of where:
mwil and spindle shall be parallel to within D,-the dlnmeter over the eem”lng at the point m-
0.0001 inch. urecl, Inches
3.12 Wiping ciotk D,=tbe dinrneter over the core atthepoint
UIermured,
8.1.3 Chloroform or other suitable solvent. lnqbeg
4. PROCEDURE 5.2 Unless otherwise specified in the detnil
4.1 The specimen shall be free from me- apecificntion, two specimens, one from each end
chanical dama~ The micrometer caliper shall of the inspection unit, sIMI1 be tested.
be applied directly over the aening so that the 53 The thickness of the serving of the in-
specimen can just be moved betwwm the anvil spection unit sha 11be the average of the msulti
and the spindle without distortion of the serv- obtained from the specimens tested.
ing. The diameter over the serving shall be 6.4 The thickness of the serving of the in-
mad from the micrometer cnliper scale and the spection unit shall be recorded tu the nearest
value recorded as D,. mil or 0.001 inch.

FED. TEST METHOD STD. NO. 22S

 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Method 1153
April 14, 1967

THICKNESS, SERVING; DIAMETER TAPE

1. SCOPE traneous mntcrkls removed from the surface of
1.1 This method is intended for use in deter- the core (aseembly under the serving) by menna
mining the thickness of the outside serving of of the cloth and solvenL The diameter over
armrnd cnble. It is recommended for use the core shn]l be mcaaured in the same manner
when the wire or cable hns an over-all diameter as dmcribed for diameter over the serving and
of one inch or more. the value recorded as D,.
2 SPECIMEN 4.3 The dinmetera over the seining and over
2.1 The specimen shall be a piece of the in- the core shall be menmmd m nedy se practi-
spection unit at lenst 6 inches in iength from cable at the snme place.
which any covering over the serving has been 5. RESULTS
removed. SJ Calculation. 7%0 thickness of the
3. APPARATUS AND REAGENTS *rving ●t any pka 6M1 be calculated S6
3.1 The apparatus and reagents shall be as follows :
follolvu : D-D,
TbIckneoe, MM-y
3.1.1 Dhwtev tape greduatedto rendto at
where:
lenst 0.01 inch. D,=the (lIfimet?r owr the oervlng at tbe ~him
3.1.2 W;pirt? cloth. measurt=d, lncbee
3.1.3 Chloroform or other m~.itab?eadvent. D~be demand orer tbe core at the Dlacamessar~
4. PROCEDURE IDcbee
4.1 The specimen shall be free from me- S.2 Unless otherwise specified in the detail
chfinica! dcm.nge. The rlinrneter tripe shall be specification, two sljecimens, o.le from each end
nppl ied direct ly over the serving of the speei- of the inspection unit, dml! *Wtested.
men in such a manner that the serving ie not 5.3 The thickness of the serving of the in-
distorted. The diameter over the serving shrill spection unit shall be the average of the rwmlta
be rend from the tape and the value recorded obtained front the specimens tested.
u Dk, 5.4 The thickness of the serving of the in-
44! ‘k serving shrill then be removed from spection unit shall be moorded to the neareat
the qxsimen and any eaturmtz+ Me- or ex- 0.01 inch.

FED. TEST METHOD STD. NO. 228

 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

lkfethod 1171
April 14, 1%7

THICKNESS, BEDDING; MICROMETER CALIPER

1. SCOPE read from the micronleter caliper scale and the
1.1 This method is intended for use in deter- vnlue recorded as D,.
mining the thickness of bedding of armored 4.2 The bedding shall be removed from the
cable. It is recommended for use when the wire specimen and any fibers$ soturnnt.s or extraneous
or cable has an over-all diametar of lea than 1 materials removed from the surface of the core
inch. ‘assembly under tbe bedding” by means of the
cloth and solvent. The diameter over the core
2 SPECIMEN
shell be measured in the same manner m de-
2.1 The specimen shall be a pieca of the in- scribed for diarnet.ar over the bedding and the
spection unit at least 6 inches in length from value recorded as D,. The diameter over the
which any covering over the bedding has been bedding and over th core shall be deterzninqd
removed. as nearlyas practicable at the same point.
3. APPARATUS AND REAGENTS 6. RESULTS
&l The apparatus and naagents shall be as 5.1 Calculation. The thickness of the
follows : bedding at any point shall be calculated as fol-
3.1.1 iliirmnutm mdi?cr gmduatad to read lows :
in mih or 0.001 inch and having flat surfnces D,—D,
Tliickurss, inch= ~
on both anvil and end of spindle, each approxi- where:
mately 0.25 inch in diameter. The surfaces of D,=the dltin,,,t(~r mer tl)e bmldlur attbe polot IIwos-
anvil and spindle shall be parallel to within ured, !nc’hw
0.0001 inch, D,=!l]e dlnwter over the core ot the point ineaqured.
!nc!:es
3.1.2 whim tlzoth.
5.2 IJnless odwr it’ise specified in the detail
3.L3 6’hluw/orm or othw witabk solvent.
specification, two specimens, one from each end
4. PROCEDURE of the inspection relit, shalt be tested,
4.1 The specimen aball be free from me- 6,3 The thickness of the bedding of the in-
chan ical dama~ The micrometer caliper shall spection unit shall be the avcmge of the results
be applied directly over the bedding so that the obtained from the specimens tested.
specimen can just be moved betwean the anvil 5.4 The thickness of tho bedding of the in.
and the spindle without distortion of the bed- spection unit shall be recorded to the nearest
ding. The diameter over the bedding shall be mil or 0.001 inch.

FED. TEST METHOD STD. NO. 228

I
 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Method 1173
April14, 1%7

THICKNESS, BEDDING; DIAMETER TAPE

1. SCOPE extraneous mderial remod from the eurfeoe
1.1 This method is intended for use in deter- of the core (assembly under the bedding) by
mining the thicknees of bedding of mnored meme of the cloth ●nd mlven~ ‘he diemeter
cable. It is recommended for use when the over the com etmll be mensumd in the woe man-
wire or cable has ● over-all diemeh”r of one ner es davcrilmd for diemetar ovw the bedding
inch or mom snd the YAM recorded es A
2 SPECIMEN 44 The diameter over the bedding and over
21 The specimen ehd bes pieceof the in- the core shell be determined ae nearly ee prno-
spection unit ●t leest 6 itwhm in length from ticable at the eune pk
which any covering over the bedding has been & RESULTS
removed. &l C81cuMioa The thicknaa of the bed-
& APPARATUS AND REAGEN’IS ding ●teny placaebe.11 becaleuktedu follows:
3.1 The sppmstue and reagents ehall be ea Da-b
follows : Tbtckneeu lneh~
3.1.1 l)hn?~er tape graduated to remd to at where:
least 0.01111A. l),=tbe diameter over the bedding ~t thR p~CO
3.12 Wim”wclPlnth. me=muad, kks
3&3 L’hluro!orrn or other iwitahl~ dljent. Dt= the rliumcter over the core ●t the place measured,
4. PIMKEDURE
4.1 The specimen aball h free from me- 5.2 Unks otherwise specified in the detd
chanical damage. The diameter tape shall be qwci&:lt ion, two specimens, one from each end
&@icd .- UA~W.J
a: .+1. O...
W*-+kn-. &dding of the s@- of the inspection uni~ shall be t8sted.
men in such ● manner that the bedding is not S.3 The thickness of the bedding of the in-
distorted. The diuneter over the heddingehall spection unit etmll he the average of the mmdta
be read from the tape and the value recorded M obtained from the specimens testad.
Di. &4 The thicknem of the bedding of the in-
4.2 The bedding shall then be &moved fmm spection unit ehdl he recoded to the nea*
Q\,~ the specimen and any eatursn@ 5bex or other 0.01 inch.

FED. TEST METHOD STD. NO, 228

 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Method 1211
A@l 14, 1%7

THICKNESS, METAL TAPE ARMOR

L SCOPE spindle is just brought into contact with the
1.1 This method is intended for use in deter- surfaces of the specimen (anvil in contact with
mining the thicknes6 of flat metal tapo or inter- the inner circumference) in such a manner tllni
locking armor of insulated wire and cabl~ the tape or armor is not distorted, The cri-
Z SPECIMEN terion of contact is the initial development of
21 The specimen shrd be the hpa or armor frictional resistance to movement of the tape or
removed from a pieca of the inspection unit at armor bet ween the n) icrometer surfaces. The
least ~ inches in length. The tape or armor thickness of the armor or tape at the place
6ha]] be removed in such a manner as to change measured shall be retid from the micrometer
its shape as little ESpossibl~ oaliper scale and the vnlue recorded.
& APPARATUS AND REAGENTS 43 Five measurement equally spared
3.I The appamhs and reagenta shall be ES around the circumference of the specimen shall
follows : be made.
3J.1 Micrometer caliper graduated to mad 5. RESULTS
in roils or 0.001 inch and hnving a hemispherical 5.1 Unless otherwise spectied in the detail
anvil with a radius of curvnt ure of 0.125=0.005 specification, two specimens, one from each end
inch and a flat-surface spindle of approximately of the inspection unit, shidl be tested.
0.25 inch in diameter, 52 Tho average thickness of the armor or
3.L2 Wiping cloth.
tape of the inspection unit shall be the average
3.13 Chlomfown or other vdabte eolvsnt,
of the results ob(ail~ed from the specimens
4. PROCEDURE
tested,
4.1 The specimen shall “~ * from me-
chanical damuge. Any di~ grease, aaturants, 5.3 The minimum tlli( kness of the arm-m or
or other extmneous materials ehall be removed tape of the inspection unit shall be the amullest
from the specimen by means of the cloth and of all values nvcragcd in det errnining the nver-
solvent. In the case of interlocking armor the age thickness, ,5.2.
specimen shall also be frM from jointed sec- 5.4 The avemge thicknes and minimum
tions. thickness of the armor or tripe of the inspection
4.2 The micrometer caliper shall he applied unit shall be recorded to the nearest mil or 0,001
dirdy to the specimen so that the anvil and inch.

FED. TEST METHOD STD. NO. 228

 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Method 1221
April 14, 1%7

THICKNESS, WOVEN OR BRAIDED METAL ARMOR;

MICROMETER CALIPER
1. SCOPE 42 The armor shall be removed from the
L1 This method is intended for use i~]deter- specimen and the fiinmetcr over 111~core (as-
mining the thickness of woven or braided metal sembly under the nrmor) determined and the
armor. It is recommended for use when the value recorded as D,. The micrometer cnliprr
wire or cable has an over-all diameter of 1SSS shall be applied directly over the core so that
thanone inch. the specimen can just be moved between the
2 SPECIMEN ~nvil and spindle without distortion of the cors.
Z1 The specimen shall be a piece of the in- 43 Three measurements equally spnced
spectionunit at least 2 feet in length. slrmg the length of the specimen shall be made.
& APPARATUS AND REAGENTS The diameter over the armor and over the core
3.1 The apparatus snd reagents shall be sa shall be determined as nearly as practicable at
follows : the same point.
21.1 Micromter catiper graduated to read 5. RESULTS
surfticrs on
in roils or 0.001 inch and hnving ll;~t 5.1 Calculation. The thickness of the
both anvil rml end of spindle each nplmmi- armor at nny puint skdl be calculated as
mutely 0.25 inch in diameter. The surfaces of follom”s:
the spindle and anvil shall b parallel to within Ttiickrme, lDcIJ=D,-1)1
0.0001 inch. ‘ --T
where:
3.1.2 Wiping ototh. ~,=the dlnme(w OVer flje nrmor at the point lneM-
3.1.3 Chlr.rolmm or other ~uituUe sm?rwtt. Ilrv,t, Irw‘1,4
4. PROCEDURE I?FWI !!inw!~r over the core nc the point measured.
4.1 The specimen shall be free from me- Il)vlwil
chanical dama~ Any di @ grease, or other 5.2 Unless ot hcrwiso specified in the rlct.nil
extraneous materials shall be removed from the specification, two specimens, wm from each end
specimen by means of the cloth arid SOI vent. of the insl~tion unit, shall be tinted.
The micrometer caliper shall be applied directly 53 The average thickness of th6 armor of
over the armor so that the anvil and spindle are the inspact ion unit sha 11be tho averuge of the
just brought into contnct with the specimen in results obt uiw.1 from the slwri UIMIS[rstwl.
such a mnnner that the armor is not distorted. 5.4 ‘1’heminimum thickness of the armor of
‘l’he criterion of contact is the initial develop- the inspection unit shall be the smullvst of id]
ment of frict ionnl rsaiatmce to t Iw movement of vallws nvcrngcd in determining the nrmage
the specimen between the micrometer surfaces. thickness, 5.3.
The diameter over the armor shall he read from 5.5 The average thickness and minimum
the micrometer scale and the value recorded thickness of tbe armor of the inspection unit
u D1. shall be recorded to the nearest mil or 0.001 inch.

FED. TEST METHOD STD. NO. 22S

 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Method 12z3
~pril 14, 1967

THICKNESS, WOVEN OR BRAIDED METAL ARMOR;

DIAMETER TAPE
1. SCOPE same manner es described for orer the armor
1.1 This method is intended for uae in deter- and the mlue recorded m D,.
mining the thickness of woyen or braided metal 4.3 Three measurements equally spnced
Brmor. It is recommended for use when the along the length of the specimen shall be made.
wire or cable has an over-all diameter of 1 inch The dimneters over the armor and over the core
or more. shall be determined as nearly as prncticnble at
2 SPECIMEN the same point.
21 The specimen shall he a piece of the in- 5. RESULTS
spection unit at least2 fet in length. 5.1 Calculation. The thickness of tie
& APPARATUS AND REAGENTS armor ●t any place ahnll be calculated as
follows :
3.1 The appamtus and reagents sha]] be as
D,-Ds
follows : Tblcknese, lnch=—
2
3.1.1 Diameter tape graduated to read to at whero:
least 0.01 inch. f),= the diaweter over the armor at the place
3.1.2 Wiping ctoth. meaaored, inches
D,sthe diameter over the core at the place measured,
3.13 CMoro form or other adable eolvent.
inches
4. PROCEDURE 52 Unless otherwise specified in the detail
4.1 The specimen shall be free from me- specification, two specimens, one from each end
chanical d~mage. Any dirt, gres% or other of the inspection unit, skdl be tested.
extraneous materials ahsll be removed from the 63 The average thickness of the armor of
speamen by menns of iile cloth -4,U--~ .nlveqi.
... & inspecticm unit s]wdl be the average of tile
The diameter tape shall be applied directly over results obtained from the specimens teetsd.
the armor in such s manner that the armor 5.4 The minimum thickness of the armor of
i%not distorted. The diametar over the armor the inspection unit shall be the smallest of all
shall be read from the tape ●nd the value ra- valwae averaged in determining the average
Corded as Da. thiokn~ 5.3.
4.2 The armor shall be removed from the 5.5 The average thiokneas and minimum
specimen and the diametar over the core (ae- thickmsa of the armor of the inspection unit
ambly under the armor) determined in the shall be recorded to the nearest 0.01 inch.

FED. TEST METHOD STD. NO. 228

I
 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Method 1311
~Dril 14, 1%7

THICKNESS, LEAD SHEATH; MICROMETER CALIPER (ROUND ANVTL)

1. SCOPE 4.2 The micrometer caliper shalI be ipplied
1.1 This method is intanded for use in deter- dir~tly to the specimen so thnt the nnvil and
mining the thickness of lead and lend alloy spindle are just brought intn contact with the
~henth of insulated wire and cable whenever surfaces of the specimen (onvil in contact with
a section of the sheath for measuring can be inner circumference) in snch a manner that the
removed from the wire or cable without dis- sheath is not distorted, The criterion of con-
tortion, tact is the initial development of frictional rEP
Z SPECIMEN sistance to movement of the sheath between the
2J The specimen shall be the sheath re- micrometer surfrmea,
moved from a piece of the inspection unit at 43 The thickness of the sheath at the place
lemt 3 inches in length. The sheath shall be measured shall be read from tho micrometer
removed in such a manner as to change ita shape caliper scale and the value recorded. Five
as little as possible. measurements equally spaced around the cir-
3. APPARATUS AND REAGENTS cumference of the specimen shall he made.
3.1 The apparatus and reagents shall be as 5. RESULTS
follolvs : 5.1 Unless otherwise specified in the detail
3.1.1 Mitvom(tw ed;pw gmduated to read specific: ttion, two specimens, r-mefrom each end
directly III mile or 0.001 inch and having a of the inspection unit, shall be tested.
hemispherical anvil with a radius of curvature 5.2 The average thickness of the lead sheath
of 0.125=0.005 inch and a fiat-surface spindle of the inspection unit shall be the average of
oi approximukly 0.25 inch in dicuuc’wr. the rrsul{: obt:iined from tho sl]ecimens tested.
3.1.2 Wiping cloth. 5.3 The minimum thickness of the lead
n.- .1. . .,L .“---4 :- . . ..-
~,, :,
LL ~~:,]~ ~a :~e
a.kl L’&ro/v7vn w viiwr mt;!dle dud. *11 V41L11 of ~h~ hllCLL lU1l

4. PROCEDURH smnllest of all valIIm nvernged in determining

4.1 The specimen shall be free from me- the nveragc thickness, 5.2.
chanical damage. Any dirt, grease, satura~ 5.4 The average thickness and minimum
or other extraneous matiial shall be removed thickness of the lead sheath of the inspection
from the specimen by means of the cloth and unit shall be recorded to the nearest mil or 0.001
solvent. inch.

FED. TEST METHOD STD. NO. 228

 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Method 1313
Ad 14, 1%7

THICKNESS, LEAD SHEA~, MICROMETER CALIPER

(FLAT ANVIL)
1. SCOPE 42 The lead ahtath aball then be removed
U This method in intended for urn in deter- fim the epecimen tnd the diamemr over the
.—
mining tho thkkneaa of lead and lend alloy core {~bly under the lead eheath) dater-
ahenth of ineuhted wire and cable wheae~er s rnined and the value recmied aa Ds The
section of the sheath for meaauring cannot be micrometer caliper till be *pplied directly
removed from the ~im or ~le vri~out * o?er the oom 90 that the 8pecimen can just be
tort ion. mod between the amil and spindle without
2 SPECIMEN distortion of the oorm
() 4d ‘l%me eetn of meammmenta eqnally
21 Thespecimell dd.lk Bpi~of*h-
upaced along the length of the specimen shall
apection unit ●t l-at Q feet in lenj@ from
which my covering o?er the iead eheath h~ be m-da Each net of meaauwenta shall con-
been mmowd. sist of the meximum aad minimum di-meter at
the plnoe meaaured. The diameter over the
( 3. APPARATUS AND REAGENTS
ahenth aud over the com ahail he determined an
3.1‘hi●pparatus ●id magenta ahali be an nearly w practicable at the same point.
follows:
6. RESULTS
3.1.1 Micwma tercaliper graduated to rend
54 Calculation. The t.hickneea of the
in roils or &{~IJ 1 iuch A Iwvmg flat surfmu3 on
ahth at my point shall be calculated en
both anvil mui end of apindlq eech approxi-
follows :
mately 0.25 inch diamew. Tho eurfacw of I’),-rh
●nvil d spiridh ah:!! be perall~~ b within ThIcknux inrh -~
O.UWI inch, Vi’bore:
D,-tba dlanwter over UM lead abatb d tb9pdd
3.12 W’lkino 024X?A. meaeamdllacba
3.13 C’hioroform or other witaNe solvent. D,-* tjimwter over the core mt tba point ~
4. PROCEDURE m Inrbee
uThesp&neQwbkf=Qm 6.2 UnheII oth- q=ified in ~ d~
c)mnicnl dwrqp AnydimWM% m~t% specification, :~o q=imen% one from each ~d
or otk extraneous mtirisl shall be mmmve& of the inspection uni~ hall be tented.
from tie specimen by meena of x cloth and 63 The ●verage thi~au of the lead eheath
admk The micrometer eal@r ehall be up-~ of the inspection unit shall be the average of the
plied dimrtly over the lead sheath eo that the twau!ts obtained fmm the apecimena testad.
●uvi! and the spindle are just brought into eon- &4 The minimum thichmae of the lead
kt with the specimen in euoh Bmmnttr U@ the sheath of the impaction anit shall be the atndl-
lend ahcmth ia rmt distorted. The critarion of * of BI1 V8hm Weraged in detmnining the
contact ia tho initial development of friotknd srerage tbioknq 8.8.
mhtanca to movement of the epecimen betweem 63 The merege thiobmaa cnd minimam
t.k roicrotnetar surfacee. Tlxe diametar over thioknem of the lead ehmth of the inspection
the sheath shall be mad from the miorumetar unit ehall be raoorded to the nearat MU or 0.001
scale and the value recorded os DI. iach

FED, TEST METHOD STD. NO. 228

(
 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com
,.,

Method 1331
April 14, 1%7

THICKNESS, SHEATH
L SCOPE same manner as described for diameter over
1.1 This method in intended for use in deter- the sheath nnd the value recorded as D,.
mining tie thiclmeas of rubber and plastic 4S Threa sets of measurements equslly
sheaths of insulated wire and cable. spaced along the length of the specimen shrill
Z SPECIMEN be mad~ Each eat of measurements al-ml) con-
21 The specimen shall be a piece of the in- aiat of the maximum and minimum diameter at
spection unit at least 2 feet in length from which the placa measured. The diameter over the
●ny covrring owr the sheath has been removed, sheath and over the core shall be determined
3. APPARATUS AND REAGENTS as nearly es practicable at the same point.
“3.1 Tha ●pparatus and reagenta shall be as 5. RESULTS
follows : 5.1 Calculation. The thickness of the
8.LI dfiorometerdim graduated to read sheath ●t any point shall be wdcdatod aa
in roils or 0.001 inch and having flat surfaces follows :
D,-Ds
on both the snvil ~nd end of spindle, ench q- ~iC&NM, Inch=T
proximntely 0,25 inch in diameter, The sur-
faces of anvil and spindle aball be parallel to Where:
D,-the dlnmeter orer th obeatb at the point meaa-
within 0.0001 inch. nred, Inchee
3X2 Wiping ckth. D,dbe die meter over tbe core ●t tbe point meaaur~
3.13 C’hioro#orm or other dtabZa Johwmt. taebes
4. PROCEDURE 5.2 Unless otherwise specified in the detail
4.1 The specimen shall be free from me- eJwcificaLion, two specimens from ench inspec-
chanical aumqm Any cii~ grea* or other tion urut shall be tested.
extraneous mnterids ahnll b rwno~bd from the S.S The average thickness of the sheath of
apecimtm by means of the cloth nnd eolven~ the inspection unit ehnll be the nvernge of the
TIIe micrometer caliper ah]] be applied directly results obtained from the specimene teated.
o~er the sheath so that the specimen can just be 5.4 The minimum thickness of the sheath of
moved betvreen the ●nvil and spindle without the inspection unit shidl be the amnlleet of all
distortion of the aheath. The diameter over the valuen averaged in determining the average
sheath shall be read from the micmmeter scale thickneda, 5.3.
and the value recorded as D,. 5.5 The ave~ge thiclmess and minimum
4.2 The sheath shall then be removed from thickness of the sheath of the inspection unit
the specimen and the diameter over the core SIIIW be recorded to the nearest mil or 0.001
(aaeembly under tha shenth) measured in the inch.

FED. TEST METHOD STD. NO. 223

 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

wthd a411
Aprif 14, 1%7

( WIDTH, MEX’AL TAPE ARMOR

L SCOPE from tbe caliper de ●nd the due mcaded.
LX ‘I’& method ia intended for we in deter- Fim m~munenta w@ly epwed along the
_ the rndth of fist xnetd tipe Or inter- length of the uptnimen droll be m8da
locking mnor of insuhted wirw and cabl~ 42 XrMrhxking ●znor ekll be removed
Z SPECIMEN fmxn the Wed wire or able snd flettened
Zl The epuimm ehdl be the Upe or srznor befozw the width m~ente are mode.
mood from B piece of the iwpection tit -t & RESULTS
kt8incbesi.nkmgtL &l Urk othemrim epecikl in the detail
& APPARATUS AND REAGENTS cpeoi&ation, two epeci~ one from esch end
&l The 8p~l’atu8 and reagents shall be ee of the inspection uni~ till be t4ete&
followe : 62 ‘l%ewocagewidt bofthetq)eorumur
Wl V-* eakpar graduated to %0 inch of the inepction unit hall& tbe sremga of the
or be with a vernier to mod to 1 mil or 0.001 mldtsobtdnedf romtbes --
inch. 53 The minimum width of tbe tape or
a12 w+?l’nq dotho wxnor of the inspection unit shell be the
3L3 C’hloR7fmwI w dhfir mritflb?~ dwnf. smallest of alI values averaged in determining
4 PROCEDURE the ayertge width 6.2,
U The s~imen tili be fm from me. &4 The maximum width of the armor of the
&nioal damage. Any difl grease, eaturants, inspection unit ehal! be the lnrgest of ●ll valuee
or other axtmneous ms~ride ehdl be removed
avemged in determining the arerage widtl~
from tbe specimen by memo of the cloth nnd gg,
mlr~~~. ?%3 tx!i-pm 6iiall ‘M appiied directly
( to the epecimen eo tbst the jme of the cdipem
are just brought into oontact with the qecimen
55 The nreragq minimuq and masinmrn
widthe of fiatarmor of the inspection unit shell
in such a manner thfbt *C tqe or ●inor ie not be recorded to the neareet mil or 0.001 incL
distmtd ‘1’bacriterion of contac% ie the initial S.6 The W- mtilmum, end masimum
dewdopmont of frictional meistence to mo- widthe of interlocking armor of the inspection
mot of the 8pecimen between the caliper jswu. ‘ unit shall be recorded. !o the neerest 10 roils or
The width of the tape or ●nor old] be rd 0.01 inch

FgD. TEST METHOD ST& NO. Z#

 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Method 1421
Arwil 14. 1%7

DIAMETER, ARMOR WIRE

1. SCOPE such a mariner that the wire is not distorted.
L1 This method is intended for use in deter- The criterion of contact is the initinl clevelop-
mining the diurneter of the wire used in the wire ment of fnctional resistance to movement of tha
armor of insulated wire and cable. specimen between the micrometer surfaces.
2 SPECIMEN The diumet.ar of the wire shall be rend from Lhe
21 The specimen shall be n piece of the bare micrometer caliper scale and the value recorded.
nrmor wire at lemst 12 inch& in length taken Thrm measurements equally spaced along the
from the inspection uniL length of the specimen shall be made.
3. APPARATUS AND REAGENTS 4.2 The diameter measurements of the wire
3.1 ‘l’he apparatus and reagents shrd] be as shall be made over any galvanizing or other
follows : metallic coating.
3.1.1 [email protected] calipsr .~dunted to read 5. RESULTS
in 0.1 mil or 0.0001 inch and having flat surfaces 5.1 Unkse otherwise specified in the detail
on both anvil and end of spindle, each approxi- speci 6oation, two specimens, onc from ench end
nmtel y 0.25 inch in diameter. The surf rices nf of the inspection unit, shall be tested.
the anvil and spindle shell be pmnllel to witl)in
5.2 The average diameter of the armor wire
0.0001 inch.
of tl)c inspection unit shall be the average of the
3.1.2 wip?%~ P70ffi,
results obtqined from tbe specimens tested.
3.L3 C’tUorojorm or other 8uitable 8olvent.
4. PROCEDURE 53 Tbe minimum diameter of tbe armor
4.1 The specimen shall be free froni me- wire of the inspection unit shall be tbe smallest
rh~nicnl dnmnge. Any (Iirt, grcnw, or l)tl~(r [~f:[11vxlues averaged ill dctern~il]ing tile uver-
..
extraneous mnterials shall be removed from !119 il=n ammeter, 5.2.
s~imen by mewut of the cloth nnd solvent. 5.4 The ztversge diameter and minimum
‘I’hemicrometer caliper shall be applied directly diameter of the armor wire of the inspection
over the wire so thnt the anvil and spindle are unit shall be recorded to the nearest mil or 0.001
just brought into contact with the specimen in inck

FED, TE$T METHOD STD. NO. 228

 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Method 1431
A@] 14, 1%7

SXZ& CONDUCXOR
1. SCOPE shall be proportional to the number of wires in
1.1 This method ia intended for use in deter- the Aayer.
mining the siqe of solid and stmnded concluctom 43 If tin or other metal coatinge m-a prea-
of insulnted wim and ca~]e. For the purpoee of anL the diameter measurements slmll be mude
this metha-1, the term %vhfi shall kmddned aS over the coatil~g.
a slender A or filament of drawn metal 5. RESULTS
2. SPECIMEN 5.1 Calculation.
2.1 The specimen shall tm the bare conduc- 5.Ll Solid conductor. The rnae of tho con-
tom removed from s piece of the inspection unit ductor at any point, in cimular mih shall be
at lenst 6 inches in length calculated by squaring the diameter expressed
& APPARATUS in mik
!Ll The spparatua droll &n&t ofs microm- 5.1,2 Strandd contiwtom. The size of the
eter caliper grnduated to mad in 0.1 mil or O.O@~l stranded wmiuotor in circular mjls shall be
inch and having flat surfaces on both anvil and calculated as follows:
end of spindle, ;ach approximate y 0.25 inch in - Size of wire, circular mIl=D?+Di’+---------- +~n’
din mete;. The surfs-&e of BJ’IVif and spindki where:
shn 11be parallel to within 0.0001 inch. D,=dlnme@r (nverage of two mensuremrnts W
4. PROCEDURE npnrt) of Hrst wire In the conductor, In rolls
D,=dJometer (arertigc of two measurements W
4.1 Solid conductoxa The specimen shall
apnrt ) of amwnd wire III the conductor. In mite
be free from mechanical damagw The microm- Dn={]lamotcr (n~~rnge of two mtnnurements 90”
eter caliper shall be applied directly over LIM npn rt ) of ~~th wire 10 the conductor, In wUa
conductor so that tha artvil end qi.ndl~ nre ]Iwt n-the nlmmer 0? -!rm m the Wmdn?to?
brought into contact wjth the specimen in mch She of stranded conductor, circubr mUs=&+&+_-
a manner that the conductor ix not diatorlod. +88
where:
The criterion of contact is the initial devclol~ S,=clra)ar.mll atxa of tit wire in mndoeter
meut of frictional ~ietanee to mt.mament of the (6.1.1 )
specimen bet ween the micrometer surfnm &=clrcnlar.mll ●las Or eeeond wire (5.1.1)
‘I%e diameter of the conductor shall be mad th=clrrulnr-rnll size of nth wire (5.1S)
from the micrometa caliper scale and the values a-the number of tw’ree in the conductor

recorded. Two meaeuremente of the diameter 5.2 Unless otherwise specified in the detail
●t positions approximately 90° apart on the qmcificotion, two specimens from each iuspec-
specimen shal~ be made. tJon unit shall be teste~
42 Stranded eondnctoru Individual 5.S The size of the conductor of the inspec.
vriree of a stranded conductor cable shall be tion unit shall be the average of the reeulte ob-
measured aepamtely as described for solid con- tained from the specimens tested.
ductom in 4.I. Unleaa otherwim apecided in the 5.4 The diameter of tho conductor of the in.-
detail specification, 10 percent of the wires ad apection unit shall be recorded to the nearest 0.1
in no caaa leas than mven wima shall be talwn mil or 0,0001 inch.
from the conductor for ML Whe shall be !U5 The cross-sectional area of the conductor
selected at random from each layer of the con- of the inspection unit shall be recorded to the
ductor md the number mlectd fmm each la~er nearest circular roil.

FED. TEST METHOD STD. NO. 22S

I
 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Method 1441
April 14, 1%7

CIRCUMFERENCE
1. SCOPE pamtus and one end of the thrend or wire
1.1 This method is intended for use in dt+r- attached to it by means of a chuck. The other
mining the circumference of insulated wire or end of the thread shall be placed over the pIIllcy
cable. It is applicable to the determination of and attached to the 10-=qam weight, which
the circumference of finished cable, insulated moves along a cnlibrnted scale. ‘17)esmle shtill
wires, bnre wires, conductors, circumference be calibrated so as to indicate the length of the
over sheaths, etc., with a circumference of 3 thread wound nround the specimen. At bat
inches or less, when the circumference is ro- 10 complete turns of the thread or wire shrill be
quircd or when it is desirable to calculate the wrapped nro~md the specimen under a kmd of
dinmcter from the circumference. 10 grams, and the number of turns recorded
2 SPECIMEN as N.
2J The specimen shall h a pitwe of the in- 42 The wrnps of thread shall be jnst in con-
tmlnted wire, cable, conductor, etc., nt least 12 tact with ench other, without any overlapping.
inches in length taken from the inspvct ion unit. The lel~gtl) of the N turns of thrend shall be
3. APPARATUS AND REAGENTS rend from tl]e scnle and tl]e vnlue mcordetl IIS 1..
3.1 The apparatus and reagents shall be as 4.3 The dinmeter of the smnll threod shul]
follows : be mensltred with the microscope and the value
3.1.1 Fine wire or thread with n length Rp- recorded m l?.
proxim~tely 10 times the nominal circumfem.nca 4.4 Unless otherwise specified in the detnil
of the specimen. specifirwti(lll. tlro mensurcments eqlmlly sp:tcecl
3.L2 Convenient equipment for wrapping along the length of the specimen shall be mad~
. . . G.&L,,*WU
*1%”.... A*C)
&,,L bl. .. . . ,,n.a.
u,luti -A & ~a
-;. VGIA
.?... +---: *.. “-. . .....4
LLaAatutLULUUAAU 5. P.EsTl~
Wu.~=u
the specimen. 5.1 Calculation
3.13 Convenient. equipment for mensuring 5.1.1 Cimumlenwwe. The circumference df
the length of wire or thread which is wrnpped the win, cnble, or com.1uctor, etc., at any place
around the specimen to an accurncy of 0.1 inch. shall be calculated as follovrs:
3.1.4 Satisfactory equipment for controlling L
c~rcumteren~ Inehen- ~ -.D
the tension of the wire or thread durin~ wrap-
where:
ping and for measuring the length of thread L=tbe Iengtb of the thread for X turns at the Plain
or wire in a given number of turns, Satisfac- me4t6urPd
tory equipment is shown in figure 1441. N-the number of turn. of the thread
9.15 The nppnmtus described in method D=tbe Jinmeter of tb? threnfl, loch
1018 for determining the diameter of the tlweacl. 5.1.2 Diame/er.—The dinmcter of the wir~
3.L6 wiping dvth. cable, or conductor, etc., at any plnce shall La
3.1.7 PA/ornfnrm, or other .witnb7P so?)$~nt. calculated by dividing the circumference by
4. PROCEDURE 3.1416.
4.1 The specimen shall be free from me- 52 Unless otherwise specified in the dctnil
chnnica 1dnmnge. Any tiher, antumnts, m other specification, three specimens from ench inqxsc-
extraneous matminis shrill be removed from the tion unit shall be tested.
specimen by means of th~ cloth nnd solvent. &3 The a rerage circumference of the mi~
The specimen ahnll be placed in the testing ap- cable, colldult(lr, etc., of the inspection unit

FED, TEST METHOD STD. NO. 228

 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Method lU1

shall be the sverage of the results obtsined from ence of the wi~ ublq wnductar, ●’-, of the
the specimens W wb unit &all h recoded ta the naarmt
5.4 The minimum circumference of the Wim .
cabl~ mnductor, etc., of the inspection unit 5d The average diametar and minimum
shall be tbe amalle8t of mll Yaluea averaged in diameter of the wi~ mble, conductor, d.c., of
determining the average circumference, 6.9. the inspection unit elmll be recorded to the near-
5.5 The avernge and minimum circumfer- eat 0.001 inch.

.
: F!
o

*.
:
$I
I
●

FEO, TEST METHOD STD. NO, 228

 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Method 1511
‘ April 14, 1%7

LAY OF TWIST, ARMOR WIRE

L SCOPE 42 The diameter of the specimen over the
M Thismethod is intended for use in deter- armor shall lM m~ured as described in method
mining the lay of twist (the ratio of the length 1!221 for diarnetar over the armor of the speci-
of lay to the pitch diamet.ar of the layer of men ar.d the value mcmled aa D!.
armor wire) of mnor wira The pitch diameter 4A The mnor wire shall then be removed
of any layer of vim of s cable is the diaxnetar &m tho specimen sr(d any fib satumnq or
of the circle p-ing through their oent.au
other exhmeous materkls removed from the
Z SPECIMEN
win by mea6s of tha cloth End aolvwk The
) ~ The speciman shall be a piece of the in-
spection unit of auiKcicnt length to include at
diameter of the amnor wire shaIl be measured
W two complete apirale of the armor wim as d-ibed in method 1421 ●nd the value w
from which mny covering over the amnor has corded m A
been removed. 5. RESULTS
3. APPARATUS AND REAGENTS 6.1 Calculation The hty of twist of the
3.1 The appnmtus and magenta Ad] be as armor wim nt any place shall be cnlculat,exl as
follows : follows :
3J.1 tltecl male grnduated to %2 inch or
liner or i[s dtwmml quivnlem~ 4 of tw+(~m@b of IV}
!!.= Binding cod or Peaw”blkwire. 0,-D. (pit.cb dlanntar)
3.13 Tivkp cloth.
where :
L ==lbe ttlstnnco purallcl to the u!W of the cnble in
3J.4 L’lklorc, w-m or other mitd?ld adwwbt. whlcb ● bellen1 element of tbe armor wire
4. PROCEDURE mnkcs one comnlt’te spt ral, Invhee
1),-tk diameter orer the armor. In*
4J The specimen shall be & @m me. &-the djmtar of the mmor whet kh
Chanical damage. Any dirt, fibers, saturnnts or 52 Unless otherwise speci6ed in the detail
other extranaue materials ehall be removed
‘>, 1 b specificatio~ two epecime~ one from each end
frvm the qmcimen by means of the clvth ml
QQ of the inspection nni$ shall ho tested.
sol vent. If wcessury, the armor wirw shall
I be SPCmmdin their origirml ‘~ition by means 53 The lay of twist of the armor wire of the
of binding cord. The distance parallel to the inspection unit shall be the IAvcrnge of the re-
axis of the specimen in which a helical element sults obtained from the specimens test.eid.
of the armor wire makea two complete spirala 5.4 The lay of twist of the armor wire of the
shall be meaaured to the nearest %2 inch with inspection unit shall be recorded to the nearest
the steel ecale and the vslue recorded u 2L. whole number.

&

FED. TEST METHOD$TO.110.

Z2B
 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Method 1521
Amil 14. 1%7

LAY OF TWIST, CABLE

1. SCOPE 422 T%e distance parallel to the axis of the
1.1 Thie method is intmtded for uae in deter- cable in which the conductors make one com-
mining the lay of twist (the ratio of the length plete spiml shall be measured as described in
of lny to the diameter of an individual finished 4.1 and the vslue recorded as L,.
conductor or to the pitch diametar of any layer 4.23 The diameter over any layer of con-
of conductcwa of which the cable is composed) in ductors shall be measured as described in
temns of the diameter of the finished individual method 1431 for diameter over the conductor
1
conductors or the pitch diameter. Pitch dianw and the value recorded as D,.
i
ter of ~ny layer of conductors of a cable is the 4.24 The conductors shall be sepamted and
dinmeter of the circle passing through their the diametar of a single finished conductor of
mtPrso the same layer measured as described for diame-
2 SPECXIWEN ter over the layer and the value recorded as D,.
21 The specimen shall be a piem of the in- 5. RESULTS
) tqwction unit of sufficient length to include at 5.1 Calculation.
least two complete spirals of the cmductoti 5.1.1 The lay of twist of the cable at any
from which any covering over the finished con- place in terms of the diameter of finished indi-
ductors has been removed. vidual conductors of which it is composed shall
3. APPARATUS AND REAGENTS be calculated as follows:
3.1 The apparatus and magenta shall be as L (\en@h Of ta7)
follows : Lmy of twlot -
I D (diameter of Indlr!dual conductor)
3.1.1 Steel acah graduated to +$9 inch or where:
Gnnm.
--- VI. :+.- A*..:LA~il!
.bu UGQ 0~”.ii7d~lk
Lathe distnnrt=, pnrnlld In tho SX!* of tlIP iwhle, nf
j one complete splrd of the ronductor, Iriches
3J4? Wiping clot~ D-the diameter oter that same coodurtor, tcctwe
SS3 Chloroform or other auitabla 8olvent.
5.12 The lay of twist of the cable at nny
4. PJZOCEDUKE
phee in temls of the pitch diameter of any Inyer
&l Individual conductor rnethb’h of eonductom of which it M composed shall be
~~ specimen shall befreefroxnxnec.hanical damage.
calculated as follows:
w ~ Any fibe~ saturart% or other materials shall
\ L (lenctb of lay)
be Mrnoved from the finished individual con- Uy of twlat-
ductors by means of the cloth and aolvenL The D,–& (pitch diameter)
where:
distance paml]el t.a the uis of the cable in which
&=t.be dletnme, parnllel to the ●xle of the cahic, of
the conductor makes one complete spiral shall orm complete SPJrul of Lhe conductor, lncben
be measured with the graduated scale to the D,=the tllameter over the la7er of conductors
nearest V$2 inch and the value recorded as L. lbtbe dlnmeter over ● conductor of the same layer
The diameter of the same individual conductor 52 Unless otherwise specified in the detail
shall be deterrnintd aa described in method 1431 specificatio~ two specimeng one from each end
end the value recorded as D. of the inspection unit, shall be tested.
44! Pitch diameter method (cable with five 64 The lay of twist of the inspection unit
or more conductom). shall be the svemge of the results obtnined from
441 The specimen shall be free from me- the specimens tested.
chanical damage and shall be prepared as de- 5.4 The lay of twist of the inspection unit
scribed in 4.1. shall be recorded to the nearest whole number,

FED. TEST METNOD STD. NO. 228

 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Method 1531
April 14, 1967

LENGTH OF LAY, WRAP OR SERVING

L SCOPE A reference mark shall be placed on the sur-
1.1 This method is intended for use in deter- face of the core (assembly under the wrnp or
mining the length of lay or wmps servin~ that serving) to locate the edge of the serving at
h+ the distance pamllel to the axis of the con- the point where unwinding stopped. Exactly
ductor in which a serving or wrsp makea one four complete spirnls of the serving shall be
eofnplete spiral, unwound and the distance along the axis o.f the
L SPECIMEN cable from the reference mark to the edge of the
Zl The specimen shall be a piece of the in. eerving measured to the nearest 1A2 inch and
spection unit at least 6 inches in length from the value recorded as 4.L.
which any covering over the wrap or serving 5. RESULTS
has been removed. 5.1 Calculation The length of hay of the
3. APPARATUS A.ND REAGENTS wrap or serving at nny place shall be calculated
3.1 TIM apparatus and reagents shall be as as follows:
follows: L+ngth of lay, lnehes=~
3.1.1 8teeJ scale graduated b ~~z inch or
where:
finer or its decinm] equivukrk
4L= the dlatnnce III Im’hes ●long tb~ OXIS of the cnble
3.L2 wiping cloth, cowred hy f,)ur spirals of the wrnp or srrvlng
3J3 cAl!Or(l/own 0?’ Othe? #144bt4 8ol?Mnt. 52 Unless otherwise specified in the detail
4 PROCEDUltE specifht ion, t m specimens from ench inspec-
4.1 The specimen shall be free from me- tion unit shall be tested.
chanical dnmnge. The surface of the sp+cimen 5.3 The length of Iny of the wrap or serving
~k.~!! & ~]csfi#U *,:}, the eioth arid solvent S0 of tile iuspedion unit sitaii ‘be the average oi the
as to ●xpose the individual yanm The binder “results obtained from the specimens tested.
threads shall be cut or broken and a portion 5A The’ kmgth nf lay of the, wrap or serving
of the map or serving unwound for B distance of the inspection unit shall be recorded to the
of shout one inch froin the end of the specimem nearest HZ inch.

FED, TEST METHOD STD. HO. 22S

 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Method 1611
&yil 14, 1%7

ANGLE, BRAID
1. SCOPE sembly under the braid) determined m described
1.1 This method is intended for use in (deter- in method 1111 and the value recorded as D.
mining the anglII between the yarns of Lhe bmid 4.5 If two braids are present, the angle of
an(i the 8xis of (I)e insulnted wire or cnUe, the outer one shall be determined from the
2. SPECIMEN diameter over the inner braid.
21 The specimen shrill be R piece of the in- 5. (; AI, CllIJATION
spection unit at leaet 6 inches in length from 5J ‘l’he tangent of the angle of the braid nt
which any covering over the braid has been any place shall be calculated as follows:
removed.
2*P(D+T)
3. APPARATUS AND REAGENTS Tangent of mgle. -
C
S.1 The ●ppmtue ●nd magenta shall be as where:
described in the methods referenced in 4. P =the num~r of pi~ ~r \ncb of the br~~d
4. PROCEDURE D -the dhmeter o~er the core, Inch
4.1 The specimen shail be free from me- T =the thl=~~ ~ h~ld, Inch
chanical dnmnge, Any fiber, saturrmt, or other C -the nnm~r of ~rrie~ 10 the bra~~
~,dJ~8
extrweous mt~terinls shail be removal from the
surface of the specimen by means of the cloth 5.2 The angle of the braid shali be deter-
and solvent. The number of picks per inch mined from tile tangent, of the angle by refer-
shall be determined as deecribed in method8011 ence to a tabie of natured trigonometric func-
and the value recorded ns P, tions.
4.2 The number of carriers shall be deter- 53 Unlvss otherwise s~wcified in the detail
mined Rs described in method 8021 mti illc vuiue Sp?ci!lcatiori, trc ?Pecirmzs. me fmn cdl Lx?
recorded as c, of the inspection unit, shall be tedad.
4S The thickn~ of the braid akmil be de- - 5.4 The nngle of the braid of the inspection
termind as dwcnt@ in method 1111 and. unit shali be the average of the results obtained
recorded m T. from the specimens ti
4.4 The braid shaIl be remowd from the 53 The angle of the braid of the inspection
speeimen and the diameter orer the core (M- unit almll be recorded to the nearest. 5°.

FED. TEST METliOO STD. NO. 228

 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Method 1621
Avril 14, 1%7

ANGLE, WRAP
L SCOPE 44 _lf two wraps am preeeng the mgle of
1.1 This method is intanded for use in deter- the outer wrap shall be determined from tho
mining the angle which the yarns of cotton diameter over the inner wrap.
wrap make with the axis of the i.nsulatad wire 6. RESULTS
or cable. 6J Calculatfom The tangent of the angle
Z SPECIMEN of the wrap at my place shall be calculated as
Z1 The specimen shall be a pica of the in- follows :
specticha unit at least 6 inches in length from T (D+ D%)
Taacent o! nade= ~
which iny covering over the wrap has been
removed. where:
~mtw dls~ew o?er the wrap or eemlng,hlch
& APPARATUS AND REAGENTS f),-~e timti over the col’q Inch
&l The apparatus and magenta shall be M L-the Iengtbof lay of one aplral of wrap
described in the methods mferaxmd in 4. rdt.14
4. PROCEDURE 5.2 The angle of: the wrap shall be deter-
4.1 The specimen shall be fme from me mined from the tangent of the angle by refer-
chanical dnma~ The length of lay shall be ence h a table of natural trigonometric func-
determined as described in method 1531 and the
tions.
vnlne recorded as L.
5.3 Unless otherwise speoificcl in the detail
4.2 The diametar over the wrap ahd.1 be d~
ten-mined as described in method 1141 and the specification, two specimens, one from each end
value recorded as D. of the inspection uni~ shall be tested.
43 -“ -.-. J ;...
~i16 wrap sha]l tfiaii ‘be relllu~cu -
i, U,,l 5.4 The angle of thr mmp of the inspection
the specimen and the diameter over the core unit shall be the nveroge of the results obtnined
(assembly under the vrrap) shall be detmnined from the apecirnens @ted.
as described in method 1141, and the vnlue re- 53 The angle of the wrap of the inspection
corded as D,. unit shall be recorded to the nearest 6°.

FED, TEST ME7HO0 STO, NO. 228

 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Method 1631
April 14, 1967

ANGLE OF BRAID, METAL ARMOR

1. SCOPE 4.4 The thickness of the armor shaN be d+
1.1 ‘his method is intended for use in deter- termined as described in method 1221 and the
mining the angle between the wire of braided value recorded w T.
metul armor and the axis of the insulated wire 5. RESULTS
or cnble. 5.1 Calculation. The tnngent of the angle
L SPECIMEN of the metal armor at my place shall be calcu-
2J The specimen shall be a pieca of the in- lated as follows:
spection unit at least 12 inches in length from 2TP (D+T)
Tament of an@e--
which any covering over the armor has been C
removed. where:
3. APPARATUS AND REAGENTS P=the number of pk”k~per Iach
D=the dturoeter over the core, inches
3.1 The nppmttus nnd reagents shall be as Z’=the thkkneaa of the nrmor, loch
descritwd in the methods referenced in 4. C=the number of carrlcrs tn the mum
4. PROCEDURE 2r -6.29
4.1 The specimen shall be frw from mw 5.2 TIM nngle of the metal armor shall be
chnnicnl dnmn~e. The numtw of picks por drterminul from the tangent of the angle by
inch of tile armor shall be determined ns iie- m fercnce to Q table of natural trigonometric
ecri bed in method S011 and the value recorded functions.
as P. 5.3 Unless otherwise specified in the detail
4.2 The number of carrirm in the nmnor specification, two spec]mens, one from each end
~k~11
.,. ... . . h.
“., A.+owwIinoA
ue. w.. u..,.,- ac
-“ d~e~~be~ in JW!thOd ~~?~ Of ~h~ i!)cp~e~~nnl~nit, Shfill he t.lWd.
and the vnlue recorded as C, 5.4 The angle of the braided metal armor
4.3 The armor shall be rt+moved from the of the inspection unit shall be the nvernge of
specimen and the diameter over the core (as- the results obtnined from the specimens tested.
senlbly under the armor) shall be determined 5.5 The angle of the braided metal armor
4 as described in method 1111 and the value m of the inspection unit shall be recorded to the
\ \~
corded as D. nearest 5°.

FED. TEST METHOD STD. NO. 22B

 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Method 1711
April 14, 1%7

OVE=, COTTON TAPE

~. SCOPE 42 TIM tape shall be removed from the
1.1 This method is intended for use in deter- specimen. The to pe shrill be straightened; the
mining the overlap of woven cotton tape on width nmasured by means of the steel smile at
insulated wire and abl~ three places equally spaced nlong the length of
2 SPECIMEN the tape and the average value recorded IIS W.
2.1 Tbe specimen shall be a piece of the in- 44 If two or more lnyere of tape are presen~
spection unit sufficient to cont+in at least six the overlap of each layer ahsll be detzmmined
complete api~ls of the tape from which any
separately.
twvering over the tape has been removed.
& APPARATUS AND REAGENTS 5. RESULTS
&l The ~ppamtua and magenta shall be as 5.1 Calculation. The overlap of the cotton
follows: tape at any place shall ‘be calculated as follows:
3.1.1 &MZ 8A graduated to %9 inch or
Overls~ Incb=W-+
finer, or its decimal equivalent.
3J.2 Wipinq cloth. where:
3.13 Chloroform or other uuita~le Rolvent. W= the wktth of the tape, iocbw
4. PROCEDURE 4L.=tbe Ioncth IIIWM tbe axis of the wire m cnble
4.1 ThcJ specimen shall be free from me- covered t474 InP Of * CSW.lll~,hee
chanical damage.. by aaturnnts or other ex- 52 unless otherwise specified in the detail
traneous materials sha]] be removed from the specifirat ion. two sp~cimen% one from each ml
surface of the specimen by menns of the cloth of the inspection unit, shall be testw].
and solvent so as to expose the inps of the tripe.
5~ The overlap of the tape of the inspection
The specimen shall then be laid on n smooth
unit shall be the avernge of t-he rcsulta obtained
horizontal aurfme ●nd the distance along the
axia covered by 4 laps of the tape measured to from the specimens tested.
the nearest MS inch and the value recorded aa 5.4 The overlap of the tape of the inspection
4L. ttrlitshall berecoddtitie~ ?’42M

FEO, TEST METHOD STD. NO. 22n

 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

METHOD 261 i

April 14, 1967

FLEXIBILITY, LATIOW,LOW TEMPERATURE

tti$tl

1. SCOPE 3. 1.2 Cold chamber, such as a refrigerator

or other equlpmen~ capable of ma.lntainlng the
1.1 This method is intended for use in mimcirel and s ecimen at the required tempera-
determining the resistance of insulating amt ture *1” C. (2 ! F.).
]acketins compounds ti crackiag when bent at
low temperatures. 4. PI?OCEDURE

2. SPECIMEN 4,1 The specimen shall be subjected to a

temperature as specified in the deLai.1 specifica-
2.1 This specimen shall be a piece of the tion or specification sheet for a period of 20
inspection unit of sufficient Iength for testing, as hours +1/4 hour, except when otherwise s~~ified
described @ 4. Z When testing the insulatio~ in the detail specification or specification sheet.
all outer covertnga shall be removed.
4.2 The specimen shall be suspended
3. APPARATUS vertically with lower end weigilted sufficiently
to keep specimen taut and to permit bending
3, 1 The apparatus shall be as follows: without handling. The specimen shall be
attached to the mandrel of the size computed
3. 1.1 Mandrels shall be of a standard stae in accordance with table L The specimen and
in one of the following cilaneters: mandrel shall be placed in the cold chamber
1-21/32 (1. 6562)
and subjected to the required temperature for
1/16 (O. 0625)
the requlrod period of time. At the end of the
3/32 (O. 0938) 1-15/16 (1, 9375)
exposure period and while still in the cold
1/s (t). 1250) 2-3,/8 (2. 3750)
chamber, the specimen shall be bent for six
3/16 (O. 1875) 2-7/8 (2. 8750)
close turns arouqfl the mandrel for cable OD
l/4 (O, 2500) 3-1/2 5000)
(3.
of (17S0 inch or less, or 1800 bend for cable
3/8 (0. 3750) 4 (4, 0000)
(o. 5000) 4-1/2 (4*5000) OD of 0.7S1 inch or greater, at the rate
1/2
specified in the detail specification or specifi-
11/16 (O.6875) 5 (5. Oooo) cation aheeL The sDecimen shall be examined
27/32 (O,6438) 7-2/2 (7. 5000)
for crwks. -
l-1/16 (1. 0625) 11 (11. Oooo)
1-5/16 (1,312S)
4.3 Flat twin wire or cable shall be bent
The standard size selected shaf.1 be the largest on the minor axis of its cross section.
size which does mt exceed the value computed
in accordance with table L The O.0825-inch
mandrel shall be used when a smaller stze than
0.0625 is indicated by the computation

TABLE L Computed xmwtrel sizee

Mandrel size, maximum — ..—

Nom. outside diameter of } I [ Individual insulated
insulated comiuctor of cable Unshielded cable Shielded cable conductors
.- ——-. .
uptoo.3oo 1. OXOD 3. OXOD 1.5XOD
,301 to ,350 2. OXOD 3. OXOD t 2. OXOD
.351 to .450 2.5XOD ( 3. OXOD 2,5x OD
.451 to .550 3. OXOD 3. OXOD 3,0XOD
.551 to .750 4. OXOD 4. OXOD i
.751to ,950 5,0XOD 5,0XOD
,951 to 1.050 6. OXOD 6. OXOD
1.051 to 1.150 7. OXOD 7. OXOD
L 151 to 1.250 8. OXOD 8. OXOD
Over 1.251 10.0 X OD 10,0 X OD

I FED, TEST METNOD STD. N0,228

 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com
i

METHOD 20!1

5. i?ESULTS 5.3 The fletiility of the insulation or

jacket of the Inspection unitshallbe the
5, 1 Unless otherwise specified in the results obtained from the specimen or
detail specification or specificaUon shee$ one specimens te.eted
specimen from each inspection unit shall be tested.
5.4 The temperature and time of
5.2 Any cracks in the Insulation or jacket exposure.
of the specimen shal! he recorded.

FED. TEST METHOD STD. NO. 228

 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Method 2021
April 14, 1%7

FLEXIBILITY, ARMORED CABL& LOW TEMPEIUTURE

L SCOPE until it has reached room temperature. It shall
1.1 This method is intended for use in deter- be straightmmd and mounted on s wooden bar.
mining the ability of armored cable b with- The mounted specimen and mandrel shall be
stnml bending M a low temperature without placed in the cold chamber at the required tem-
damnge. perature for the required period of tim~ At
2, SPECIMEN the end of the exposure period, the specimen
21 The specimen shall be a pieca of the in- ehall be removed from the cold chamber, de-
spection unit of sufficient length to pemnit bend- tached from the bar, and immediately bent
ing one complete turn around the mandrel mi- around the mandrel at a uniform mta of 20°
quired in 4.2. . per accord The specimen shall be clamped in
3. APPARATUS the bent position and a visual inspection made
3.1 The apparatus shall be ae follown: of all its component park The armor ehdl be
3.1.1 Afandrsl of the diameter required in opened and the mnterial under it examined for
4.2. cncking or other damage.
3.1.2 Wooden bar approximately 5 feet in 4.4 Flat twin wire or cable shall be bent on
length, the minor axis of its cross section only. ‘l’he
3.13 Cotd chamber ae a refrigerator or minor diameter slmll be used in determining
other equipment capable of maintaining the the size of the mnndrcl.
mnndrel nnd mounted specimen ●t the required 5. RESULTS
t.empemture within S1° C. (2’ F.). 5.1 Unless otherwise specified in the detail
4. PROCEDURE specification, one specimen from each inspec-
4.1 Unless otherwise specified \n the detail tion unit shall be tested.
specitic:ltion, the specimen shall be subjected to 52 Any crncking or other damage to tho
● tempemture of - 10° ~ 1° C. (14”*2° F.) for am~or or other ports of the speoimen shall be
s period of 18= ~4 hour. !WcOmhd.
42 Unless otherwiee specified in the detail 53 The flexibility of the inspection unit
specikntinn, the size of the mandml shall be shall be tho results obtained from the specimen
6.5 times the over-all dinmeter of the specimen. or apeeimens tested.
43 The specimen shall be fraa fmm me 5A The temperatu~ time of exposure, and
cbtmicai damage and shall rmt be bent or tkxed uiza of the mandrel ahdl be recorded.

FED. TEST METHOD STD. NO. 223

 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com
t

Method 2031
Aprif 14, 1%7

FLEXIBILITY, COTTON COVERED ELECTRIC CORD

L SCOPE be bent for ten close turns around the mandrel
LX This method is intended for w in deter- nquimd in 4.1. It ehnli then be unwound nncl
mining the ability of insulated wi~ cord, and rewound so thst the outer side of the coil is
cable to bend ●round cylindrical forms of rela- mvemed to become the inner side. This rJpern-
tively small diameter without damage. It is tion shall be repeatd for a total of three cycl-
particularly applicable to cotton cored flex- The coil shall then be struighteneci atld ex-
ible electric oord. The method is not applicable amined visually for breaks in the 61~rous covet-
to asbestos covered cord or Wira ing or conductor, fioking of any impreglmtil~g
2 SPECIMEN compounds or finishing materials, datnmge to
2J The specimen *all be ● piece of the in- the insulation, or chanp in nppenmnce or evi-
spection unit ●t least 15 feet in length. dence of stmin, Cracking is not necessarily
S. APPARATUS !htking of the finish.
$1 The appantua shall ccmsist of a md.ml 4.4 Flat twin able dud] be bent on the minor
of the diameter rvquired in 4.1. axis of itscram section only. TIIC miuor di-
4. PROCEDURE ameter shall be used in determigilig tlw me of
4.1 I!nles otherwise specified in the detnil the mondrel.
qwcification, the diameter of the m:mdrel shun 5. RESULTS
be five times the over-all dinmetcr of the spcwi- 5.1 UJIlwa otherwise spmifiod in the detail
men. specification, one specimen from ench inspection
4Z Unless othenrise zqxwified in the detail unit shrill be tested.
specification, the specinm sh:il] lJP conditioned 5.2 ~\ny I.merking of the Mrcms vovering or
●nd tested at s tempemture of ’23°= l= C. mwtiudurs, d;!i1iil~12 1(J { !i~
...? 1.*;,..,
lt,.,,t ,4!, ,.,.,. ::;!])=-

(73.5°=20 F.). ciuble change in Uplx’urnnce. m. twl~kwe of

43 The specimen shrill ba fme f mm me strttin of Ihe specinwn sh:Ill h rvrf}tlilql.
chnnical dnmnge uttd SIIJIIInot he lwnt or flexml 5.3 Finking of thr tillid~illg mnteriuls of
until it has renched the tempemtnre required in the specimen shall be recordrd.
4.2. HancUing and tlvxing of the qwrinmn 5.4 The flexibility of the inspection unit
shrill be reduced to the nbadute minimum neces- shall be the results {Ibtni]wx[ from ~he qwcimeu
sary in conducting the test. The ovrw.ull di- test edo
~meter of the tqweimm JJMII bc measmed as 55 The tcmpemture of the test and size of
described in method 1111. The specimen &hall the mandrd shnl I be rccordsd.
..

FED. TEST METtlOD STD. NO. 22S

 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Method 2041
April 14, 1%7

(
FLEXIBILITY, FIBROUS COVERINGS
1. SCOPE with n!? to 2% inch straight length of the speci-
L1 This method is intended for use in deter- men ●t ~ch end. If the size of the wire or cable
mining the tistnnce to bmnkags of tbe yams ie larger than No. 2 AIW, B simple U-turn
of fibrous coverings of insulated wire and cable. shall be made about the mandml. The Speci.
It is particularly ● pplicable to wim ●nd oebha men shall be examined for broken yarns in the
of the bnilding type, fibrous covering both bcfom and after removal
2 SPECIMEN from the nmndre]. Exeminstion shall also be
21 1%0 apetimen shall be n pioca of the in- made for nny finking of the finishing material
spection ttnit 24* $$ inch in length. from thp wire or cnblc ass result of the bending
$ APPARATUS t~ withoutactusl rubbing of the vira Creck-
3.1 The appamt us sludl rormist of n mamhvl ing is not nmwsttnly flaking of the finish.
of the diameter required in table 1 of method &S Flat twin cable ehall be bent ou the
8221. minor As of its cm section only.
4. PROCEDURE L RESULTS
4.1 IJnles otherwise specified in tho detnil 5.1 Unless otherwiao ~pecithl in the detail
Bpwification, the specimen shall be conditioned qwcificntion, one specimen from ench inspection
nml tested at a temperature of 23° * 1° C. (78.5° unit shell be tested.
*2 °F.). 52 @ breaking of the pm in the fihroun
4S The apocimen shall he fne from mP-
covering of the specimen eball be recorded.
chsnieel damage nnd shall not be bent or flexcul
5.21 For wmps or nervings, the typo of yarn
until it has reached the temperntum specified in
lmken shall be mmded.
( 4.I. Handling
almll be reduced
nnd flexing of the specimen
to the absolute minimum necea- 53 Any finking of the linishmg materials of
eery in conducting the test, The specimen shall the specimen shall be recorded.
then b&bent around ● msnchvl of the diameter &4 The kibility of the fibrous corcring of
required in table I of method 8221. If the tira the inspection unit shall be the reeulta obtained
or cable is size No. 2 AW(3 or smaller, os many from the specimen or specimens teuted.
tuma shall bo made ●bout the mandrel es will L5 The tempentttm of the K elmll & re-
permit it to conform closely to the mandmi Oordd.

FEI). TEST METHDD STD. ND. m

Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com
 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com
/

Method 204’3
ADrll 14. 1%7

FLEXIBILITY, FZBROUS COVERINGS, LOW TEMPERATURE

. .
L SCOPE ~ 4’IW)CEDURE -
u l%imMdwdi8illtudadforuaeiaG” U U- d.bwim spdfled in the detail
minirm the d?ect of bendiru ●t low tmn~’ qm&Btaq “ Uwapa5manaball besubjectsdto
tm Sbi&ua co-of W& d cabk- s tumparwm of ~10**10 C. (14°=90 F.) for
2. SPECIMEN ●period of6Z!6hour.
M Th9 apeoinm, fran ● 8iag1e in89iA ~’l%e~abal lbefme from me-
oondudor OJ(KI &b in diame@r ●nd tiler, dmttkl damage and shall not be bent or flexed
till be ● piece of the bpactkm tit of aofi- until it haa rwlmd mm temperatnra, It shall
eient Iangt.h to pwmit banding thrsa mwnphte then k atdghtenad and placed in the cold
tuma awnmd ● mandrel of the dhmehr apeci- cbambufor tbarcquimd timeatthequimd
flad b tablo I. The spociman fmm S-aingla 4emperwwtu & tbe ad of tbe axpoeum P
ineuhted oondnrtor luger than 0.s00 inch in rid, the qlecirnal Ann be removed from the
dimneter and any multiple eonduetorcablq shall cold chamber and krmt immediately around a
bo s piece of the iqcction unit of sufficient mudd of the quimd size at a uniform mta of
length to permit bending cme complete turn not les than 10 w mom than 12 turns pm
●mmd a mandtvl of the chuneter specikl in minuta. The specimen dud] be clamprd in the -
table I. Any covering over the fibnwa oovenng bent podtim d iqwcted vieuallyfor brtak.
to bedahallbemncwod. ing of tbe yarn in & Mmue covering and
& APPARATUS Mng of the hiding material from the cable.
M The apparatus shall bc m foilrm: CmcMng u not nwwooarily fluking of the. finish.
U1 Mnndrd with s diwneter equnl to tbe 44 ‘he diameter of tbe mandrel Ann be
Over-d Cd& &&TI@’fKtndtiptied by 4& kt44: Ahrmhed ~ multiplying Lhe overell ditun-
speiiled in tab]. I. @ar of t4M oablo by tbe factor in table I corm-
W CoJd dawihur as s refrigerator or qmriding to the OWAI diameter of the cable
der equipment capable of maintainhlg the sad the ●uage tbib of the inmdation.
\ @mea ●t tbe quid tunperature witlim The Sveragcl thichaa of the insulation shall be
% .
*1” C. (W F.). &tammed u daacribed in method 1011.

T- I.-M&iipiyirM
fader for &#u+AQ m#ItflUl tit8r

-~ Otoo. sm Wltolmbch LOOIto lm l!@nc Overeroo

OBeduaiwwtq
AWO &y dm upto4p 4paDdm upt04p 4p andowr &y da

lMIMiee web:
J%saadaaI&r 8 4 9. 0 8 12
Ovu%h* 4 s 7 ? 10 la
ova% o $ $ la la

Umttvrinab
bdanbeimtcmthe dhnat@raban banauiiahtammng ● “ Ubosize
Qinoraxbofi ta-aationordy. Tlwminor ofti~

FED. TEST Mmloom. aoo.2z4

I
 —.
Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

MAomu .
&“-itmJLm3
sol u:dP%”tba+o”qmoMd
illtb9d9biI
spcvi&n*om _ frwI - ~
unit dml~ be =UL
S.2 Any bmkii of h ynnt in ho fhtun
wwin& Of the @eCimCn Ohall be morduL
W Focunpor mvi~tbotypof
yam bmkcn dull ~ xuwdai. J

..’ ‘i’, .

,. i

“. ,1..”. .

I
-...
..
. . ...-

------- ----- .
I ..- .”.

-. ..: ●
.’ .4 .f . 3. .
1

FEB. TEST BETHOD STD. NO, W

2
 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

-METHOD 2051
April 14, 1967

FLEXIBILITY, EXTENSILE ANO RETRACTILE CORO

1, SCOPE 8 ounces for two-conductor CO* Z,NI 10 ounces

for three- or four-conductor cord shall be applied
1.1 This method is intended for use in to the eti. The finished cord shall have a mlrd-
determining the characteristics of retractile mum ext.axted length of 2-1/2 times its retr~cted
cord. length.

2. SPECIMEN 4.4 The cord shall then be suspended verticai-

lY and extended to 5 ttmes its retracted .icngth and
2, 1 The specimen shall consist of a 6-inch immediately released. The cord shall return to
length of finished retractile cord. within 10 percent of its original length within 5
minutes.
3. APPARATUS
4.5 The cord shall then be exbemied between
3, 1 The appnratus shiill be aa follows: two adjustable clanps fastened to a vertical
support so that the coiled portton of the cord is
3.1, 1 A suitable testing nmchine that will stretched to 250 percent of its original retracted
extend and retract the cord at a fixed rate. len@h for a period of 48 hours. After 48 hours,
the cord shall be released from ita extended
3. 1.2 Weights of 6, 8, and 10 ounces. positton and freed from restraint by tapping on a
horizontal surface and laid at rest. Thirty
3. 1.3 Cold chamber, such as a refrigerator minutes after being placed at rest on the hori-
w’ uther eq.lipn)ent, capable of mainta.inin~ the zontal surface, the cord shaif return to mt
required temperature within ~ 10 C (2’ F). more than 115 percent of its original retracted
length within an minu!ai.
4. PROCEDURE
4.6 The finished cord shall be placed in a
4.1 Prior to meeting any extemsile and cold chamber for not less b 20 hours at a
retractile tests, the cord shall first be conditioned temperature of -40’11’. At the end of this
by extending the coiled portion 6 to 5 period ad wtthout removing frmm the chamber,
times its retiacted length, allowing it to retract the card shall be extmkt to 4 times “itE re-
freely each the. The cord sIuUI be capable of tracted length and then released on a hortaontal
returntng to its origtnal conttnguous posltton when surface. While still at -40’ C. temperature, the
laid on a horizontal surface. cable shall be freed from restratnt by tapping on
the surface. The cord shall retmwt to not more
4.2 The resistance of the corxiuctor shall be than 200 percent of its original length wtthin 30
measured and recorded tn accordance with method secords.
6021, The cord shall then be clamped in a suttable
testing machine and extended to 4 ttrnes its re- 5. RESULTS
tracted length for 5,000 cyclen at a rats of not
less than 18 nor more than 40 cycles per mtnute. 5.1 Unless otherwise specffled tn the debt}
The corct shall be capable of retamtng b at least specification or specfflcatlon sbee~ one Speci-
20 percent of L& origtnsl rebacted length within men from each inspection unit shall be tesm
me hour after completion of the cycltrqL The
resistance of the conductor shall be remeasured 5, 2 The d. c. resistance, both before ad
and the change. in the resistance shall not exceed after the cycling, shall be recmted.
10 percent of lb original restsance.
5.3 The temperature and Ume of exposure
4.3 The cord shall then be poslttoned vertlcaf - that the cord withstood in the cold chamber shall
lVand a load of 6 ounces for single-conductor cord, be recorded.

FED. TEST METHOO STO. NO. 228

 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Method 2111
@ril 14, 1967

ELONGATION, ARMOR
L SCOPE apparatus. The unweighterl end of the speci-
1.1 This method is intended for use in deter- men SIIIIIIk hoisted gently until tile weight 011
mi ]]ing t h~ rmistunce to stretching of nrmor on the odm el]d hangs freely withou~ swaying.
insulated wire and cable. The specimen shrill hang vcrticnlly and per-
2 SPECIMEN pendiculnr]y to the fnce of the clnmps, ‘l’lie
21 The spccirneu shrill be a pieca of the in- specimen shrill support the specified weight
slwct io]l unit at ]enst 44 inches in len~h from for one minute. The specimen and weight
which any covering over the armor has been shall be lowered, the clnmps removed, and the
removed. specimen me~sured for recession of the conduc-
3. APPARATUS tors into the armor at euch end. The measure-
3.1 The apparatus shall be as follows: ments shall be mndc to the nearest 1~2inch and
3.1.1 Two ckmp~ each 2 inches wide and of tho sum of the recessions recorded.
good fit on the cable to be testd 5. RESULTS
3.12 lVFiyAt ns required in 4.1. 5.1 Unless otherwise specified in the detail
3.1.3 VerticaZ hoisting equipment. specification, one specimen from each inspection
3.1.4 Std iwvdeor tape graduated to $7: unit shall be testwl.
inch or finer, or its decimal equivalent. 5.2 Tile elongnt ion of the mmmr it t any
4. PROCEDURE plare shnl] be tile sllm of the rccessio]ls of tlie
4.1 Unless otherwiea specified in the detail conductor iuto the armor at each end.
specification, n weight of 100 pounds shall be XI The elongation of the armor of the in-
used sper[ ion unit Sl]:ill be thv rmlllt {Ibtninwl front
4.2 0.lc clMnp dud] be f=’tiiie~ on each end the specimen testccl.
of the specimen, leaving 2 inches of the cable 53.1 When I]iore than one specimen is
pmj=ted beyond the clnmps, This leaves a tested, the clong:~tion of the armor of tile in-
distance of 36 inches of the specimen between spection unit shn l! be the nvernge of the results
the clampg The clamps shall be fastened oht nined from the specimens tested.
firmly enough to prevent slipping but not tight 5A The-elongation of the srmor of the in-
enough to crush the armor. spection unit shall be recorded to the nearest
43 One clamp shrill be connected to the ~s inch.
weight and the other attached to o hoisting 5.5 The weight used shall be recorded.

FED, TEST WI’HOO STD. NO. 228

 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

April 14, 1%7

TOUGHNESS, ARMOR WIRE

1. SCOPE 3.1.12 The mnchine shall be equipped mith
1.1 This method is intended for use in deter. a counter to indicata the number of oscillations.
mining the ablility of armor wira to resist brsak. 4. PROCEDURE
ing from repeated flexing. 4.1 The constant tension applied to tl~e
2 SPECIMEN specimen shall be as specified in the detail
21 The specimen shall be B 6-inch length of speci 6CSti on.
the wire taken from the uznor of the hepection 42 The specimen shall be free from me-
Un.i& chanical darnnge, shall show no surfnce cracks
3. APPARATUS or other defects visible to the unaided eye, and
3.I The apparatus shall be as follows: shall be f ree from surface oxide. The specimen
3.1.1 Flidng WWWM with a power driven shall be placed in the testing machine under the
oscillating head and equipment for holding the required, tension and the machine started. The
specimen under constant tension. test shall continue with frequent. observations
3.1.1.1 Two supports ench with a radius of until the wire has broken. At this point ths
curvature of 0.030inch shall be mounted on number of osciflutions required to break the
the head, With the head at its mid-point of specin)en shall be red from the counter and
travel, the pins shall be in the horisental plane the vnlue recordeti
through the center of the head and normal to 5. RESULTS
th plane of oscill~tion. ne @tion of tie 5.1 Uulea~ othervrise specified in the detail
pms shall be adjustable to accommodate wire specification, three specirrens from each inspec-
~f various diametera and the pins shall be tion unit shall be tested.
5.2 The toughnew of the armor vire of the
spaced. wlIIidist ant fro= ~&ecer.+~r ~f G~;&
inspection unit shall be the average of the m-
tion. With ● specimen in the machine, the
aults obtained from the specimens tested. -
bead shall oscillate through an angle of 180° 54 The tmghneas of the armor wire of the
and bend the specimen, while under tensio~ inspection unit shall be recorded to the neareut
back ●nd forth over the pine, The head shall Cycleh
oscillate at a uniform speed of 25 cycla per S4 The tension applied to the specimen
minuta (50 cecillations per minuta). shall be recorded.

FED. TEST METHOD STD. NO. 223

 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Method 2161
April 14, 1%7

SPRINGINESS, ARMOR WIRE

1. SCOPE 43 Aftar the specimen has been wound
1.1 ‘his n)ethod is inlpllded for use in deter- around the mandrel, the diameta over the
minil)g the ability of n braided metal armor to armor wire coil shall be measumd and the value
mmu in tight on the sheath or core material recorlk-i as D,, ‘l%e anvil and spindle of the
duri]lg and after fabrication of the eabl~ micrometer caliper till be just brought into
2 SPECIMEN contact with the surfnce of the armor wire in
2.1 The qwimen shall be n 2-foot length “SUCb● manner that it is not distorted. me cri-
of tjlc wi rc tnken f roln the m~or of the ins~ ferion of contact is the initial development of
iion Ilnit. An wpi valent length taken from the frictional resistance to movement of the armor
mire Infore braiding msy be used when apeci- vrire between the micrometer eurfa- The
fkl in the detail specification weight ahnll be detached nnd the armor wire
3. APPARATUS coil removed from the mandrel. The diametm
.3.1 ‘me apparatus d)rlll be ml follolrs : over the coil W be msaxured M dti~~
3.1.1 Ntd mmdrd 0.95&0.01 inch in nbove and the value racorded as D,, Five mees-
flinmeter. ntvwents nc~r the middle of the coil shall be
3.1.2 M’rivhf ns required in 4.1. made and the nvcrttge recorded as D, and D1.
3.L3 .I n?ywitnb?e rnnchine for holding and
n+pectivcly. The diameter over the coil before
turning the mandrel shout ita own nxis. A .
nntl nftcr retnoral fron] the nmndrcl shall be
eatisfnctory device is n power-driven lathe
determilmd 0s nearly m prttct icrdde at the snme
quipped with chuck.
~.~,~ ~~i;$~~,,~W,r
:.. .- ..-:C . ,,,
-- ~~,,C&,
.-.. J point.
& RESULTS
3.13 Afimmwter caliper graduat.d to rend
to miln or 0.001 inch, nnd having flat aurfaca on 5.1 Calculation. The springiness of the
both nrtvil and ●nd of spindle, each spproxi- anyor wire of thn specimen shrill be calculated
mntaly 0.!25inch in”diameter. The surfacas of as follows:
the anvil nnd spindie shall be paml.lel to within 8PrIndnew, lwbsa=lh-D,
0.0001 in& whwe :
J),=tb~ aT@fi~ d~ter ~er OQ a-r ~H eofl
4. PROCEDURE
wotmd ●routid the mandrel, lock
4J Unl~ otherwise spedad in the detail 1),-tbe ●?erage dlaawter orer tbo amor whu eotl
specification, a weight of 100 grams ahdl be after wmwal from tbe mandrel, lnrttea
used.
5.2 Unl~ othrrwitm speded in the detail
42 The mandrel shrill be tented in flIe
specification, two specimens from each inspec.
chuck of the lathe and Bupportad ●t the free end
on a center. The specimen shall be bent around tion unit nball be tested.
the mdrel and faataned by means ofs binding &3 The springinetsi of the armor win of the
cord or wire. The required weight shall be inspection nnit shall be the s~erage of the m-
applied to the free end of the specimen and the mdta obtnined from the specimens teeted.
chuck turned at approximatal y 20 revolutions 5A The ttpringinem of mmor wire of the
per mirtut e to wind the specimen on the mandreL inspction unit shall be recoded to the nti
Adjacent turns of the wire shall.be kept M ohe mil or O.001 inch.
to each other as practicable. &5 The weight usd shall be remrded.

FED. TEST METtlDD STD. MO. 228

 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Method 2171
April 14, 1967
(
TIGHTNESS, ARMOR
1.SCOPE shall be cut wpmly and any burrs remomd by
Ll This method .ia intended for use in menns of a fib. The cable shall be inserted into
determining the tightness of braided armor on the pipe so &t the conductcm protrudea from
the eonductm assembly. the thmeded eml Tha cap shall be applied so
2 SPECIMEN as to contin the armor within the pipe and
Zl The specimen ehall be ● piece of the pennit the &inch length of protrmii.ug condu~
inspection unit 10~ feet in hngthfrom which tor to move freely. The protmding oonduetor
any cuvering orer the armor hae km removed ehall be eecurely faetened into a loop md this
3. APPARATUS attached to the weigh~ The pipe containing
3.1 The apparatus shall be os follows: the epecimen shall be mid to ● vertical pad-
8&l ~;IJ~I approximately 10 feet long and tion with the weight at the bottmn and then
having an inside d“iameter slightly larger than gently hoisted till the weight hangs freely with-
the outside diameter of the ,specimen to be out swaying.
tested so as to permit the cable to move frrely 4.3 After the weight haa been suspended, for
but not loosely through the pipe. One end of 1 minuta the pipe shall be lowered and the dis-
the pipe cxt.erior shall be thrmded to receive tance the conductor has receded into the armor
a cnp which shall contain a round, &mooth hole at the end opposite the weighted end shall be
large enough to allow the cnble conductors to measured by means of the scale to the nearest
pasa freely, but small enough that ● flange m- %2 inch.
mnins to support nnd contain the nrmor within 5. RESULTS
the pipe. 5.1 Unless otherwise specilled in the detail
~.~~ w~jq}f p~ q* *#*w=
G-A A:r A
●
1
=.*. !!ipecific~ticn, one s~ccimcn frcm Caclhinspection
S.U Nrel wale gradunted to ~z inch or unit thal,l be kted.
6ner or ita decimnl quivalent. 5.2 The tightness of the armor of the inspec-
3.1.4 Vert~*? hm’.ding quipwvnt. tion unit shall be the nsult obtained from the
4.PROCEDURE specimen tested.
4.1UnleEYI
otherwise speeificd in the detail !521 When more than one specimen is tastad
specification, B 15-pound weight shall be ueed from each inspection uni~ the tightness of the
in testing numbers 18, 16 and 14 stranded con- armor shall be the avemge of the results ob-
ductor cable (armored cord), and a 40-pound tained fmm the specimens tested.
weight for testing all other cabk 5.3 The tightn- of the armor wim of the
4.2 ‘he armor and shenthing ehd be m- inspection unit shall be twarded to the nearest
mowxi from one end of the epecimen eo se to ~a inch.
eqca 6 inchee of the conduotor, The armor &4 The weight used shall be recorded.

FED. TEST METHOD STD. NO. 228

( (“
 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Method 2281
Auril 14. 1%7

OPENING, ARMOR
L SCOPE clamps shall he fastened firmly enough to hold
L1 This method is intanded for use in deter- the specimen but not tight enough to damage
mining the resistance of armor of insulated wire the armor. One clamp shall be connected ro
and cable to opening. the specified weight and the other attached to s
2 SPECIMEN hoisting apparatus. The unweighed end of
3.1 The specimen shall be the nrmor from a the specimen shall be hoisted gently until the
piece of the inspection unit at least 44 inches in weight on the other end hangs freely without
length. The specimen shall be prepared by swaying, The specimen shall hang vertically,
m.moving the conductor from the cable without and perpendicularly to the face of the clamps.
mechnnicn] damage to the armor. The specimen shall support the speoified weight
3. APPARATUS for one minut.a The specimen nnd weight shall
U The *pparatus shaU he as foIlows: he lowed, the clamps removed, and the armor
3.1.1 Two cliwnpa each 2 indhes wide and of examined visually for openings. .kn y open inga
good fit on the specimen to be tested. in the specimen of sufficient size to expose nny
3.L2 Weiqht as required in 4.1. material under the armor shall he recorded.
3.L3 Vertical hoisting equipment.
5, RESULTS
4. PROCEDURE
5.1 Unless otherwise specified in the detail
4.1 Urdeas otherwise specikd “in the detail
specification, one specimen from each insption
specification, specimens of an.nor from sizee
unit shall be teated.
AWG 18, 16, and 14 stranded conductmr cnble
and all sizes having nrm(,: of flattened cross 5.2 The opening of the rumor of the inspec-
wtinn sihnll b ktd with a 150-pound weitzht tion unit shall be the results obtained from the
and cables of all other sizes shall be tested with spmmen tested.
s WI-pound weight. “53 Any openings in the armor of suf6cient
4J One clamp shall he fastened on each end size to expose any materinl under it shall he
of the specimen, leaving about 2 inches of tho recorded
armor p@mted beyond the champs. The 594 The weight used shall he recorded.

FED, TEST METHOD STD. NO, 228

I
 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

METHoD 22(1
APril 14, 1967

ABRASION RESISTANCE

1. SCOPE tester and the other end shall be attached to the

tension load specified in the detail specification
1.1 TM methcd is intended for use in or specification sheeL Using the weight support
determining the abrasion resistant chsracter- bracke~ weigh$ and type of abrasive tape
isUcs of the finished wire or cable. specified in the detail specification or specifica-
tion ishee~ the specimen shall then be subjected
2. 3PECYMEN to the tesL kt the start-up for each measure-
men~ the center of a coxxiucting strip on the
L 1 The specimen shall consist of a 36-inch abrasive tape @uUlbe at the point of contact
length of finished insulated wire or cable. with the wire. The reading of ●ach measurement
shall be the length of abrasive tape, in inches,
3. APPARATUS to come in contact with the wire to the point
where the machine stops, After each reading the
3.1 The spparatus shall be as follows: specimen shall be moved forward 2 inches and
ro~ted clockwise 90 degrees. Eight readings
3. 1.1 Abrasion tester @ garnet abrasive shall be obtained for each specime~ An average
tape - specified in M3L-T-5438. shall be obtained by calculating the arithmeUc
mean of all the readings which are individually
3. 1.2 An alternate abrasive tape is as follows: less than the arithmetic mean of all the eight
Cloth tape 50 yards long by l-inch wide, The readings per Specime& This average shall
abradant shall be aluminum oxide, grit 400, define the abrasion resistance of the specimen
Behr-Manning Manufacturing Company, or under tesL
.qud. Str~~s c! silver mmdur+ve pahk l/4-
inch wide, shall cross the @e at right imgles to 5. RESULTS
ita edge, at jnkvala of 3 inches, center to
center. The conductive paint ehall be ~nt 5.1 unless otherwise specified in the detaiI
& J 4817 or equivalent specification or specification shee~ one specimen
from each inspection unit shall be tested.
\ \~ 3.1.3 Weights as specified in the detail
specification or specification sheet. 5.2 Each of the eight readings shall be re-
corded ad an average shall be obtained by calcu-
L PROCEDURE lating the arithmetic mean of all the readings which
are individually less than the arithmetic mean of
4.1 An inch of the InsulaUon ad outer all the eight readings per specimen.
covering shall be removed from one exxiof a
36-inch specimen of the finished wire. The
oiripped end of the 6pecimen shall be fastened 5.3 The weigh~ tension load, and type of
in tbe clamp over tbe tape-feed reel of the abrasive tape used shall be recorded.

FED. TEST METHOD STD. NO. 228

 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Method 3001
APnl 14, 1967

TENSION TESTS, INSULATION AND SHEAT~ GENERAL

1. SCOPE the specimen to a stated elongation. It is ex-
L1 TM group of tests is Wended for use pres&d in pounds of tension load per square -
in determining the effect of application of a inch at the stated elongation. For example,
tmsion load to the insulation snd sheaths of 1,000 pounds per square inch at 600 percant
insulated wire and cable. Methods of test for elongation. It is often designated in rubber
tansile strength, ultimate elongatio~ tensile technology by the term ‘$noduhwn.
stress, tearing strength, ●nd set of robber ●nd 24 Tension 8A Set is the elongation r&
thermoplastic compoun~ snd tansi.le strength maining afters specimen has been stretched and
of varnished cambric insulation are described. held at a specified elongation for a given period
2 DEFINITIONS of timq then relieved of the force and allowed
21 Tensile strength Tensile atrmgfh is to rest. for a definite period of time. It is ex-
the force per unit of the original eroaa-eectional pressed as a percentage of the original dietanca
s= Of the -tihd spacimti whiA M sp- between bench marks on the unstretched epeoi-
plied at the time of mpture of the specimen. It men. For examplq a specimen is stretched
is calculated by dividing the breaking fome in from 1 to 5 inches for a period of 10 minutes and
pounds by”the cross section of the unstretched “then released. Its length after the 10 minute
specimen in square inches. For example, if a rest is 1.2 inches, so that the set under these
specimen of cross section 0.25 inch by 0.10 inch conditions is 0.20 inch or 20 percenk
broke at a force of 60 poundq the tensile 25 Tearing strength.. Tearing strength is
strength would be 50 divided by (0.25X0.10) the ratio of the maximum force applied during
which ig equal to 2,000 pounds per -square inch. tear of a specimen to the thickness of the ●n-
When a stress is appiied to the specimen o~ ru”b- stretchecl 51X1 iTM!il. For ~xai~~~le., if G fGN6

ber and thermoplastic compounds, the material of 36 pounds is necessnry (o tww n specimen
strotchee with sn accompan~ng reduction in 0.082 inch thick, the tearing strength would be
cmse-sectionnl ara Sirm precise meaaure 36 divided by 0.082, or 439 pounds per inch.
menta of the specimen cannot be made ●t the 2.6 Median. If the numerical values for ●
moment the specimen bremka, calculation of the given property are ● rranged in an ascending or
tensile etrength at break is based on the croes- descending order, tho median is obtained as
sectionnl area of the specimen before applica- follows :
tion of any load. 26.1 If the number of values is odd, the
22 Elongation. Elongation is the exten- median is the value in the middlo d the eerics.
sion between bench marks produced by a ten- 2.62 If the number of values is even, the
sion force applied to a specimen and is ex- median is the arithmetic average of the two
pressed aa a percentage or origkml distance be- middle values.
tween the marks on the unstretched specimen, 3. SPECIMEN
Ultimate elongation is the elongation at the 3.1 Typaa.
moment of rupture For examplq if a l-inch 3J.1 Two shapes of specimens maybe used
bench length in marked on an unstretched speci- for tensile strength, elongation, tensile st~
men and the specimen is stretched untiI the nnd set of rubber or thermoplastic insulation.
bench marks us 7 inchee apa~ elongation is These are the dumbbell nnd straight specimens.
7 inches-1 inch-6 inches or 600 perwmt. .i dumbbell specimen, m described in method
23 Tensile stress. Tensile stress k the 3021, shall be used whenever it is pr~cticable
force per unit of original cross-sectional area of to prqxm it from the pime (varnished cam-
the unstretched specimen required to stretch bric insulation rxcepted) to be t~sted, Straight

FED, TEST METHOD $70, HO, 228

 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Method 3001

specimens in the form of tubes shall be used 43 If the piece from which the specimen ia
for rubber nnd thermoplastic insulation and to be prepared is too thick or has an uneven sur-
sheaths Then it i’snot practicable to prepare a face that may interfere with the determination
dumbbell. A straight specimen 1 inch wide or of thickness, the piece or portion of the piece
the full width of the tape if less than 1 inch shrill be bufiecl IIS described in method 3011,
wide shall be used for determining the tensile The specimen shall be permitted to rest at least
strength of varnished cambric insulation. 30 minutes between bllffing nnd testing. Speci-
3.12 Specimens for use in the determina- mens for tension tests shall be buffed in tile strip
tion of tearing strength are shown in figure form before cutting with a die.
3111, 5. RESULTS
3.2 Direction. Specimens shall be taken in 5.1 Unlms otherwise specifiwl in the detnil
the length clirection of the wire or cable for rub- specification, three specimens from each in-
ber or thermoplastic insulation and sheaths and spection unit .dmll be tested for teusilc streugth,
in the ]cngth direction of the tripe for varnished elongnt ion, tcusile stress, nnd set of rubber and
cambric insulation. thermoplastic insulation nnd sheath except that
4. PROCEDURE under the following condit ious five specimens
4.1 Unless otherwise spcrified in the clebil shrill be tested:
specification, tsmsile strength, elougat.ion, and 5.1.X If one or more values do not meet the
tensile stress of rubber or thermoplastic insula- specifie(l reqllirmnents rl)en tested for com-
tion and shcztlls shun bc determined on the plinnro with speviticntions.
S:LIIIespw’i)n(m al]d during il si:)gle test. 5.1.2 If referee tests are bei]g mnde.
4.2 If five specimens nre reqtlired for deter- 5.2 Tlw chnrnctcristic of the insulation or
mining nny one of the nbove properLies, 4.1, sheath nf the il)spection uuit shall be the medinn
these five q)ecimcns shall be used for determin- of the rewlts obtained from the specimens
ing all of these properties. tested.

FED. TEST METHOD STD. NO. 228

 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Method-3011
@il 14, 1967

BUFFING, INSULATION AND SHEATH

1. SCOPE 5-inch wheel operating at the speed specified in
1.1 This method is intended for use in re- 4.1, The grinder shall also be quipped with
moving uneven nessof surfmw from ruhbcrmd a slow feed in order that very little of the ma-
thermoplastic insulation and jacket xnnterials terial will be removed at one cut.
which would interfere with the nmasuremcnt of 4. PROCEDURE
thickness of the specimen or subsequent tests. 4.1 The speed of the abrnaive wheel shrill be
It also may be used to reduce the thickness of from 2,500 to 3,500 revolutions per minuta if
the piece where necessary before testing and to n 5-inch wheel is used. The face of the whed
rrmmvti glHze or skim coat that may intnrfere shall he sharp and the fin] bufled surface shall
with further examination or teats. be finished uniformly and smoothly. Very
Z PIECE little material shall be removed at one cut.
2.X The piece for balling shall consist of a otherwiao the piece may he injured by over-
portion of the inspection unit of sufficient size heating. “The buffing shall not he carried
to permit the preparation of n specimen of the
beyond the point at which the unevenness of
rquired size for twit..
gn~e jllst disnlqwnrs. except in the case of thick
3. APPARATUS
l))ntcri:lls whPre it is nmwsary to reduce the
3.1 The Rpparatus shall be as follows:
3.1.1 The apparatus shall consist of a thicknrss for tel)sioll or other tests, In such
grinder equipped with a motor-driven abrasive cases it may be desirable to slice the piece to
wheel 5 inclws in diameter, composed of ap- approximately the correct thickness of the re-
proximately ]l~lmber 30 Krit. Lnrgcr dinmetw quired specimen before buffing. The specimen
Wheels jI-Iit] & used pru
....,1.
k Iueu
1 .1. . .
UK sped iS itJ -
~~,a]] h,.
“w ..,. ””. ;*+h?l*n
,M-’ie, ,,st. .“ -~$~
* ~~ ]~~:: :](2 ~~p.,Jt6c
..-
justed to give a surface speed equivalent to s bctwecn M!ing rmd testing,

FED, TEST METHOD STO, NO. 228

 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com .-

Method 3016
April 14, 1967

CALIBRATION, TENSION TESTING MACHINE

L SCOPE head of the compensating type, it shall be cali-
1.1 This method is intended for use in cali- brated at two or more settings of the compen-
brating the tasting machine described in method sator.
9021. 42 The motor shall be started, with the
2 SPECIMEN pawla or other maximum load-indicat ing device
Z1 The specimen shall be a dumbbell speci- engaged M in nomal testing, and the weight
men of a tread wmpound. applied until the weight assembly is freely sus-
3. APPARATUS pended by the specimen. If the dial or scale
%1 The apparatus shall be as follows: (whichever is normally used in testing) does
Wl Tedhg muohh described in method not indicate the weight applied (or its equiva-
son. lent in stress for compensating type of Wters)
3M A suitabh hook which can be attached within *1 percang the mnchi.ne shall be thor-
ta the power.actuatad grip of the testing ma- oughly checked for excess friction in the b&r-
chine for holding ‘weighte. ings and all other moving parta.
3.12 We;ghtu, qua] to 10,20, and 50 percent 4.3 After eliminating as nmrly ~s pmsible
of the capacity of the m~chine. all the excess friction, the machine shall be re-
4. PROCEDURE c.aliiirated in the aforementioned my until the
&l One end of the dumbbell specimen shall machine does indicate correctly. The machine
be placed in the tipper clamp of the testing shall be calibrated at a minimum of three
machine. The lower clamp shall be removed points, using accurately known weight assem-
and there shalI be at:o.ched to it a hook suitable blies cowring the range of forces to be mezs-
for holding wigili.s. The h-lwer lhlp .1. tl t..
Sllnll ml “did. ~},~ ~ejg~,~ ~f 4L.
~,=~_,,p
.1”- ~n~ hco~ ~~.z]!
attached to the lower end of the dumbbell speci- be included M part of the calibration weight.
men. A weight shall be suspended from the 1’ pawls or rotchets are used during test, they
hook on the lower clamp in such a wny as to shall nlso be us~d during the calibration. Fric-
pemnit the weight assembly to rest on the clamp t ion in the hmd may be checked by calibrating
holder. If the machine has a dynamometer with the pawla up.

FED. TEST METHOD STD. NO. 228

 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Method 3021
Ad 14. 1967

TENSILE STRENGTH, INSULATI08 AliD SHEATH

1. SCOPE 3.1.1.4 The rate of travel of the power-
1.1 This method is intended for use in deter- nctllwted grip shall be 20&I inch per millute
mining the tensile strength d insulation and and shall be uniform at all times.
sheath compounds, It is applicable to the usual 3.1.1.5 The machin% when used for rLgiven
grades of rubber and thermoplastic compoun& specimen, should be of such cnpacity thnt the
used for insulation and sheaths. \ maximum load requred to break the specimen
2 SPECIMEN is not greater than 85 nor less than 15 percent of
2.1 Tile specimen shall be a piece of the in- the rated capacity.
sulation or sheath taken from the iuspectirm 3.1.1.6 If the mnchine is equipped with a
unit as follows: dynamometer head of thecampenaating type for
21.1 DurdbelL Whenever it is pmctica- convenience in eliminating calculation% the
ble to prepare it from the inspection unit, IL head shall have means for making adjustments
dumbbell-shaped sp&imen cut by one of the dieg for variation in thicknes of specimens.
shown in figure 3021 shall be used except for 3.1.1.7 -Grin&
varnished cnmbric insulation. When the qim 3.1.1.7.1 n-u m ?)b c 11 aoerimcn. lVhetl a
of the piece of mnterird to be tested xvi]] p~rmit, dumbbell s~ecimcn is used, the tzrips which hold
the reduced port ion of the ywcin)en si~all be the specim;n in the testing machine shall be of a
l~inch wide and either 1-5/16 or 2-5/16 inches type which tightens automatically as the ap-
long. If the piece of material to be tested is plied tension increases and exerts Q uniform
narrow, o specimen with reduced portion ~ inch pressure across the gripping surfaces so as to
wide may be used. When the size of the piece avoid uneven slipping and to favor failure of
permits, wdargeci ends of the specimen shall be the specimen in its constricted section.
1 inrh wick. Wlmn the piece of materml M 3.i.i.7.2 Kmziqht. ‘r%%ena strai@t slwci-
narrow, the enhr rgerl ends of the specimen muy men is used, either wedged or toggle clamps
be ~~ inch wide. The thickness of the specimen shall be used. The distance between the edges
shall not exceed 0.125 inch. of the clamps at the stnrt of the test shall be
3=14 inch.
3.1.2 Dies. Metal dies of the shnpe and con-
2.1.2 Straight apecirn~fi A strnight speci- etmction=m in figure 3021 and of the dimen-
men ill the form of n tribe shrtll ho 1).sedwhen it sions S]]OWY1 in t hc accompanying legend shal 1
is ]mt prncticnble to prepare n dllmbhell-shrrp+x-l be lIs~tl for stnmping or cutting of dumbbell
specimen from the ins~llritimr or shenth of tllc specimens. It is wcommcndsd that (he rpdllcml
insl)rytinll l]nit. qrt i(]l) of the rlic he equipped thrcmghout its
3. APPARATUS ell(ire length with n spacer tomnintaina definite
3.1 The nppnmtus shall be ris follows: distn))ce between the cutting edges. The
3.1.1 A tcating mudiim which meets the fol- spacers shall he held by at least two bolts
lowing requirements: thro@} the body of the die The difhenoe
3.1.1.1 Tlw mnchine shall be power-driven. tret wwn the minimum and maximum distance
3.1.12 Tl)c applied tension shall be indi- betwwm the cutting edgea of the rlie in the re-
tmtod to wit]lin = I percent by n dial, scnlo., or duced section shall not exceed 0.002 inch. The
nutomntic recorder when calibmted nccording inside faces in the reduced =tion shall be
to metllm-1 301tI. polished and perpendicular to the plane formed
3.1.1.3 The il)dic:~tor shll wrnnin at the by the cutting edges for a depth of nt lmst 0.25
point of maximum force after rupture of the inch. The rmgle between the inner an{l outer
specimen. faces nt the cuttil~g edge shall be not less tllfiu

FED, TEST METHODSTD. NO. 228

 Method 3021
41 I
Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

TI
M-
‘—
u
- -

Ii
it
f3-
N.[
I
“-- ----- h,
●
‘%?
~d
d
+h
‘+
FED, TEST NETHOD STD. MO.
 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Method S021

Dimrneiona in inch for standard diea

I 1
I Toleranw
I Dle
Dimendon
I 11 111 Iv v VI VII
—.— -— — . . — — —

A * %a 1 1 1 ){ % % %
hhximum 1% l)f l!i l!~ 1$8 1% 1%
B 4;5
c Minimum 5% 5H 4 5 5 4)f
D *~~1 1% 1% 1% 1)-4 1% 1)4 1)4
D-r * ?4s % !f !4 N H % ~
+){s 1!4 1!4 w ~ 1% lx ‘
F
G ● %9
8J, %* ;8 p %* )h %*
1 1 1 % % !~
H *H*
L ● HV 2%. 2%. 1%6 l%, 2)f. 2!40( 1%s
w 660 agun o.Soo 0.250 0.250 0.125 0.125 0.250 0.250

1For dice wrd in clicking mnchWa, Itb Pmfe-le that We toler-e b +%4 Inch.

,30~ nml not more llmn n~”. The ollter fnce une~e]l surfiwe that mny interfere with the de-
shall extend nt this angle from the cutting edge termination of thickness, ti;c piece or portion
fur npproximntely ?~.t inch :lnd thrn shall form of [IN pirw sII:L1l ho lJutTc~l:1s (Iescribcd in
nil angle between 18° and 22° with the in]~er me! lwd 3011. The specimen shall be pwnittccl
face. The dies shall be sharp and free fr~jm to rest at Icnst :;0 minutes between buthng and
nicks in order to prevhnt leaving ragged edges t~stiw Swilnens shn]l be buffed in ~~~e*rip
on the specimen. form before cutting with 8 die.
~.~,~.l (!nrrfll] niujJi@l)iilm.3 Of dic-clltting 4.1.2 I)llwr)ht)f. Slxvinlen.s of the required
edges is of extreme importance and mny he ob- shnpe nnd sizr s?mll be cut or strtmpwl from
tuind by dnily light honing and touching up tlm piece of mntcrinl with the required die. To
the cutting edges with jeweler’s hard Arkansas facilitate cutting, the edge of ‘the die may be
honing stones. The condition of the die may lubricated with wwt~r containing a wetting
be judged by inveetigding the rupture point ngent snd a corrosion inhibitor before each
on uny series of btwken specimens. When specimen is cut. The cut cd=% shrill be per-
Inwkcn specimens nrs removed from the grips pendicular to the other surfaces of the speci-
of the teetin~ mnchin~, “it is sdvantageona to men, have a minimum of concavity, nm.1be free
pi 10 t lwse specimens nnd noto if there is nny from rngged edges.
ten(lvl wy to brrnk nt or near the samo portion of 4.13 Struiqht specimen. A specimen of
ench specinwn. Rupture points consistently nt proper length for clamping in the grips of the
the snme pluce nmy indicate that the die is testing machine shall be cnt from the unit or
dull, nicked, or bent at t hnt ptwticular position. piece to be tested. The specimen shall be free
3.12 C%ttinq mlppd. Rubber belting, from nicks. If possible, the specimen should ho
leather belting, light cardboard, or other mn- cut with a die or with a single stroke of the
terinl with a smooth, slightly yielding surfsce cutting tool.
that will not inj Nre tho cutting edge of the die 42 Cro-ectional area of specimen
during the cutting or stamping of the specimen. 43.1 Dumbbell.
4. PROCEDURE 42.1.1 Thirhnem. The thickness of the
4.1 Preparation of specimen. specime~ shall be determined as deseriberl in
4.1S l;ulfin~. If the pieco from which the method” 1124 except that three measurements
specimen is to be prepared is too thick or has an shall be made, one at the center and one near
&

FED. TEST METHOD STD. NO. 226

iI
 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Method ml

each end of the reduced section of the specimen. @ps of the machine knd adjusted symmetri-
If the specimen is narrower than the diameter cally in order that the tension will be distrib-
of the foot, rnensuremertte shall be IImde with uted uniformly over the cross section. If the
the canter of the micrometer foot coinciding tension is greater on one side of the specimen
with the longitudinal center line of the speci- than on the other, the maximum .v@@h of the
men so that there will be an equal orerlap of the specimen will not be developed. The force
foot on em-h side. The median of tlic three shrill be appIied to the specimen at such a rate
measllrement.s shall be used as the thickness in that the power actuated grip will travel at a
calculating the cros9-sectional arm of the speci- uniform speed of 20=1 inch per minute. After
men except that specimens fur which the differ- rupture of the specimen, the breaking force
ence between mnximum and minimum tllic.lulcss shall be noted from the (linl or scale or by means
exceeds 0.0(J3 inch shall he rliscartlcd. of :In nlltogruphic or spark recorclcr and the
4.2.1.2 Wldt4. ‘1’]w widlll of a spwimcn vnl ue recorded.
shsll be tbe dlstmce, W in the legend for figure 5. RESULTS
8021, between the cutling edges of tile die in the 5.1 Calculation. The tensile strength of
reduced section. the specimen shall be cdculnted as follows:
4.2.103 The cross-scctiorml arm of t hc speci- Tcnslle strength, p, a. l.=?
men shall be cdculatod by multi plyill~ the where : u
width of the specimen by the mwl ian tliicli!)~ss ~=breaklm! force in pounds
of the specimen. (?=cross. sectlorml orp,ll of the unstretch~ a~l~en
in square Ihcbes, 4.2.1.3 or 4,2.2.1.
4.2.2 %tight.
4.2.21 ‘1’lwwclcht of tllc spmljn(,ll it) gr:inls, N Ul)lw% otherwise specified in tile detni]
the Iengtli of the specimen in centimeters, rmtl specification, three specimens frnm each inspec-
the dollsity in grams per cubic cent imettv shrill t ion lll~it shall be tested cxcrpt tllnt ul)der the
full, )winy conditions fire specimens shall be
bc (Irtrrmincd. The cross-scction~l nt-rn s]~;~ll
then be calcl)lated from these mcnsllrernent.s ilk t Csted :
-m.
t lie following manner: d.:.l I.i tiw iensiic stre~~gti) (Ii ~JINIf~r lnore
specimens does not meet the specified require-
!l,lrbq;7
(’rfwwwtiwal area. ~unrv lIIch2s_ -
1)9 L-
ment for tensile strength “in the detail epsci.
where: licution.
11’-the weight OCthe aperhocn ioy]r IUgrnms ~.~ If referee tests nre being made.
J)=rlIO d,tmit~ of iht~ upeclmtw Ii) Krnulx ]wr cuhk 5.3 The tensile stremgtb nf the insulnt km or
c,lntlrnetw sllcat)l of the inspmtion unit sIMII he the me-
1.=! ti~,l~m~tl of the sl)m.imrn in mv)lln),qr.r<.
dian of the results obtained from the specimens
4.3 Determination of tensile strength. tested.
43.1 Tlic lost ing mnrhinc slmi] be culibrntwj 5.4 The.tensile Strength of the insulation or
as Josmibml in method 3016. shc:~th of tho inspection unit shall be recorded
4.X2 rho si~~imm dull] IN’ l}lncml in tho to the ncurest 10 pounc19 per square inch.

FED. TEST METHOOS10, NO. 228

4
 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com
\

Method 3031
Avril 14.1967

ELONGATION, INSUXA’I’ION AND SHEATH

1. SCOPE inch wide. Cam shall be taken not to injure
1.1 This method is intended for use in deter- the specimem
mining the elongation of insulation snd sheath 43 . Determination of eIongaUon. T he
compounds at break. It is applicable to the specimen shall be placed in the grips of the
usual grsdes of rubb+x and thermoplastic com- tasting machine and the force applied ns de-
pounds used for insulation and nheath. scribed for tansile etren~ method 3021. The
2 SPECIMEN diatancc between the two bench marks oJ~ the
21 The specimen shrill br ns described in dumbbell or tight specimen shall be notetl
nwthod 3021. continuously to the neareet 0.1 inch by mums
3. APPARATUS of the ecale or other deviee which shsll be used
M The appnrstus shall be ● follows: in euch a manner as not ti touch the specimen
X1.1 Tha apparatw deecnbed in method or only very lightly touch it on the front or
3021. b-k. Two operntom may be required to con-
3X2 Bend markm huving two pamllel duct this teat. The distance between the bench
knife vdgw ground smtmt h :LINltrue nnd which marks when the specimen ruptures together
am bet=wen 0.002 ●l (MM inc}l in width at tlie witl~ tlic original distance between the bench
edge and hcwelled at on nngle of not more than mnrks dud] be recor+d.
15° to the perpendicular. The distance be- 5. RESULTS
tween the centem of the knife edges shrill be S.1 Calculation. ‘i%r elolyytt ion of tile
1.000= 0.003 inch or 2.OOOinch~ = 0,003 inch sperimen shall be calculated ns fol)ows:
as required.
3.1.3 ,Qt,7m P pad hnvi])g n planp llnyielding Flon=nt\on,
. pm-rent=!) ~..
‘“a xl(ul

~iiif;ict /1. ..”. 1.....,83:..

{ls..,.,l 1 ;:!ste g!?ss. or plnsticj V.-!: *T!. :

containing ink of (he desired color nnd @ity D-the dlstn nm betwe@n tk beach marks ●t the

for msrkinq the specimen. Tlw ink SIJIIIIhnve moment It rnwutw of Inckthe *pAmm
O-the dlstnoce between the Mnrb mnrks on tbe
no deteriorating effect on rubber or plastic nnal retcMl *men. tncba
~~ enmpounch+ nnd shall be of contrasting color to
= t-hiese Othertvim ;lnYif%*d ill 1ho dct:~il
thrit of the specimen.
\ 3.1.4 Mmmm%.g mate .fiv oth~r ddce gmd- specification, three specimens from cinch inspect-
unted in 0.1 inch for indirsting elongation. , ion unit shrill be tested except thnt under the
4. PROCEDURE following conditions be specimens shall be
4J Unless otherwise specifimi in t ha detail t@skd :
specification, the elongnt ion shall be dmmnined 5.21 If tlw Ampti[m of ~)twIIr IIIIIIW●lnvi -
on the same specimen and nt the earn? time as mens does not nmeL the specifird requirmwlt
the tensile strength. for Amgntion in the detail specification,
42 Preparation of specimen. The npeoi- 5= If refcnw toxt~ rtrv Iwillg III:IIIV.
rnwl dm,il be prepntwl as tleacribed in method M “11}0 t+mgat ion of the insuhlt irm or
M)21. Two poralkl bench tnarks shrill be phimf sheath of the inspection unit shrill Im tllc nwdinn
ywnmetrieally on the strnight slmcuneti umi on uc tiw rcsu!ts obtamcd frml thG .spccimtnz
the mductxl section of the dumbbell specimen tsted.
perpendicular to the longitudinttl nxis of the 5.4 The eimlgntion of tllc inrmlntion or
spwinmn by menns of the bench marker nncl dmth of thr inqn~tion unit shrill b’ mcor(led
i~~l;, The rnnrks shrill ho not more thrm 0.010 to the nrnred 5 percent.

FED. TEST METHOD STD. HO. 228

Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com
 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Method 3041
Aoril 14. 1%7

TENSILE STRESS, INSULATION AND SHEAH1

1. SCOPE necessnry to stretch the specimen to tile re-
1.1 This method is intended for use in deter- quired elongntiun slmll be recorded.
mining the tensile stress of insulation and 5. RESULTS
sheath compounds. It is applicable to the usunl 5.1 Calculation. The tensilo stress of the
grades of rubber and thermoplastic compounds specimen shall be calcn]atod as follows:
IISSL~for insulation and aheatha.
Tensile ntrenes,
p.a.i.-::
Z SPECIMEN
2.1 TIM specimen shall be ng described in where:
F=force In pounds rcqui red t IJ otretch the speclmeo
method 3021. to the r~uired clnngatlcm
3. APPARATUS C=croam-mectlonal arm o! the unstretched spedawn
3J The nppmntus shall be as described in In qnnre Inches (4A)
methods 3021 and 8031. 52 Unless otherwise specified in tllc detail
4. PROCEDURE specification, three specimens from cnch inspec-
4.1 Unless otherwiw slx’cificd in the detail tion unit dmIl bc tcstd cxcrl)t thnt under the
specification, the tensile stress sllnl 1 hc deter- following conditions five specimens shall be
mined on the same specimen rtnd at the s;~me tested:
time as the tensile strength aml elcmg:ltion. 5.2.1 If !he twlsile stress of OI)Cor moro
4.2 The elrmgut ion in percent at which the specimens dots nut m(+et t ho q-wci&ied rcqlli re-
tensile stress is to be determined ahcdl be M mcnt for tensile strms ill the dftnil s]wcificu-
speci!iecl in the detnil Sp[’cifiritt ion. tion.
4.3 Preparation of specimen. The speci- 5.2.2 If referee tests are bcil )g mn de.
men shall be prcpnred as described in methods 5.3 Tile Lel]sile stress of lhc ins~llution or
3021 and 3031. shsath of the inspection unit shall be the medinu
4.4 Cros~ectional area. The c rosa- of the results obtuinod from the spccimcns
sectional arm of the specimen shrill he deter- tested.
mined ns described m nmthod 3021. 5.4 TIM tensile stress of the insulation or
4.5 Determination of tensile stress. ‘NM shcnth of the inspection unit shall be recorded
procedure for tensile stress shrill be the same t.a the nearest 10 pounds per squnre inch,
as for tensile strength and elongation, methods 5.5 The elongation at which tcnsilo stress is
3021 and 3031, except thut the fores in pounds determined shall be rccrwded.

FED. TEST MHWID STL b@. m

i
:
Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com
 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Method 3111
APnl 14, 1%7

TEARING STRENGT~ SHEATH

1. SCOPE portion 1A inch wide. Usil~g a sharp blade, a
1.1 This method is intended for use in cletar- slit shaI1 be cut along the center of the con-
mining tkq reaiatance to tear of sheath com- stricted portion, extending to within 0.15 inch
pounds. It is applicable to the usual grades of of the end of the enl~rgcd part of the specimen.
rubber and thermoplastic compounds used for The slit shell be cut approxinlrttcly 90° to the
sheaths. flat surface of the specimen.
2 SPECIMEN 4Z Meaaurentent of specimen. The thick-
21 ‘1’he specimen shall be a piece of the ness of the specimen shall b mmsured as de-
shenth tnken from the inspection unit of the scribed in method 1124 before cutting the slit,
shape and dimensions shown in figure 3111. except that three measurements shell be mnde
The thickness at the enlarged end of the speci- at tho enlarged em-l and not more thnn 0.25
men shall be not greater than 0.150 inch and inch from the end of the piece. The median
not leas than 0.040 in& of the three measurements shmll be morded
& APPARATUS for use in calculating the tenring strength.
&l The apparatus shall be as follows: 4.3 Determination of tearing strength.
3.1.1 Appnrntus as described in method 3021, One end of the split portion of the specimen
3.1.!2 Sharp r%zor blade for ditting the shall be clampecl in the upper grip w-idthe other
specimen. end shall be clnmped in the lower grip of the
W* *th S- m-* d*tbiMM tensile machine. The force shrill t]ien be np-
plied with a lower jaw speed of 20=1 inch per
minute. The maximum force in pounds regis-
tered on the dial rerorder or scnh> shall be re-
corded in calrl]lat.ing tlm tenring strergt!l.
5. RESULTS
5.1 Calculation. Tho t(mriug strength of
the speeimen shall be calculated as follows:
i
Flouu mu.
\oQ T-ring strength, pounde per Inch of thickness= ~
Q\ 4. PROCEDURE
\
where:
\ 4.1 Preparation of specimen. F-tearing fmce in puanda
4.1.1 A’uflnr. If the piece from which the T=thlrkn~ inch
specimen is to be prepnred is too thick or has 52 Unless otherwk specified in the detnil
an uneven surface thot may interfere with the specification, five specimens from each inspec-
determination of thickneae, the pieca or portion tion unit shall be tested except that under the
of the piece shall be buffed as described in following conditions seven specimens shall be
method 3011. teeted :
4.L2 The specimen shall be prepared by 521 If the tearing strength of one or more
means of a die described in method 8021. The specimens does not meet the specified require-
shape of the specimen shaIl be as dtwcribed in ment for tenring strength in the detail speci-
&ure 3111. It shall be cut with the gr~in fication.
running the long way of tha specimu To 522 If referee teats we being made,
f~cilitata cutting, the piece of materisd from 53 The tearing strength of the sheath of the
whioh the specimen is to be cu~ and the edge inspection unit shall be the median of the re-
of the die may be lubnca~d with water con- sults obtained from the specimen~ tested.
taining a wetting agent and n corrosion inhibi- 5.4 The tearing strength of the sheath of the
tor. The specimen shall be 2 inches long, the inspection unit shall be recorded to the nearest
reduced portion Y, inch widq and the enlarged 1 pound per inch of thickness.
FED. TEST METHOD STD. NO, 228
 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Method 3161
April 14, 1967

TENSION SET, IN!XJLA’HON AND SHEATH

L SCOPE *12 Any satisfactory device for stretching

1.1 This method is intanded for uee in deter- the specimen at B uniform speed m-d which will
mining the elongation remaining in rubber in- hold it at a specified elongation for a definita
sulation md eheath compounds aftur a speci- period of time. An apparatus that has been
men has been held ●t a speci6ed elonption for found satisfactory is shown in figure 8161.
B giYen period of timq then relimd of the form 3.L3 Stop uw.trh or other uuitolde timing
●nd allowd b rast fora deflnita period of tirm device which will register the time in eeconds
2 SPECIMEN and minuku
21 The speoimen ehdl be as described in 3.1.4 .Wmmm”ng ~calc or otiim deviu gmd-
method 802L uated in 0.01 inch for indicating the elongation
8. APPARATUS or eet. A straight rod of ● lsngth equal to the
$1 The ● pparatue shbll be M follows : exact distume required between the bench marks
&Ll Grip u used in the tuating machine ~ft.er stretching has bean found suitmble for
d-ribed in method 9021. detmnining the required elongation.

HeI&r “K”* Rd.

B’MURC 3161. Appsmtus !or “set” test
.

FED. TEST METHOD STD. NO, 228

I
 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Method 3161

4. PROCEDURE tween the two bench rnnrka on tho stretched

4.1 Thee long:ktion ordistn]wcbctween the specimen. Holding the rod beside the test
bench mnrks of the stretched specimen shall specimen while it is being stretched simplifies
bo ;LSspecitlcd in the cletni] specification. If the operation and reduces the chance of stretch
no elongation is specified, the specimen shrill ing tile specimen more than the required
bc stretcl)c,l itl~ anloul]t equnl (u three-fourths ~nmllnt.. ii sto]l watch shun be used for re-
of tl~e ul(i]llate elongation as determined by cording the time required for the various opera-
mcthcxl 3u31, tions.
4.2 Ul}lr.ss d}mrwise sllecified in tlic dcttiil 5. RESULTS
specificatiol~, tile specimen shall be held at the 5.1 Calculation. “The tension set of the
specified elongation for2 minutes. specimen shall be calculated na follows:
4-? ~~]]lms otllcrwise specified iu tllc dctnil
specificntimi, the specimen shnil be allowed to
rest fur 2 minutes ufter release before the set where:
L,=the dlstrmee between hencb mnrks of tbe un.
is mcnsllred. otrctcbetl npeclmm, Inuhee
4.4 Preparation of specimen. TIM speci- L==tie dlstn- between bench marks oc tie ~-
men shllll be prepnred ns described in methods men at tbe end of tbe rest ~iod
3021 nnd 3001, 5.2 TJnlm otherwise speciiled inq~he detail
4.5 Determination of set. Tile specimen specification, three specimens from ea&” inspec-
sIM1l tJe p]ttced in the grips of the testing np- tion unit SIUL1lbe tested excel}t thot under the
parntlls in tile sanw IIla]lner ns described in followi]]g conrli[ ions five spwimens Sl)illl be
.
method 3021. The grips shnl] be scpornted at tested :
an npproximnte]y uniform rnte of speed such 521 If the tension ect of one or more speci-
ns to rcqllirc tibout 15 eeccnds to rcnch the re- mens does not meet the specified requirement
qllired el{)ng:ttion. fur tension sc~ in tlw dctuil specification.
4.3.1 ‘1’lwslwl’inwn dull] bc hchl :It the re- 5.2.2 1f wferce tests are being made.
qu ired rlongfit ion for the rcquirml time, then 5.3 Tile tens]oi~ set of the msuiation or
rolenwwl immediately without being nllowed shenth of the inspection unit shall be the
to snnp lxw]~ and nllowed to rest for the re- median of tho rceuhs obtnined from the speci-
quired time. mens tentecL
4.5.2 After the rest period, the distnnce be- 5.4 The tension set of the insulation or
tween the bench marks sh:dl bo menaured to sheath of the inspection unit shall be recorded
the nwwcst 0.01 inch. to the nearest one percexk
453 In stretching tho specimen ithns been 5.5 The elongation, time the specimen was
folmd convenient to use B measured rod of a held at the epecifiod elon~ntion, and the rest
length equnl to the exnct distance required be- period shall be reeorde&

FED. TEST METHOD STD. NO. 228

 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Method 3171
April 14, 1%7

TENSILE STRENGTH, VARNISHED CLOTH INSULATION

1. SCOPE than 5 tapes shall be drawn at mndom for test
L1 This method is intended for use in deter- from each inspection unit.
mining the tensilo strength of cloth tripe in- 4,2 Unless otherwise spectied in the detail
sulation. It is particularly applicable to specification, the specimen shall lM conditioned
varnished cloth taptL for 46 hours at n tempemture of 23° * 1° C.
2 SPECIMEN (79.5° =2° F.) and a relative humidity of
2J ‘Unless otherwise specified in the detail 80=4 percenL
speciflcrition, the specimen shnll be a piece of 43 The thickness of the specimen shall be
the vnrnished cloth at least 14 inches in length determined as described in method 1051 and the
nnd 1 inch wide, or full width if lees than 1 inch, minimum value obtained recorded as T.
taken from a single tape (layer) of the inspec- 4.4 The width of the specimen shall be
tion unk determined as described in method 1411 except
& APPARATUS that measuremen~ &all be made at 5 placea
3A The apparatus shall be ss follows: equally spnced along the length of the portion
3.1.1 A tdi~ ma~hine which meets the fol. of the specimen that is to be pluced between the
lowing requirements: grips of the testing machine, and the minimum
3.1.1.1 The mschine shrill be power-driven, value recorded ns W.
3.1.1.2 The applied tension shall be indi- 45 The ratio of the clesrnnce between the
cated by a dial, scale, or automatic recorder gripsof the &sting machine to the width of the
to within *2 percent up to and including 50- specimen shall be not less than 5 to 1 and not
pound load and to within 31 percent for over more than 10 to I iit t,li~ start. of the test. The
50 pounds, specimen shall be plnced in the machine with
.3.1.13 The indicatir shall remain st the the long dimension pmallel to and the short
point of moximum force aftm rupture of the dimension perpendicular to the dimetion of the
specimen. applied fome. The speed of the power-
3.1.1.4 The rate of travel of the power- acttmted grip of the machine shall bp 12 inches
sctuated grip shall “b 12* 0.5 inches per minute *0,5 inch per minute. The machine shall be
and ahnll be uniform ●t all times set in motion and the form required to break
3.1.1.5 The mnchin~ when used for a given the specimen read from the disl scale, or re-
specimen, should be of such capacity that the corder, and the value recorded ns F.
mnximum load required to break the specimen 4.6 If the sperimen skips between the jrIws.
is not greater than 85 percent nor lees than 15 bresks in or at the edges of the jaws, or if for
peroent of the rated capacity. any reason attributable to fmdty technique :IIi
3.L1.6 GWpU. The f~ee of each jaw of WA individual measurement falls markedly below
grip shrill menaure I inch by 9 or more inch- the specified minimum, such individual result
the long dimension behg perpendicular to the shall be disregarded and another specimen shall
direction of application of fom The jswe het8ste(L
ahrdl have smooth, flat fncea with edges slightly 5. RESULTS
rounded to prevent cutting of the specimen. 5.1 Calculation. The tensile strqth of
4. PROCEDURE the specimen shrill be calculated as follows:
4.1 At least 14 inches of each tape (layer) Tensile ctrengtb, p, s. l.. -+
shall be removed from the inspection unik Un- where:
less otherwise specified in the detail specifica- F-the breeklng force of tbe specimen, pOUn&
T-the minimum thinkn- of t.te opecimen, Inch
tion, 10 percent of the t.apss but in no case less ~=thc nilnlmum wkltb of tbe soecbnc% inch

FED, TEST METHOD STD. NO, 228

I
 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Method 3171

U Unless otherwise spectied in the dekil 5.4 The tile strength of each tape tasted
spedcation, two specimen9 from emh tap9 - shall be recmrded to the nearest 10 pounds per
lscted shall be &ted. square in&
5S The tanstie strength of the tripe shall be
the nverage of the resulti obtained from tbe
specimens tested.

FED. TEST METHOOSTD. HO. 228

2
 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Method 3211
April 14, 1967

TENSILE STRENGTH AND ELONGATION, SOFI’

OR ANNEALED CONDUCTORS
.
1. SCOPE 3.12 StceZ ucale grmluated to $6: inch or
l.1 This method is intended for use in deter- finer, or its decimal equivrdent.
mining the tensile strength and elongation of 4. PROCEDURE
soft or annealed solid copper mnductors or Al Two parallel bench marks 10* ?~2 inch
wires of stranded conductors of insulated wire npart shall be placed on the specimen without
ond cable. It is mpplicnble to both coated and damage to the copper.
uncoxted conductors. 4Z ‘I’he diameter of the wire shall be meas-
2 SPECIMEN ured as described in method 1421. Measure-
21 The specimen shall be the bare conduc- ments shall be made at nine places equally dis-
tor or a wire from s stranded conductor w tributed between the bench harks, and the min-
moved from a piece of the inspection unit at imum value recorded ns D.
least 20 incheg in length. 43 The specimen shall be placed in the test-
3. APPARATUS “ing machine so thst the bench marks Bre be-
3.1 The apparntus shall I]e ae follows: tween the spools but not in contact with the
3.1.1 T~.*ting machim. The t~ting nm- surface of the spools when spool grips are used,
chinc shall meet the following requirements: When using the usual wedge-type grip there
shrill be n distance of at least 1 inch between
3.lJ.1 The machine shall be power-driven.
ench bench murk and the adjacent grip. The
3.1.1.2 The applied tension shall be indi-
speed of the power-nctuated grip shall be
cated by a dial, scale, or nutomntic recorder to
=ith iii & 1 percerit ‘R}Iefi iJrGpE-rly C&!ibikM. 1(}~:2 illchcs per minute Iincler no load.
4.4 After ri~]lllre of III,’slxvimen the l,u-eak-
3.1.L3 The indi(::ltou droll rwlmill rIt the
ing force slud I be red from the dial recorder,
point of mnximurn force after rupture of the
or smle to the nemwst pound and the value ~.
specimen. A spring-halancm-l type of mnchine
corded as I’, If the .qwcimen breaks outside
ia satisfactmy if equipped to prerent recoil
the bench marks or within 1 inch of either
of the S@l&
bench mark, the results shall be discarded and
3.1.1.4 The mte of trnvel of tiw power-
additional specimens tested until lmeake m-e
actuatcd grip shall be 10=2 inches per minute
(Jbtnincd within the prescribed portion.
under no load and shall be uniform.
4.5 The broken specimen shall be immedi-
3J.L5 The machin~ when used for a given ately lnid on a smooth surface, the nlptured
specimen, should be of such capacity thnt the nreas fitted together M closely M possible with
mnxilnum load required to break the specimen
the two portiom placed on a straight line, and
is not. grenter than 85 percent nor lees than 15 the distance between the bench marks measured
&rCent of the rnted capacity. to the nenrest ?~: inch. The length shall be
3.1.1.6 The machine shall nmommodnte recorded as L.
specimens of 10-inch bench length. 6. RESULTS
3.1.1.7 %“p. Tlm grips of the machine 5.1 Calculation.
shnl I be designed ro prOdIICCas nenr] y ng pOS- 5.1.1 The tensile strength of the specimen
silh uniformly distributed pure axial tension shall be calculated se follows:
in the specimen. Grips shnIl be spool-type for
Tensile streagth, p. a. L=*
specimens less than 0.208 inch in dinmeter, nnd
where:
wedge-type for specilllens 0.208 inch fIlld larger
F=thc breaking force of tlwspecimen, in pnunils
in ciinmetcr. D=rninlrnum dinmeter of the qwclmen. inch

FED. TEST METHOO STO. NO. 228

I
 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Method S2U
S.S The tande atrengtb or elongation of the
conduotor or wire of the inspection unit shall
be the amqe of the remdte obtained from the
Specimens tasted
wherb: S.4 The tensile atrengt.h of the conductor or
~mtie dls@nee betwewy (hch marks on the spcl- wire of the inspection unit shall be recoded to
men Imm+tely after ruptore, ilxk the neareat 10 pounds per square inch.
au Unlem otherwise specified in the detajl 55 ‘I’be elongation of the conductor or wire
specification, three spacimena from each inspec- of theirqection unitahallberam’ded to the
tion unit shall be t4utacL neamat O*5percenL

FED, TEST METIIIOOSTD. HO. 2ZU

 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Method 3212
AD~ 14.1967

TENSILE STRENGTH AND ELONGATION, MEDIUM HARD-DRAWN

OR HARD-DRAWN CONDUCTORS
L SCOPE distance between the ~ips when a force equal
1.1 This method is intended for use in deter- to 10 percent of the ~p&i6ed tensile strength
mining the tensile strength and elongation of shall hnve been applied and the final length
medium hard-drown and hard-drawn solid shall be the distance between the grips at the
copper or copper alloy conductors or wires of time of rupture. The zero length shall be as
stranded conductors of insulated wire and ca- near 60 inches M practicable. The fracture
ble. It is npplicnble to both coated and un- shall be between bench marks in the case of
coated conductms and wires.
specimens so marked and between the grips of
Z SPECIMEN
the testing machine when specimens approxi-
Z1 When the diameter of the conductor is rnntely 60 inches in length am involved, and not
over 0.208 inch, the specimen shall be a
closer timn 1 inch to either the bench mark
20-inch length of the copper conductor or wire
or either grip of the mschine.
from the stranded conductor taken from the
inspection unit. When the diameter of the con- 5. RESULTS
ductor is 0.208 inch and l= the specimen shall 5.1 Calculation. .
be approximately 80 inches in length taken 5.1.1 The tensile strength of the specimen
from the inspection unit. For elongation t~ti shall be calculated se follows:
the specimens shall be free from joints.
Tensile strength, p. s. L---&
3. APPARATUS
where :
3.1 The appnratl}s shall be as follows: F-the nminmnn f~nx WXIired to breck *&e w!.
3.1.1. ?’eating machine as d es c r i b e d in men, pounds.
D_& dnlmm diameter Ofwire, inch.
method 3211 except thnt the testing machine
shall be equipped with the wedge-type grim 5.L2 The elongation of the specimen shall be
●nd the power-actunted grip shall be ● djusted calculated se follows:
&move at the Me of 2 * ~ inch per minute. For wire 0.208 inch diameter or greater:
\ 3XL Stil ucde gmduated to ~, inch or
iber, or its decimal equivalen~ Elongation, percent - ~xloo
where:
4. PROCEDURE L-the distance between beech marks on tbe spaci-
4.1 The general procedure shall be ~ men immediately after ruptnre, inc-hu
described in method it211, except that the power- For wire less than 0.208 inch in diameter:
nctuated grip shall move at the rate of 2* ~
inch per minuta. IWngation, pareent-~xlm
42 Elongation of wire with nominal diam- where :
~,.~~ee~~~of~~~~
eter of 0.208 inch or larger shall be determined at the time of rupture of specimen, inebea.
es the permanent increase in length, due to the L.tbe diatenee between grips of tbe testing me-
chine when the specimen is under a strem
breaking of the wire in ttitio~ measumd be- eUM1 to 10 percent Of the np$dled tansilo
tween bench marks placed 10* %4 inch spurt strength, inche, .

on the specimen es described in method 9211. &2 Unle.m otherwise specified in the dekil
4.3 The elongation of wira with diarnetar specification, three specimens from each inspec-
lass thnn 0.208 inch shd be determined by tion unit shall be tested.
measurement made between the grips of the 503 The tensile strength or elongation of the
testing machine. The zero length shall be the conductor or wire of the inspection unit shall be

FED, TEST METHOD STO. NO. 228

1
 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Method 3ZlZ
the ●vemge of the rwulta obtaintd from the 5.S The elon@ion of the conductor or wim
qecimens * of the inqection unit Shll h reoorde!d to the
5.4 The teneile strength of the conauctor or nearest 0.05 percent for lo-inch apaci.mew and
wire of the inspection unit ahsll be recorded to to the nea- 0.01 percant for #-inch
the nemist 10 pounde per equam inch. qecimam

FEO, TEST METHOO STD. NO, =8

 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Method 4001
April 14, 1%7

RESISTANCE TO HEAT, OXYGEN, AIR, LIGHT, AND OZONE;

GENERAL
1. SCOPE 2.1.3 If changes in tensile strengdl and
1.1 This group of tests ;S intended for use elongation are used as a measure of deteriora-
in determining the relative wistanos of rubber tion, these characteristics of tho compound shall
and rubbe~like insulating and jacket com- be determined as described in methods 3021 and
pounds to deterioration inlluencad by heag air, 3031 respectively, Additional specimeng shall
Iighh oxygen, and ozone, These w consist be prepared, measured, and exposed to the con-
of exposing specimens from rubber and rubber- ditions specified in the detail specification. The
like compounds, having previously determined tensile strength and elongation of the exposed
physical characteristi~ to controlled dete- apecimena shall then be determined as described
riorating influences for a spec~ed period of in methods 3021 and 3031 respectively, and the
the after which time the same physical change calculated. Unless otherwise speciiied
charaoteriatics of the compound are again in the detail specification, the tensile strength
measured. Changea in tmeile strength and after aging shall be bnsed on the cross-se~-
elongation are most commonly used k indicate tional area of the unaged specimen.
the degree of deterioration and, unless otherwise 213 ~nle~s otherwise specitied iu the detail
specified in tha. detail specification, them tests specification, bench marks for determining
shall be tleed elongation of nged specimens shall be placed on
L2 The rmults obtained from tests in this the specimen aftar aging.
group are comparative on! y and should be 21.4 If bw%ng of the specimen is necessary,
evnluated against the performance of insula- it shall be done before exposure.
tion and Jacket compounds of known natural 3. PRECAUTIONS
end accelerated aging characteristics, The re- &l The following precautions shall be ob-
sults of accelerated tats should not be used served in conducting accelerated aging tests:
alone to predictor estimate the natural life of 3.lJ The contents of the oven, bomb, or
these mat.arials. other container in which the specimens are ex.
2 SPECIMEN poe8d ehnll be restricted to spcimens known to
21 The specimen shall be as described in the be of the same composition.
‘method of -t used for determining the speci- 3.1.2 The temperature shall be mezsured by
fied characteristics of the compound before and means of a thermometer or thermo-couple
after nging. If tensile strength and elongation mounted so M to indicate the temperature of the
are used to measura the detmioratio~ the speci- specimen. However, if the container is corn.
men shall be as described in methods 3021 and
plet.dy surrounded by steam or by R liquid bnth
3031, respectively.
maintained within the specified tempemture
21.1 The physical characteristic of the in-
range, the temperature of the specimen sbaU be
undating and jacket compound shall be deter-
mined as described in the required method of considered to be the same as thnt of the bath,
teat. Specimens shall then be exposed to the 3.13 Radiation shields shall be placed be.
conditions specified in the detail Wwtication, tween the specimen and any portions of the
the same characteristic again determined and walls of the container not maintained within
the change in the charactaistica calculatd If the specified temperature limits.
it is not necessary to destroy the specimen in 3.1.4 Provisions shall be made for suspend-
determining the initial charactmistic of the ing the specimens vertically without touching
compound, the snme specimen shall be exposed. each other or the sides of the chamber,

FED, TEST METIIOC!STD. NO, 228

 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Mdisod 4001

3.15 Automatic ternpemture controle shall 3J.1O If ● liquid !. -sting m~iw is &
be used and a recording thermometer employed the liquid or ite rape shall not ooxne ia eontaet
to record the temperature. with the ~pecimu
3.1.6 The test chamber shall be preheated 4. CONDITIONS OF EXPOSURE
to the expusure temperature before the speci-
4.1 The conditions of exposure shall be RS
men is placed in it. If the temperature within
the container changes while the spwimen is be- described in the ciehil specification. Many
ing plnqed in i~ the container and conte]lts combinations of tempmature, pressure, ml
ehall reach the specified temperature within 16 time of expam may be used, AE an aid to.
minutes after the specimen haa been placed in wade standardisation, it is recommended that
the chamber. the temperature and preMUrS specikl in the
S.1.7 The exposure period shall start at the detail spedlcationa be selected from the follow-
time the specimen is placed in the ohamber. ing suggested con~.ione. In genenl, the con-
At the end of the exposure period, the specimen dition eekwtad should be euch that the deteri-
ahnll be removed from the chamber and par- oralhm will not he so great as to prevent the
mitted to rest at room temperature for not ke determination of the final physical properti-
than 16 nor more tlmn 96 hours before deter- u nkea the aging characteristic of the com-
mining it9 properti=
pound are known to be poor.
3.1.8 The material used for marking bench
lines or other markings on the specimen shall 42 In the oxygen pressure teat the increase
not be detrimental to the rubber compound. iu temperature from 700 to 80° C. would k
3.1.9 Copper or braas parte shall not be ex- expected to approxi:.lately double the rati of
posed to the Btmoaphera used in the aging oxidation of the robber or other oxidizable
chamber. materinl.

tiinimtam volume
Tem~ of aging timber
Test Medium “J?& [email protected]. s. L .%J%08L
oxidi~le ma- \
tariak, mfliliitem \
.—
Oxygen pmsure Oxygen 70 m b 310 10
Modi6ed oxygen pmimure Do. 80 a to 52 10
Do. Do. 80 290 to 310 10
Air plwaum Ah 127 78 ti 82 100
Air OVOXl Air oircukted by 00nV@ttOU 70 Atmoepbde 10
eoestoobangeatlti
once par hour.
90 10
R
Do. Do.
Do. Do. 100 10
Do. Do. 121 Do. 10
Do. Do. 149 Do. 10
Teat tube Air oiraulated by conmetioa 112140 Do.
149

I An qecified in the detail specification or teat method.

FED. TEST METMODS10. NO. 228

 I Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Method 4011
April14, 1967

OXYG~ PRESSURE TEST, INSULATION AND “SHEATH

L SCOPE pmmtitiok’&lI “k & in order that accu-
“ M This method is intendd for we in datsr- - + mdform heating ix Obbirwd in all pmrts
mining the eilect of eb?dui temipemulm and of tits sging chamber-: (1) The heated ●ir ‘elm!l
YP -W p-m on rubber and mbbar- be thoroughly oitwulated ●round the v-1 by
Itkeineullti one. nddleat haofinsuletadwiml means of mechanical agitatio~ (2) bxlka shall
and cabl~ .. be @ N mquimd to pmvwt local overheat-
2 SPECIMEN ing end dtwl epo@ and (1)) the preferred )oca-
2X The specimen ehall be es ckcribed in t.ion of the temperature cmntrol ehdl be ● dja-
) methods 8021 and 8031 or other method of W
mquimd for Wmninin gtbeemolmtof de.
-t
W
to the rvxoding thermometer.
A ~- for automatic tam.
~rioration, Q pemtnm control of the heating medium.
S? APPARATUS a=L7 A Wu#Jng &?wmmJder shall he
M The appustue ebdl be es follows : Ioeated m Uti @ting mectlum to moord the
Ul A* aqmt—pmmH AenbhOP ealsiet. actoal tern- during the w ‘lbfer-
kg of a- ruerd rml desqmed to tnktain m ably the thermometer bulb should & C1OW @ me
int?mnl atmoeplaera of oxygen undm uniformly pmmm cha+r but not touching iL If air
controlled prwrswe and ternpemtum u re- ia ueed n~ the~ting medium, an nctunI check
qui@ in 4.1. The size of the chamber shall of the ~mpemture shall be made by mmns of
be such that specimens trmy be suppended varti- masintum rding t herrnometexa placed in rxr.
cdly t.hemin without undue crowding and with- ious pw-ts of the ovm housing to ~erify the
Cut tow?!iingem+ other Cr :he s~&: Of ~h~ uniformity of heating.
chamber. Pmvieions shall be made for rapid &U3 Equipment for complete cumulation of
opening and closing of the ● pparatus for in- tlw heftting medium.
troduction snd removal of the spoimetL Two S&9 A ecmme of orygm under pmunwe.
suitable designs are shown in dguxu 4011A. 4. PROCEDURE
* and 4011B,. 4.1 Unleae otherwise rpecified in the detiil
\ S12 A VWMTWwge ktaohed to the cham- specification, the teet shall be carried out at u
brr for registering the plwamre. tempemture of 70”* 10 C. (158° *2o F.) and
&13 A atafetv wx.b, ●ttachh to the aging 8n oxypn pressure of 300=10 pmmde per
chamber, eet to rehme at appmxinmte]y. 500 equnm inch for n period of 94 houm = K hour.
pounds per square inch pmxsura 43 Unless otherwiso specified in the detail
8S.4 A 80?c?w of bat whi& M optio~l spedcntion, tensile etmngth ●nd elongation
shall be hned outside of the eging chamber ~ methods 8021 and S031 respectively, shrill ~
proper. be used to determine the dcteriorat ion of” the
3J5 Th ha$iw maum is optional but a insulation or sheath due to eging.
liquid medium is pmfemed becauBs of mom U After ● djusting the aging chamber to
rapid heat tmnsfer. the mquircd tempentum, the xpecimen ehal] be
CuaMOn. Spcial ~fety prwautions ●e -nded ~e~-lb in the *her which
necetswy if oil or other mmbustible organic At]] be cIared immediately and the oxygen
fluids am used as the henting medium becaum pmsum ●pplied At least 10 millibra of
of dutger of &e or ● xp)mion. When the de. apacity shnll be ●vmilnblc for each gmm of
uign shown in figure 4011A is used, the entire oridixnble material, The exposure period eld
chamber shall be immeti in the heating stnrt d the time the specimen is placed in the ~
mdium. If ●ir is @ the foIlowing e@al chamber and shall continue for the mqti

FED, TEST METHOD STD. MO. 228

I
 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

,, Mdbod 4011 . -.
‘: time ruder the required conditions withoat ridsinqgetl ImdarprmmdDos tllarBt90f
opening the veal. reationms ybecomo~npidia mmoq
4.4 At the and of th CIPOSUN! period, the particularly if ● large W1’faa@-is erpaod
pmwre in the ● ging chmnber shall be mlemd md very hii ~ms may &v&p. (km
●t ● S1OWsnd uniform rate, rquiring ●t M till be taken to ●oid the intmmktion of
6 fninutee for a comp)ete rekssc of the prt%sureL
This proredw is neremwy to smid posible ~R:s#~~m * ~.
fortnntion of porosity in the SpeciInem ‘W &l CdCUh* The kngs in We
specimw shall be remowd from the ● ging S@@& aloagsti~ or other ckmcMstk of
chambrr immediately ●fter the mlmse of tho the insulation or shsath of th inspedm unit
prexsuw and tkn ed aside on * flat surface to due to @rig, shall bo omlollkted u follows:
# for not 1- thnn 16 houm @ not mom
wts~.~ ‘=~ Xloo
than 9G hontn at room tempcmtun before t-
●re made.
*:
o-tM?@mS@MatBednthe~ a
L! At the ml o{ the rest period. unbs titb or ttw i—l—d— tit
O(Iwrwiw qwwi fkl in the detail qwiflcnt ion, s-the do% abtdnd a tboamd ~ =
4.!L trnsile strength ●nd akmgntion shall ba de- ahssthotrbstmmett-mtt
@mlinccl on the aged sperimen ns dmrribed in S4 Wnlea othewiae spwifbd In’& Al
methods 3021 and 3(x31, rqmctivrly. If ofhcr qwritktion, the number of 8peckM &@9d
propet[irn are rrquirfd, the specimen Shall be frnm emch inspection unit shrill be as mqmirtd
testd as desrrild in the sperilird meLII(d. in the method oft* 4% d for**
The snmc test shall bs conductod on agml mIKl the deterioration of tbe insulation or .hh~
wmgwi qmcirnens for ths purpose of comjmri- 53 The changs in ths chsm- of the
son in determining the degree of dcteriomtion insulation or shesth of tb. irwpdk @ M
of thp ngml nlnterinls. k mm ~lcd to the ?l*iltSSt one percent.’
4.6 A&quntr safety prmutiom shall he 5.4 1110 tmnpemtu~ prwmu~ Utci tltno of
tnkm when hcuting osidiznbie orgauic nmm- ●xpwum used shall b%%9codo&

FED, TEST METHODSTD. NO. 22t

2
 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Method 4011

I
I I

I
I
I SUDPL y
I I

I
i
I

J19QU 40UAL

FED. TEST METHODSTD. NO. 228

a
 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Method 4011

Hor L!QUfO JAcKE7

FIOUIU 4011B. Lend or other satisfacto~ ring @sket.

FED. TEST METHOD STD. NO, 228

4
 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Method 4021
. . . . . Aprit 14, 1%7

AIR PRESSURE TEST, INSULATION AND SHEATH

L SCOPE shown in figwe 4011A is used, the entire chain.
1.1 This methcd is intended for use in deter. her shall be immersed in the heating medium.
mining the tiect of elevati temperutum mid If air is uee& the following spcial precautions
air p-m on rnbber and rubbdike ineulw shall be taken in order that wxxn’ate, uniform
tion ●nd sheatha of ixunduted wim and cablw heating ia obtained in all parts of the aging
This teat is not recommended for oompands chamber: (1) The heated iir shall be thor-
that hare not been ~thd]y designed b oughly circulated around the vmse] by mwms of
witIMnntl elevnted tasnpenturea in w-k ruerhaltical egitatioq (9) * shall be used
Thete8tisssnaitive to small tempemtm -ria- M .wuimd to prevent kal overheating and
tions. deed qmt~ and (8) the preferred location of
Z SPECIMEN the tempamtnre oontrcd shall be ● djacent to the
21 The Bpeoimen ehall be as damibed in meording thennoaust.ir.
methods 8021 snd 8(XI1 or other method of &t S&8 A $brwBo-m#uto? for ●utumatic
required for determining the amount of deten- tcm~mtum cxmtsul of the hettting medium.
omtion, 4.2. 301.7 A ,wmw??w thmwv)wtcr shall be
& APPARATUS locstr+d in the heating medium to record the
W The appnmtus shall k es fallows: nctual tempemtu~ during the test. Preferably
S&l An dr-prwurc chamber consisting of the thermometer Indb should be close to the
● metal vmel designed to maintain m intern-l prvmure chamber but not touching i~ If air
●tmosphere of ●ir mm-k uniformly controlled is mwd es the heating mediurq an actual check
pressure and tenlperntum as reqIItJwl in 4.1. of tempemture shrill he made by menns of ]naxi -
The ai= of the chamber ah]] be such that the mum reading thermometers placed in various
qwcimens may b suspendd vertically therein parte of the oven housing LOveriiy the uni-
without undue crowding and without touching fomnity of heating.
earh other or the sides of the chamber. Pmwi- 3JA Equipment for positive rapid, and
aions shall be msde for mpid opening snd cb- compkta cumulation of heating medium,
ing of the sppnratus for introduction and re- &L9 A eourm of compressed air ( fme from
moval of specimens Two aitable designo are oils, dirg ruoistu~ etc.).
ehown in 6gures 4011A and 4011B. 4 PROCEDURE
UJl A pwasvm uaya attached to aging .U Unh otherwise specified in the detail
ebe.rober for registering the p-ra 8peei&ntiow the tast ahnll he carried out at a
W A 8u/dy rnl~, attached to chamber, tempuatumof U?**l” c (201°=2” F.), and
aet for mhae’ at approxixrmtely 200 pounds per ulairpraseun of 80=9 pounds per quam inch
qunre inch p~tlM. for a period of 20 hours= ~ hoar.
MA A aWIIVWot ‘kt which ie optiusud .42 Unk o*3wrDwises~ified in the detail
uhall h bated Outrndeof the aging chamber ai~ W ~gth end elongation
Pw- ~ sn@wde 8021 and 3031, mepectidy, shall
&LS Z% Adng snedum ia optimal but a be ueed to determine the deteriomtion of the
liquid medium is preferred because of mom imndation or shed dae to aging.
=pid heat tmnafer. U TAfter adjuating the aging chamber W
Ctrtrfk S@aI de~ precautions ●re :-h mqttimd tanpemtnm the qecimen ahd he
uemmmry if oil or other combustible organic mmpended vertically in the chamber which ehdl
fluids are wed as the heating medium hecnuse of be cbead immediately and air pressure applied.
danger of firm or erpbsion. When the (kign At least 100 mil.lilitem of capacity ehnll be

i ?EO. 7Efi METHOD STD, 80.228

 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

M@hod m
●vaihhlo inthscbnhe rfordgrun of oxi-
d@ble mtdaL The --.rmlm P&d shall
8tart8t tkatime theqw&nan i8plaoodin thd
ohunbe+r and till ccntinue for tho rqui.md
time under the requirul conditions without
Opeuling the vmeld.

,,1

-W U

4A At the end of the exposure pui~ b

P~ intheaging chunb8r8hall bel’al&eed
at s slow ad uniform rate, requiring St hsst
4 mirmtM fors complete ddase of the Prnurw :.
.
ma woodlro ie &msam to woid-poaibls
ie--tion of poroui~ in ~he apechmk ‘2%. ?.
““--
Bpaciwn &all be removed fmn the aging
chunbsr immadktaly cfter the A- of tb
P~ uidthen sotuideonsflateto
*fornot 1uthmn16hcmm and* mom
than 98 how ~t room tampamtura bafora ta@a
are made.
GAttheand of thereutperiod, uab
otherwb cpecihd in the detail speci&doD, 6DRESULTS ‘
taruile strcn@h snd dO~tiOII ahdl bo deter- &l Cdcd8tJoa The ehmge iu tuuih
mined on the aged specimen ao d-bed in ti dong8ticq or dher characteristic of
methods 8021 and S031 rwpecthly. If other the inmhtion or bn.th of the impeetion unit
pmpdeu ue rquimd tlw qecimen shall be due to aging shall be ca)cuhtcd as follows :

FED. TEST UE71100 $70. MO. 24

2
 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Method 40ZI

Chnagela Chamctsrlmlc! perceat= J&wlo from euh inspction nnit shall be as required in
the method of teat 42 used for determining the
Wlwlw:
o=~e val~e obtilned on tbe nal~ ~Uk~On Or deterioration of the insulation or sheuth.
sheetb of the lnmectloa unlt~ 53 The change in the cka.cteristic of the
B= tie v~~ue ob~lo~ on the sged WOhtbll Or
insulation or sheath of the inspection unit ahnll
sheath 0! the lnepectlon uolt t he recorded to the nearest one percent.
6.2 Unless otherwise specified in the detail 5.4 The temperatum, pr=mre, and time of
specibtion, the number of spaimens tastad exposure used shall be recorded.

FED, TEST METHOD S’70. NO. 224

 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Method 4031
*d 14, 1%7
I
AIR OVEN TEST, INSULATION AND SHEATH
L SCOPE heating medium to recmd tbe actual @ng tem-
Ll This method ie intended for uee in deter- pemtum in. v8rioue @a of the oren.
mining the effect of elevated tempemtmu ~d M Liqtid ass hectiog medium.
tir It normal dm+eric preunme on m.dhr 3JLl Avpwtw omployinq u U@d bating
and rubber-like ineuhtion and sheathe of insu- sdhun consisting of Bweml smd ● ging con-
lstad wire and mlk tb uubmerged in ● thermo9t9tic811y-con-
Z SPECIMEN trolled liquid U The equipment shown in
Z1 The specimen ahdl be m described in 5gure 4031 has beuI found suibblo for the
mcthodn 8021 ●nd 8(IB1or other method of uw P-
required for de@rmMng the mnount of * ~ A &CtiO?l Of tk buth SboWiXig OIM
terioratiq a. @q -+= ia sbom in figure 40S1. The
3. APPARATUS
W The qlpamtn, till be s, follows :
SJJ The equipment listed in 8A! may he IT
tuml where air ie amployed m the heating me-
dium. Appwatus in S3 mny be used where the
heating medium consists of a liquid bath,
M Air na L h-ting medium.
8-21 A okdatkg uiT own with pmtions
for suspending spcimens without crowding ad
without touching eecb other or the sides of the
Ovcrl. ‘ilne volume ehoul(i *be not km thnn
19x12x12h~umdntimm~WxWx~
ineben.
W A ML= of -, which is optiona~
shall be louted outide of tbe 8ging chambu
Properg
W A t~gulutor for ●tomtic tmn-
pexmtum control of the hdng medium
PWL -
M.4 E@#ipnWt #w olnnplcto o$’m&&m
of the heating medium * u to keep the tan- oontier oonsks of s nickel-platad brase cyl-
pemture of the sir tbroughcut the omn within inder ~ inti in diameter and”8% _ high
=10 C. (2° F.). The foUowing pmuutione with s cover which reota on ● flange ineide the
8haUbetaken: (u) Ifamotordri?enfan iaG cylinder about !2incha from the top. The epnca
theurin thaoven shall notmmeinoontaot ●bove the oovar ti !Uled with thermal insulating
with the f8n motor-hmsb d-rge beuuse of matorid Cumulation of air ie by convecticm
danger of 060ne forrnstion, (b) Mle8 shall he threughs ~-inch inside dkmeter tube mounted
wed as mquimd to pmwent local overheating in the metal cover. One of the tubee extends to
●nd dead ~ snd (c) the thermostatic con- within about ~ inch of the bottom of the eon-
tmd ohall be eo k8tad M to give ●ccurate tun- tsinerand tlmothera_akut6 inchrn
paratura control of the he8ting medium. The dxwe the cover. l%a Mar tube is insulstad
preferred location ie adjacant to the moording with ml’k
thermometer, 8S3 A & or otkr Ibid MA ~apable
W Reroding thmnmwtzw 1- in the of holding several submerged specimen con-
 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

bMhod 4021 .-
ti ad apipped with an sutomatic tbermo- kiner~dmt aside oaaflatmmfaoeto-for
datic oontml end means for obtaining a uni- not k than 16 houm and not mom k X
form temperature in all parts of the bath The houn&tmomt8!nper8tu* befom@steamcon-
tempatum of the air at the specimen will be duotd
●pProximatdy &5’ C. ( 1“ F.) bdOW that of 45 Attheend of themst@~nnleee
the liquid bath The bath is quippd with s otherwise speci&d in the detail @&
cover antaining about 1 inch of therms.1 id- tansi]e atmngth and dOt@im ahdl be d4ar-
●dsting material. Several aging eontainem m ini.ned ontheaged ~imenaedtibed in
fittad into the bath with the top being flush with methods WU and $(X3L If other propertk ●m
the cover of the bath required the specimen shall be tinted as de-
3S4 Mem ior 8u~]vmdim7 t?te Rpeekna emibedi nthea#6edl netho& The-t#st
vetiieally m the aging container svitlmut toudk- AaIlbeo onductedo nsgedandu nagedapaoi-
ing each other or the sides of the contiiner. mensfor thepurpae ofoomparkn indetar-
This can be aocompliahed by fastening hooks to mining the d-of detariorstion of the qd
the undemide of the cover. matarisl
4. PROCEDURE & RISSULT’S
4J Unks otkmriae specified in the detail lufklcallWnL Tha&ngeilltaneUs
specification, the ~ shall be cnrried out ●t s
8t_ elongation or other &mctarW “ .C of
tanpsratum of 70°=10 C (158°=20 F.) for s
the insulation or +aath of tha inqaAkn unit
period of 166 houm= 1 hour.
42 Unlese otherwise specified in the detail due to aging shall be cdoulated aafdlowa:
spdcation, tensile strength and elongation change In aaracterim% P-t4~—Xlw
tes@ methods 8021 and S081 respectively, ekdl Wk!re :
be used to det.mnine the det.erkrttion of the in- O.* ~loe ~la 00 * ~ xtion or
sulation or sheath due to aging. Sbath of the llupecuoo mlt
z.me Tame nbtahul eo * eawll blmoa or
43 After adjusting the aging container to 8tNouIiuthel~wlt
the required temperuLur~ the specimen simii ‘im u T.7ukl otherwise qa@atl in the datail
suspended vertically and the rmnteiner obad
epecidcatim the number of qmcimeaa _
immedistdy. At least 10 milliliter of cspacity
from each inspctiou unit ehnll b u required in
shall be ●vailable in the container for each gmm
of oxidizable material. The expocure period thematlmdo f~4&umdfor dm@n@ng the
shall start at the time the specimen is placed in deterioration 0{ the inauletion or sheath
the aging container and shs]l continue for the 63 Theohange incbeobere&cofthe
required time under the rwquired conditions insulation or she8th of the inspection unit shall
without opening the container. rerecorded tothewrwtlpelwmt-
44 At &e end of the axpoaum psri~ the 6A l!hatam~—dtimeof=poanm
speoimen ahdl be remored from the aging oon- Ileeddaallb
sreiorad

FED. TEST UETHOD STR NO. 22$

2
 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Method 4041
.@il 14, 1%7

TEST TUBE HEAT-AGING, INSULATION AND SHEATH

1. SCOPE 3.L4 Equipment for rapid circulation of the
1.1 This method is intended for use in deter- liquid heating medium if used so as to keep the
mining the effect of high temperatures and a temperature throughout the liquid within A 1°
controlled circulation of air on rubber and rub- C. (2° F.).
ber-like insulation and sheaths of insulated wire 3.13 Recor&q themnometera to record the
and cable. The selection of suitable periods of temperature in various parts of the heating me-
aging depend upon the rate of deterioration of dium during the ted.
the particular compound being tested Tem- 4. PROCEDURE
peratures that hcve been used vary from 120° C. 4.1 Unless otherwise specified in the detail
to 149° C. (250” ti 300° F.). Exposure perioda specification, the test shall be carried out at a
frequently used are 10,20,40,70, and 166 hours. temperature of 120° * 1“ C. (248° =2° l?.) for
In any case the conditions selected should be a period of 20 hourae ~4 hour.
such that the deterioration will not be so great $2 Unless otherwise specified in the detail
as to prevent the determination of the final specification, tensile strength and elongation
physical properties. tests, methods 3021 and 3031, respectively, shall
2. SPECIMEN be used to determine the deterioration of the in-
2.1 The specimen shall be as described in sulation or sheath, due to aging.
methods 3021 and 3031 or other method of test 43 After the temperature of the heating
required for determining the amount of det.a- medium has been adjusted, the test tube con-
rioration, 4.2. taining the specimen shall be p!m.ed in the
3. APPARATUS medium so that the lip of the tube does not ex-
2.1 Tine fipparah dud ‘buus fvlbws: tend more ihnn 2 iuull- AOV6 thi? Siiif&C6 Of t!36
medium. Not more thrm three specimens shall
3.1.1 An aluminum or gba teat tube 38 be placed in one t.eet tube nnd all specimens. in
for holding the specimens. The test tube shall orm tube shall be from a single compound. The
be provided with a cork stopper fitted with two exposure period shrill start at the time the teat
glass tubes 9*0.6 millimeters in outaide diam- tube, containing the specimen, is placed in the
eter and a wall thickness of 1.0 millimeter. The heating medium and shrill continue for the re-
inlet tube shall extand 4$$ inche above the top quired time under the required conditions with-
of the stopper and to within ~ inch of the out opening or removing the tube.
bottom of the teat tube. The outlet tube shall 4.4 At the end of the exposure period the
extend 12 inches above the top of the tipper specimen shall be removed from the tube and
and the lower opaning of the tube shall extend set side on n flat surface to rest for not 1sss than
l% inch- below the bottom surface of the 16 houm and not more than 96 hours at room
8t0pper. tanperature before tests are conducted.
3.L2 Provisions for vertically euapending 4.5 At the end of the met period, unless
the apecimem as near the bottom of the t.4st tube otherwisa specified in the detnil specificatio~
an possible without touohing each other or the tensile strength and elongation shall be deter-
sides or bottom of the tube. mined of the aged specimen as described in
3.13 A &md bath or othur apparatua as an methods 3021 and 3031. If other properties
aJuminum block equipped with thermostatic are required, the specimen shall be tested as
control which will control the temperature dmribed in the specified method. The same
within * 1° C. (2° F.) of the required t8m- test ahail be conducted on aged and unaged
peratureh specimens for the purpose of comparison in

FED. TEST METHOD STD. NO. 223

 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Method 4041

estimating the degree of deterioration of the E-the vaIue obtained on tbe aced bulatlon or
aged mntcrhd. sheath of tbe i~oo unit

5. RESULTS 5.2 Unless otherwise specified in the detail

5.1 Calculation. The change in tensile specification, the number of specimens tested
strength, elongnt.ion or other charactmistic of from each inspection unit shall be as required
the insulation or sheath of the inspection unit in the method of test, 4.2 used for determining
dlw to aging shall be cnlcu]ated as follows: the deterioration of the insulation or sheath.
O–E
53 The change in the characteristic of the
CbIInge 10 characteristic, percent= ~xloo insuhttion or sheath of the inspection unit shall
where: be recorded to the nearest one percent.
O=tbe value obtained on tbe uaati insulation or 5.4 The temperature and time of exposure
#beatb of the LnepecUon unit, used shall be recorded.

FED. TEST METHOD ST1l. NO. 220

 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Method 4111
April 14, 1967

RESL?$TANCETO OZONE, INSULATION AND SHEATH

1. SCOPE without twisting. The diameter of the man-
1.1 This method is intended for use in deter- drel shall be G=0.5 times the outm diwneter of
mining the resistance of rubber and rubber-like the wire or cabl~
insulation and sheaths to ozone attack which 2.4 In the case of fkt twin cable, the minor
mny ho encountered in connection with the op diame~r shall be used in uriving at the ah
eratiun of high-voltage cable. of the mandreL
2. SPECIMEN 2.5 Two specimens shall be prepared from
21 Each specimen shell consist of a piece of each inspection unit One specimen shall be
the insulation or sheath from the inspection prepared m described in either 2.2 or 2.3, as re-
unit t~~kennt least 5 feet from the end of the coil quired. The other specimen shall be prepared
or reel of wire or oable. The length of the in the same way but bent in the reveme dl-
specimen necessary for test will depend on the tion.
diameter of the wire or cabla The specimen 3. APPARATUS AND REAGENTS
shall not include any tapes or cuter cmwrings 3.1 The apparatus and reaganta shall be w
except when n tripe or sheath lms been applied follows:
directly over the insulation prior to and left in 3.1.1 A suitnble appnratus for ozone resist-
place during vulcanization. ance test is shown assembled in figure 4111.
2.2 11’hen the over-all dinrneter of the wire All connections for parts of the apparatus
or cable is less than 1 inch, the specimen shall carrying ozonized air ihould be of ozone-r-
be bent nt room temperature through an nngle cf esisting materials. The apparatus wmsists es-
3800 nrnllnrl a mandrel, without twisting. The scnt inn v of the following parts.
diameter of the mandrel shrill be 4 =0.5 times 3.1.1.1 .1 n air pump or compressed air
the outside dinmeter of the wire or cable. The supply for circulating air through the test
two ends of the piece shall be tightly clumped chamber.
to the mandrel to prevent any movement of the 3.1.1.2 An air drkr consisting of 500-mL gas
\ bent section during the tesk washing bottles filled to about 30 percant of ca-
k\ 23 When the over-all diameter of the wire pacity with sulfuric aci~ sp. gr. 1.83, connected
or cable is 1 inch snd greater, the specimen in series with a drier containing anhydroua cal-
shall be bent at room temperature through an cium chloride or other suitile desiccan~
angle of not less than 180° around a mandrel 3.1.13 A moidure indicator wnsisting of a

E%uax al.

FED. TEST METHOD S10, NO, 218

[
 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Method 4111

U-tube hygrometer containing anhydrous cop- &L4 &.an&rd W&m thi08dfat# Bollbtiom
per aulfah &Ls Pota8abn idide, 1 parcent mlution
%1.1.4 A 0darat4d @lo mder having 8 S.L6 Acetio acid, 10 percent 00h1tiOIL
capacity of St least 25 cu. k per hour, for mw 4. PROCEDURE
uring the rata of flow of air through the sys- 4.1 Preparation and standardization of
tan. eolutiorw-’l%e solutions shall be prepared
3.1L5 J Qenera.tor forozonizing the air con- rmd shndardized as follows:
aista of two mncentnc eJectrod~ separated by 4.I.I Sta~h indicator uolutiom A fresh
a thin glaee dielectric, between which voltage is solution may be prepared for use each day by
applied. The generator is supplied by a po- dissolving 1 gram of soluble starch in 100 mL
tential transformer equipped with variable of boiling distilled water. A solution that may
voltage eont.rol of 20 to 30 kilovolt rating. be used for several daya shall be prepared by
3.1.1.6 An aging chumhw of ozone-resisting mixing 1 gram of soluble starch with 40 mL
material and of sufficient sti to accommodate of cold dist.iIled water, boiling until solution is
the largest speeimen to be tested. A chamber complete, diluting to about i!OOmL with cold
of about 18 to 20 inches in height with ● capac- water and adding 2 grams of zinc chlorida TIM
ity of from 2,OOO h 5,000 cubic inches is solution shall be set aside for several houra and
usually required. A convenient form of cham- then decanted.
ber is a glass jar with cover which permits eaey 4.12 Iodina - ~olution. A weighing bottle
access to the interior and allows inspection of containing 9 gmms of potassium iodide and 10
the specimen without opening the chamber, grams of distilled water ahail be weighed nnd
The chamber is equipped with a mineral wool then about 0,1 gmm of reagent grade iodiie
filter placed between two perforatd grills near cryatala added to the solution on the balana
the bottom. The ozcmized air is led from the The solution shall be accurately weighd to de.
generator to u space below the lilter. If an air. termine the amount of iodine added. The solu-
conditioned room is not available, the tempera- tion shall then be accuxataly transferred to ●
ture of the chamber may be controlled by im- volumetric flask and the volume made to 1 liter
mersing it in a water bath with accumtely con- with distilled watar. The solution should be
trolled temperature. A thermometer is placed stored in n dark bottle in a cod, dark plain
in the chamber with the bulb as near the speci- 4.LS Sodhwn thiom+lfate aoldon, A ~
men as possible. The chamber is equipped with dium thioeulfab solution of appronmately tha
a two-way stopcock, one acting as a discharge same strength aa the iodine solution shall be
ta the outside and the other as a bypass. prepared by dissolving ox gram of reagen~
3.L1.7 A mawrnetcr for measuring the grade sodium thioaulfate (Na,StO,.5H,0) in
prwure is connected ta the outl@ pipe of the distilled water and diluting to 1 liter. The
aging chnmber, solution shall be standardized against the iodine
3.LL8 A mnpling both for collecting s solution. Since the eolution gradually lotma its
specimen for the detm-mination of oaone con- streng@ the strength of this solution shall be
centration is connected to the outlet tube of the checked against the iodine solution at frequent
chamber, intervals. The atrvmgth of the thiosulfate. aolu.
tion shall be calculated as foIlows:
S&l.9 A &@&. gae cobatdnq burette ie
oonnected through a two-way stopcock to the ,-FXO
. T
sampling bottle. A 500-mL aspirator bottle is where :
connected to the gas burette by meana of rub- E=the kxllne aqulvalent of sodium thiaedfate es.
ber tubing. preaeed ● S mg. of iodine pw ml, of N-
3.12 Starch indicator solution. ~=~e n~~r Of ml- of the l~dlne ~l~tlon
C==the wmentratlon of the iodine In mg. per mL
3.13 Standan.i iodine uolution, 100 mg. per
S=the number of ml. of eodlum thloeulfate ueed to
liter. titrate the solution

FED. TEST METHOD STD. NO. 220

2
 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Methed 4111

42 Determination of ozone concentra- of 25°220 C. (77°*40 F.) and an ozone con.

tion. TIAeozone sampling bottle containing 100 centration of not less than 0.015 percent by
ml. ok the 1-percent potassium iodine solution volume,
acidulated with a few drops of acetic acid shall 43.2 Air shall be paased through the test
be connected to th~ gas burette and the two-way apparatus at a constant rate of flow for at least
stopcock from the test clmmber as shown in 15 minutes prior to inserting the specimen, The
figure 4111. The two-wny stopcock on the flow of gas shrill be ndjusted to between 10 and
burette shall be opened to the air and the burette 20 cubic feet per hour as measured on the flow
filled with water to the mark by lifting the meter. The manometer shall indicah a slight
aspirator bottle. The stopcock shall be closed pressure of approximately ~ inch of watmr
to the air and opened b the sampling bottl~ and above atm~pheric pressure in the test chamber.
the sampling cock on the test chamber opened. “>e pressure maybe controlled by the degree of
The aspirator bottle shall be lowered until the closure of the discharge stopcock. The voltsgs
burette is emptied. At this poin~ 500 ml. of the of the ozone generator shall be regulated so as to
gas will have bubbled through the potassium gives concentration of owne as require& The
iodide solution. The atopwck shall then be azone concentration shall be checked as da-
oloeed and the bottle removed, a few drops of soribed in 4.2. The temperature of the air in
starch indicator added and the solution titrated the tezt chamber shall be regulated ns require~
with standard sodium thiosulfate solution. When constant conditions are obta.ned, the
Since 1 mg. of iodine is equivalent to 0.1 ml. of specimen free from mechanical damage shall be
ozone at room temperature and pressure (within bent, inserted in the test chamber, and exposed
the accuracy of this method of analysis at room for the required period of time, At the end of
temperature and pteasurs) the osone may be the exposure period, the specimen shall be
calculated as follows: O =EX 0.1, where O is examined for cnmking.
the mm-her of ml, of ozone at room temperature 43.3 Flat twin cable shall be bent on the
and pmasure equivaien~ Loi d. of Wdiuui t.thO- minor axis U1i~ c~--bec~iuu udj”.
sulfate solution used, and E is the iodine equiv- & RESULTS
alent of sodium thiosulfate expmesed as mg. of 5J Unless otherwise specified in the detail
iodine per ml. of thiosulfate. The percent of specification, two specimens from each inspec-
tion unit shall be tested.
~e=~ x IN, where S is the number of 5&2 The ozone resistance of the insulation or
ml. of thiosulfste used to titrate the solution and sheath of the inspection unit shall be the rssulte
M is the number of ml, of the sample co~lected. obtained from the specimeng’ tested.
43 Testing of rubber specimen. 53 Any cracking or other damage of the
4~J Unless otherwise speci6ed in the detail insulation or sheath shall be recorded.
specification, the test shall be carried out using 5.4 The ozone eoncent mtion temperature
m exposure period of 3 houm at a temparaturs and time of exposure shall be recorded.

FED, TEST METHOD STD. NO. 228

 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Method 4131
April 14, 1967

RESISTANCE TO LIGHT, INSULATION AND SHEATH

1. SCOPE &Id Unless otherwise specified in the detd
1.1 This method is intended for use in deter- specification, the am shall be surrounded by
minlug the comparative resistance of robber Corcx D flltera or other enclosure having
and rubber-like insulation and sheaths of ineu- quivalent absorbing and transmitting proper-
lated wire and cable to deterioration when ex- ties. Ead~ Corex D panel shall be %4 to %6
posed to light having a frequency range np- inch in thickness. Filters shall be replaced
proximnting that of sunlight but having a after 800 hours of service.
grwter intensity in the ultra-violet range than 3S3 A cylind+xd rotating fnzvnewcmk

sunlight. The method is not applicable to hard designed to carry specimen helders in such a
or semihard robbers. The deterioration result- way that the surface of the specimens are 18%
ing from the exposure is determined by ob- inches *IA inch from the center of the arc. The
serving the nature and degree of cracking and frame work shall rotate around the arc at a
checking and by comparing the tensile atmngth uniform speed of one complete revolution every
and elongation of the exposed specimen with 2 hours.
that of unexposed specimen taken from the same 3.1.4 Spem”nwn holder suitnble for mount-
piece of mnterinl. The specimen is expwd in ing tlie specimen verticnlly while it is rotated
.tQestretched condition. The quantity of rndia- about tile carbon arc to provide uniform dis-
tiOn to which the specimen is exposed is meu- tribution of light, The holders shall be de-
sured by means of the decomposition of uranyl signed ta accommodate either one specimen 2
oxalate solution. by 6 inches or two specimens each 1 by 6 inches
2. SPECIMEN in size and to stretch them to nny elongation
2.1 The specimen shall be a piece of the in- up to 20 pcrcento A suitable holder is shown
Sulst.ion or !&ath tah frwn the inq?w!i or. iii figure WM.
uni~ It shall be not lass than % inch in width 3.1.S A cylindrical d~m of corrosion-
and 6 inches in length, and shall be buffed to resisting material for enclosing the lamps and
a uniform thickness of 0.35 Y 0.005 inch, If the framework. The cylinder shall be equipped
size of the insulation ia too small to permit prep- with a protective cover for shielding the opera-
aration ofs specimen of the above dimensions, tor from radiation from the nrc, and overflow
a tube specimen six inches in length maybe used. for carrying away the water from a spray, and
3. APPARATUS AND REGEANTS n sliding door to permit access to the specimens.
W The appm-atus and reagents shall be as 3.1.6 .4 fresh water nvray no2de mounted
follows : inside the cylindrical drum in such n position
3.1.1 A 2i9ht wwce consisting of a vertical that each specimen will be exposed to n complete
ventilated, flaming carbon arc designed to ac- wetting throughout its length one time during
commodate two or three pairs of carbons, num- onch revolution of the framework. Each noz-
ber.22 upper and number 13 lower; the arc to zle shall be adjusted so m not to strike the Corex
bum between only one pair of carbons at a time. D filters and to deliver between l% and 2 gal-
The carbons shall be of the cored type sunshine lons of water per hour. The water shall lM
carbons (of the National Carbon Company or maintained between 10° and 25”C. (50° and
qual ) designed to duplicate as closely as pos- 77°F. ) during the test.
sible the spectral distribution of sunlight. The 3.1.7 An ezhau.@ ,fam for effective y venti-
arc shall operate on 60 amperes and 50 volts lating the arc, with a capacity of 100a 20 cubic
ncross the arc on altexmating current or on 50 fept per minute.
nmperes and 60 volts across the nrc on direct 3.1.8 A thermometer for determining the
current. temperature of the air at the position of the

FED, TEST METHOD STD. HO. 228

 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Method 4131

I-,esd
I I l-t-”-
II

U--)--&
I

L
\ J

C.ao—
-L
?
SW

FXOUU 41NA. Rubber holder for Hebt axtnz All ~rts exc-mt rods to k made of aluminum. Rods to be made
‘of mod. -

specimen in the drum. The bulb Qf the ther- taining the current of the arc approximately
momet.ar shall be shielded by a cylinder of c-onatanL The equipment shall include s con-
bright metal foil 2 inches in diametar and 2 stant voltage regulator to maintain the input
inches in lengtL voltage at 220=1 volt. It shall also contdu
3.19 A uuita~k frumework, complete with a push-button station for starting and stopping
oablea, pulleys, and counterweights for raising the unit, interlocked with the main line cxm-
the lamp for inspection and repkement of car- taetor to insure complete electrical isolation of
bons. the am equipment when changing ohms or
3.L1O Electrical control equipment for au- working on the interior mechanism of the lamp.
tomatic operation of the entire unit and main- 3.1.11 A cell of transparent fused quartz for

FED. TEST METHOD S70, NO. 228

2
 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Method
U81

4 mtoclmum!l
u PlqMMionl 8torwfad di8puhw
of da ~ 90hltiO~ 8.L14 and 8.L15,
mRy be ~~ in OdiM~ difkd ligh~
UI AU R pottasiumprmsnpmte Bolu-
tioa Sha be prepw’ed by dbolviag 8.16 g’mms
Ofresgerlt gmdeindistilled wdarand making
the mdume b 1 liter. The Dolution ddl be
wtssideforl mdinc&kplscs thm Wrod
qcwtiglu~h~ndtiti
hlcgbtippered boulepmtcda dfrtlmthe
l@&?y&haqooding of bM@nL
wl’lta~ solution shall be
plupall)d by didtig 640 gr8ms of Teqent
@a hydmtad OXdiO aoid (H,(&O, ● 9H,0) or
4.80 grams Of snhydrtms oxdio aoid (IWO,)
=P-* the ●tinometar 00h1tion to the radi8- and4.90gXWr@ofresgwXtg18&my18ulplWta
tion fmm rho m of the desiga uid dinmsions
ShOWI) in iigm 4181B.
(uOwso.
“azo) illdistilled wstarand dihtad
U3.2 A * for anclosing the cell uoept
for tha faca which in expoeed to the light being
melm’eld. The exposed Crom-motiod - of
theoell ahdlbemeauured withui~ of
●tleult=lpamrtk ‘rheiddeoftheold
holder shall be completely cxwered with s dull,
black enamel paink The holder shall be de-
signed to take the ph~ . UA-
.4 “ .S{m-
or..- -. ho!d?r
andsooomtructa dthatth ooultarofthmodl
ocoupiw the- mlatire horixmtal pociti= u
b canter of 8 rubber 8pecimn.
SS.13 A ~~m~
4181c.
&L14 Rodiation adbWm4w dutio%

&Lls &uzuan#wkdoR
I t

hvnu81a Inummot d19u—mbwut9—

●
uBehkttt7p& *

FED, TEST METMODSTD. NO. =8

9
 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Method 4181 --
to 1 littr. The solution shall be stored in ● glaa oall shall be hnroedktel~ placed in the holder
stoppemd bottle paintd with s heavy ooat of to p!lwant axpoaum of b dutioo to light.
black paint to protact the solution frmn light. The all holder shall be mounted 00 the cylin-
An mwtnstic dispensing burette shown in 6g- drical rotating framework in the 4ighting unit
um 4xMB when heavily coated wi~ black paint in s similar position as that of ● rubber speci-
to exclude light in euitable for storing and dia- men holder. The ‘solution shall be expomd to
- the 60]utio~ the @ht under ZIO~] opmting con(htiona for
4.2 Stuuk.rdization of aolutio~ The s suitable period of tinm The time of azpoeure
evaluating solution (potamium permanganste) of the actinometer eolutiou shall be eu6eient to
shall be standardized against ~nt grade dacompom not k than 10 pemant nor more
eodium oxalsta in the usual wsy, with such pre- than 60 pemant of the oxalic acid in the call.
cautions that its etmngth ahnll be known within At the end of the expoeum peri~ the actinom-
an socumcy of ●t J- =1 pement, The ebzr solution shall b transferred fmm the mll
stmngtb of the potamium pernmnganata shall to ● 200-mL beaker and then titmted with the
be expmaed in terms of miuigrama of anhy- -~ ~ e~l-=lution ss
droua oxalic tcid per mL of solution. The B&L deecribed in 4.% The quantity of the evaiuab
nometer solution hall be titrated against the ing BoMion ~aimd for the titmtioa till he
Andard potaaaium permanganate, An accu- d~gnated as V,. A rolume of the adwmeter
rately measured volume of 50 milliliters of the acdution qua] to that used in the ~ OeU
actinometer solution shall be transferred to a shall be titmti under the ~tditions,
tall form 200-milliliter beaker, 20 to 25 milli- cnmtting & expouure to iigh~ and Qlmquantity
Iibm of distilled vmt.cr addc~ and the solution af parmangarmte solution mquimd fomthe titm-
acid&d with 5 milliliters of 1 to 3 sulf uric acid. tionrwordedu T’* T&qWlt@ofoZalic
The beaker elmll be covered with ● porcelain ●cid in reg., Q, decompcA by the ndiat.ion is
dish a~ld the solution heated to 95° C. (203° F,) giren in the quutiun Q-u ( VFVJ ‘ivhem a
b ● light-proof water ba~ tranafermd to an is the number of mg. of oxalic aoid quivalent
o-pen glare water bnth and maidabecl at t~b to 1 ml, of evaluating dutiou. The qunnuty
tarnpemtum while -g on ● fla~ whita-glas ordoaageofdiatknie~aa Q/A and
ham The solution shall be clearly aeon by lighl the intanaity of Mdiation U Q/At where A is
from the glam”baae illuminated by a Wnylight” the~ofthe~inquam~md t
lamp. The hot eolution shall be titmted v@th iathetimeofeqmmiu~
the tindard potsmium permanganate eTsluat- 44 Expomm of Spedmea
ing solution from a dispensing bumtta while 4.44 Unka ~ specibi in the de.
stiming constantly until ●n orangs color is ob- tail qmcifidon, fhe total doeagu of radiation
tained which pemiste for at least 80 eeconds shall be lJ6XllP rug, perquam docimoter with
while stirring. The titration shall be conducted ● pine or minus tohmaoe of 9 pertark Ap
in such ● way that the ?ohun~ of solution used P maimat+ 60 houm axpoaum should b d-
am precim to within *0.05 milliliter, ciant for thin donge.
4d Calibration of radiation. The in- 442 Unleaaotherwiae spededinthedetail
tanaityof radiation of the light shall be m- eti~ tile S&U@ and dongation
umd in tame of the milligmms of oxalic acid ~rnothode 8021aad 6061, andthenatum
&ompaed per square decimetar per minut+ and degree of emaking and checking, L4.5, shall
and the quantit~ of mliation in any given pe- be used to detarmiue the detariomtion of the
riod of time ehall be measured in terms of the matarial due to aging.
milligrams of oxalic acid decomposed per equam 4AS UnI~ otherwiaa specided in the ded
decimeter. An accumtely meazured volume of epecidcatio~ the ~ mounted in the
the actinome&r solution shall be tmnsferred to holder, shall be etmtched to an elongation of
the quatiz mll from t dispensing bmwt.t~ The 10pament within 8bouraaft4rit haa k

FED. TEST METHOD STD. NO. 228

4
 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Method 4131
buffed. The specimen shall be held in the be determined of the specimen as described in
stretched position for 16 to 24 hours at a tam- methods 3021 and 3031. If other properties am
peruture of 38° = 1“ C. (100° =2° F.) to aid in required the specimen shall be tested ~ de-
the blooming of the protective waxea. scribed in the specified method. The same
4.4.4 Within 1 hour after the precondition- physical tests shall be conducted on aged and
ing period, the stretched specimen mounted in unaged sp.ximens for the purpose of compari-
the holder shrdl be placed in the aging container son in debrmining tho degree of deterioration
in such a position as to receive full mdktion of the aged mat..arial. The dimensions of the
from the arc. It shall be exposed to the light specimens for use in calculating the tensile
until the total exposure is equivalent to that strength and elongation shall be determined
required to decompose the specified quantity after exposure.
of oxalic acid (4.4,1). At least one xneaswe- 5. RESULTS
ment of intensity of radiation shall be made, as 5.1 Calculation. The change in tensile
described in 4.3, at the start end the end of each strengt& elcmgation or other charactariatic of
exposure and at intervals of not more than the insulation or sheath of the inspection unit
24 hours during the period of exposure. The due to aging shall be calculated as follows:
temperature of the air in the vicinity of the o-E
specimen shall be maintained at 45° A 5° C. Change In charscterlstlc, percent=~x lW
——
(113” = 9° F.) during the exposure period, by where:
controlling the temperature of the room and the O=the valoe obtnlned on the unnged insolation or
ventilation of the space surrounding the speci- sheath of the Inepedon unit
E=the value obtained on the nged Insulation or
men. The filters or other enclosure shall be
sheath of the lnspmtlon unit
cleaned at least once every 24 hours during the
exposure period. 6.2 Unless otherwise specfied in the detail
4.4.5 .\tthe end of the exposilre period, the spezificntion, the number of specimens tested
hnldw with specimen shall be removed and the from each inspection unit shidl be as required
specimen examined immediately by means of m the method of kit, 4.4.2, used for determin-
binocular microscope for cracking and check- ing the deterioration of the insulation or
ing. The specimen shall be removed from the sheuth.
holder and set aside on s flat surfaoe to rest for 5.3 The change in the characteristic of the
not less than 16 hours nor more than 96 hours Cumulation or aheith of the inspection unit shall
at room tern pemture before physical tests are be recorded to the nearest 1 percent.
made. 5.4 by cracking or checking of the ma-
4.4.6 At the end of the rest period, unless terial of the inspection unit shall be recorded.
otherwise specified in the detail apecfication, 55 The dosage and the elon@ion used for
4.4.2, tensile strength and elongation ahdl alao stretching of the specimen shall be recorded.

FED. TEST METHOD STD. NO. 220

 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Method 41s1

buffed. The specimen shall be held in the be detmnined of the specimen as deaoribed in
stretched position for 16 to 24 hours St s tam- methods 3021 and 3031. If other properties Bm
pemtum of 38” * 1° C. (100° *2’ F.) to aid in required the specimen shall be tested as d-
the blooming of the protective waxes. scribed in the specified method. The same
4.4.4 Within 1 hour after the precondition- physical &ts shall be conducted on aged nnd
ing period, the stretched specimen mountsd in unaged specimens for the purpose of compari-
the holder shall be plnced in the aging container son in determining the degree of deterioration
in such a position as to receive full mdintion of the aged material, The dimensions of the
from the arc. It shall be exposed to the light specimens for use in calculating the tensile
until the total exposure is equivalent to that strength and elongation shall & determined
required to decompose the specified quantity after exposure.
of oxalic acid (4.4. I ), At least one measure- 5. RESULTS
ment of intensity of radiation shall be made, se 5.1 Calculation. The change in tensile
described in 4.3, at the start and the end of each stren~ elongation or other characteristic of
exposure and at intervals of not mom than the insulation or abed of the inspection unit
24 hours during the period of exposure. The due to aging shall be calcuhtad as follows:
temperature of the air in the vicinity of the O-B
specimen shall be maintained at 45°35° C. Change In cbaracterlstlc, ~rcent==—~ Xloo
——
(113° =9” F.) during the exposure period, by where:
controlling the temperature of the room and the O-the Talne obtained on the Unng@ Insulation or
ventilation of the space surrounding the speci- sheath of the Inepwion unit
E-the value obtained on the aged Insulation or
men. The filters or other enclosure shall be ahedh of the inspection unit
cleaned at least once every 24 hours during the
exposure period. 5.2 Unless otherwise specified in the detail
specification, the number of specimens tested
4.4.5 -\t the end of the expos~lre period, the
hnldm with specimen shall k removed and the from each inspection unit shidl be as required
specimen examined immediately by means of m the method of test, 4.4.2, used for determin-
binocular microscope for cracking and cheok- ing the deterioration of the insulation or
ing. The speeimen shall be removed from the shedh.
holder and set aside on a flat surface to rest for 5.3 The change in the characteristic of the
not less than 16 hours nor more than 96 hours iRaulation or sheath of the inspection unit shall
at room temperature before physical t@s are be recorded to the nearest 1 Pe.rcenti
made. 6.4 by cracking or checking of the ma-
4.4.6 At the end of the ra period, unless terial of the inspection unit shall be rewrded,
otherwise specified in the detail specification, 5.5 The dosage snd the elon~tion used for
4.4.2, tensile strength and elongation shall also stretching of the specimen shall be recorded.

FED. TE~ METHODSTD. NO. 228

 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Method 4211
April 14, 1%7

RESISTANCE TO PETROLATUM, VARNISHED CLOTH

L SCOPE 42 Unleee otherwiaa specified in the detail
Ll This method ie intmded for use in deter-” specification, the tarnperature of exposure shall
mining the effect of hot petrdatuxn on ~ar- be 160°=10 C. (802°=20 F.) for a period of
niahed cloth and tapes of ineulated wire and 1521 minuta
oabl~ 4.3 The 200-ml. beaker containing the petro-
Z SPECIMEN latum shall be heated to the required tempera.
21 ne epecimen aball be a piece of the ture, Afier the beaker and ptroleum have
varnished cloth or tape at leaat 12 inches in raached the required temperature, the specimen
length taken from 8 single tape layer of the shall be completely immereed in the.petrolatum
inspection nnik and allowed to remain for the required time.
& APPARATUS At the end of the exposm$ period the specimen
U TheI apparatua.shall be M follows: shall be removed from the petr@atum and act
W AMW+niU4kb“ lkaktw Wd Ooval’gzlw. aaide to cool to the room tamperatura. The
3.L2 An dv own equipped with an suto- specimen shall then be freed of any petrolatum
mrttic temperature control capable of maintain- with a cloth and examined for softening, tacki-
ing the specimen at the required temperature neas, or brittleness of the varnish.
within *1* C, (2° F.), 5. RESULTS
323 2%8mom8t@ with male to ●t leaet 5.1 Unless otherwiee specified in the detail
160” C. (820° F.) ~nd graduated to 0.5° C. epecifioation, one specimen from each layer of
(1° F.). tape taken for t- 4.1, shall be tested.
3.1.4 Pt@rohztum, approximately 100 ml. 5.2 The petrolatum resistance of the layer
& PROCEDURE of tape ehall be the result obtained from the
U At hat 12 inohee of each tape ehall be specimen teeted.
mxtoved from the inspection nniL Thhae 53 hy eoftneat+ tackineaa, or brittleness of
othwiee speded in the detail specikation, the vamiah shall be recorded.
10 pement of the ta~but in no cnae law thnn “5.4 The temperature and time of expomre
5 tapaa shall be taken ●t random for teak ahtdl be recorded.

FED, TEST METHOD STD. NO. 228

 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Method 4221
April 14, 1%7

RESISTANCE TO 0~ XNSULA’ITON +iND SHEATE

L SCOPE 42 Unleaa otherwise specihl in the detail
L1 This method is intended for use in deter- specification, tensile strength and elongation
mining the eflect of oil on oil-resisting insula- tests, methods 3G21 and 3031 shall be used to
tion and sheath of insulated wire nnd cable. determine the detm-iorat.ion of the insulation
The pmcadure maybe used for determining the and sheath due to aging.
resistanw of insulation and sheath to oil at any 43 After adjusting the immersion oil to the
desired temperntur~ The tensile strength required temper~ture, the specimen shall be
elongation+ or other characteristic used for de- completely immersed w that the liquid can cir-
termining the degree of deterioration is deter- culate freely around the specimen during the
mined immediately after exposure of the period of expoaum. The immersion container
material. shall be fitted with a reflux conden& and the
2 SPECIMEN specimen exposed for the required time at the
2J The specimen ahaIl be as described in required temperntum
methods 3021 and !)031 or other methods of test 4A At the end of the immersion period the
required for determining the amount of deteri- qmimen shall be removed from the liquid,
oration, 4.2. placed immediately in a fresh supply. of the
3. APPARATUS AND REAGENTS same liquid at room temperature, and nlIowed
3.1 The appar~tus and reagents shall be to remain for 35*5 minut~.
as follows: 4.5 At the end of the moling period in the
3J.1 G%w tube having an outside diameter fresh liquid, the specimen shall be removed from
of M mm. and a length of approximately 300 the liquid, quicldy dipped into nceton~ and
mm., or other suitnble container for immersing blotted lightly with filter paper. ‘Unless other-
*L. .. .
LIICspecsmen in oiL wise speci&d in the Gel,ail speciikatio~ tens?ie
3J3 Re7%4a condense euitnble for fitting atnmgth and elongation shall be determined of
into the glass tube by means of a cork stopper. the aged specimen as described in methods 3021
3J3 E~”-ti for controlling the tempera- and 3031. If other properties are required the
perdura within * 1“ C. (2° F.), such 4s a con. specimen ehnll be tatted os described in the spec-
stant temperature liquid bath with thermoat@ic ified method. The same tae& shall be conducted
oontrolo on aged and unaged specimens for the purpose
39L4 Thewnome*. of comparison in determining the degree of
US &wma”num or aorvvsioruesist%bg 8t0d deterioration of the aged msterial.
●munu or glaae f rame-work to prevent the speci- 496 The specimen shall be testad within 3
mens from touching each other or the surfaces minutes a$tar it h been removed from the cool-
of the ocmtainer. ing liquid. (See 4.4.)
3&6 F’ilkr paper, 5. RESULTS
39L7 Aoehns. 33 Ca1cu18tiom The change in txmaile
W Immmion d conforming to the fol-
etrength, elongation, or other characteristic of
lowing requirements:
the insulation or sheath of the inspection unit
B’lati mint --------- 240**5’ c. (475’*1O” F.k
8a7bolt TIMoel&, aeG. 100*5 due to aging shall be calculated es follows:
Amine point_—___.— 93’*8” c, (199”*5° F.L
& PROCEDURE C!hanrsin eharactertau~ yrce-nt- ~O-J? X1OO
M Unless otherwise apecided in the detail where:
o=~e ~almeObtained on tie un~~ed @Ulatl~~ m
specification, the * shall be carried out at a
aheatb of the Inspection nnlL
temperature of l!ll”=l” C. (250° =2° F.) for I?=the ralue obtained on the aged insulation or
s period of 18 hours * ~~ hour. sheath of the tnspwtlon unl~

FED. TEST METHODSTD. )40. 226

 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Method 42Zl

52 Unlesn otherwise specified in the detail 698 The ohange in the ch8r@&atic of the
specification, the number of specimens testad insulation or sheath of &c Qection unit ehdl
from each inspection unit shall be ae required be moorded to the nemd 1 pement.
in the method of tes~ 4.2,uaed for determining 5A The tempemtur~ and time of expomwe
the deterioration of the insulation or sheath. !&all be lmoorded.

FEOo TEST METHOD STD. MO. 22S

 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Method 4223
April 14, 1%7

RESISTANCE TO OIL INSULATION AND SHEATH

(RECOVERY METHOD)
1. SCOPE “ specimen shall be removed from the liquid,
L1 This method is intended for use in cieter- placed immediately in a fresh supply of the
mining the tied of oil on oil-resiisting insula- same liquid at room temperature, and allowed
tion and sheath of insulated wire and cahl~ to remain for 35*5 minuti.
The procedure may be used for determining the 4.6 At the end of the cooling period in the
maibtance of insulation and sheath to oil at fresh Iiquid the specimen shall be removed from
any desired temperatum. The tensile strength, the liquid, quickly dipped into acetone, and
elongation, or other chmacterietic used for de- blotted lightly with filter paper. The specimen
termining the degree of deterioration is d- shall be suspended in air and allowed to recover
termined after the material has been permittad for the required period of time (see 4.3) before
to recover for a de.fbite period of time after tests am made.
exposure to the oil. 4.7 At the end of the reoovery period the
2. SPECIMEN width, thiekne~ and cross-sectional nrcm of the
U The specirneu shall be as described in specimen shell be determined as follows:
method 422L 4.7.1 Thicivwaa, The thickness of the spec-
3. APPARATUS AND REAGENTS imen shrill be determ ined as described in method
&l The npparatus nnd reagenta shall be as 1124 exeept that a dumbbell tensile strength
described in method 42!21. specimen shall be subjected to three measum-
4. PROCEDURE ments, one at the center and one near each end
4.1 Unless otherwise specified in the det~il of the reduced section. If the specimen is nar-
spedcation, the test shall be cnrried out at a rower than the diameter of the foot, measure-
temperature of 121” =1” C. (260” *2° 3?.) for ments shall be made with the center of the mi-
a period of 18= 1A hour. cmmetar foot coinciding with the longitudinal
4.2 Unless otherwise speeifhi in the detail center line of the specimen so that there will be
apecifiation, tensile strength and elongation an equal overlap of the foot on each sidw The
~ method 3021 and 3031 respwtively, shall median of the three measurements ehall be used
be”used to detmnine the deterioration of the as the thiokness in calculating the cross-sec-
insulation and sheath due to aging. tional mea of the specimen except that speei-
‘ 44 Unless otherwise specified in the detail mens for which the difference between maxi-
epecficatio~ the specimen shall be permitted to mum and minimum thickness exceeds 0.003 inch
recover 4%* ~4 hour in the air St room tem- shall be discarded.
perature after exposure to the oil before deter- L72 Width. The width of the specimen
mining the tensile strength md elongation or shall be determined with the apparatus de-
other Oharacteristica. scribed in method 1018 or any device which is
4A After adjusting the immemion oil to the aecurati to 0.001 inch and which can be used in
required temperat~ the specimen shall be such a manner that compression of the specimen
completely immemsd so that the liquid can cir- is negIigibla A dumbbell tensile strength
oulata freely around the specimen during the specimen shall be measured at three placq one
period of exposure. The immemion container ●t the center and one near sach end of the
shall be fitted with a reflux condenser and the reduced section. The mdian of the three
specimen exposed for the required time at the measurements shall be used as the width in
specified temperature. calculating the cross-sectional area of the
4.5 At the end of the immersion period the specimen.

FED, TEST METMOD STD. HO, 228

1
 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Method ~

4.73 Cro8w e e t i o n a 1 area. The croe9- Chaxe in charuterlstk pareent-+ X1OO

sectional area shall be calculated or determined
as described in method W!21. W&em:
O.ttm V*1O.ebta.lned en tile unaged inmlatloo or
4A UnJess otherwise specified in the detail
abeath & tbo lnapsctlon anft
spedcation, tensile strength nnd elongation #~mo ralae obtained on tbQ aged lnmhtlon or
shall be determined on the aged specimen as shaatb of tbe lnmection nnlt
—--. .. —.- .in methods 3021 and 3031 r~t)~
d~~cribed
tively. If other properti~ are required, ‘the 52 Unles otherwise speded in the detail
specimen shall be tested as described in the specifiantion, the number of specimens tastad
specified method. The some tests shrill be @n- from each inspection unit shall be as mquimd in
ducted on aged And unaged specimens for the the method of tee$ 4.!2,used for de-i- tie
purpose of comparison in detmnining the de- det.ariorat.ion of the insulation or sheath
gree of deterioration of the aged material.
S3 Thechange inthecharaderiStic of*
5. RESULTS
inmdation or sheath of the inspection unit *all
5J Calculation The change in tansile
strength, elongation, or other ehmwtdatic of belwcorded totbawar-tlp-ent-
the insulation or sheath of the inspection unit 5A The bmperature and time of erpoeure
due to aging shall be calculated as follows: and time of rwovery shall be m?orded.

FED. TEST METHOD STD. NO. 228

2
 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Mtxh(MI 5011
April 14, 1967

HEAT SHOCK, INSULATION

1. SCOPE While in the woud or bent condition, the
1.1 This method is intanded for use in deter- specimen shall be exposed to circulating air at
mining the effect of heat on insulating materials the required temperature for the required period
in the bent form. It is primcmily applkbh to of tinm At the end of the exposure period, the
thermoplastic insulation It is applicable to specimen shall be examined for cracking of the
single conductor insulated wire or cable. insulation both on intemal and external surfacee
2 SPECIMEN
by axialiy splitting the specimen at two axes
U The specimen shall consi2t of ● piece of
180° apart and oarefully removing the eemi-
the inapeotion unit of Mcient length to be
tubem from the conductor.
teatad M dwwribed in awtion 4, from which any
Oomring over the inmdation has been Xwumove& 43 Flat twin mble shall be bant on the minor
& APPARATuS ‘ axis of ib cross eeotion only, The minor diam-
m The apparatus ahdl be as followo : &erahaIlb eueedind etemnitigtietiof&
&l.1 A mandrd Of the dae required in mandreL
column 8 of table L
W A cimuluting c+ oven capable of xikin- 5. RESULTS
taini.ng the specimen at the required bmpem. 5.1 Unlees otherwise specified in the detail
tare within *IO C. (2” F.). tpcification, two apecimena from each inspec-
& PROCEDURE tion unit shall be fastetL
&l TJnleaI otherwise specifiwi in the detail U Any cracks in the insulation on the in.
ternal and external surfaces of the specimen
specification, the specimen shall be subjected
I&d ‘berecorded.
to a tamperatnm of 121° =1° C. (250° & 2“ F,)
S3 The reaiatance to heat shock of ‘he in-
for s period Of 1 hour.
mdntion of theI ineption unit shall be the
42 The specimen shall be wound around the rtmlta obtained from the specimens tested
mandrel’ (if sise 1 AWC3 or smaller) or given 6.4 The tamperatu~ time of expcaum, and
•180°H~da~dd(if aise Oor aim of mandrel used shall be rwxdd
larger) as apeded in tsble L
TABLE I

~mdrei b, W*
.. the nominalOutdda
Sias ~ aonduti AW(3 0? drouiar & Nknber Ofadjaod turns cuu.;atf&a
multlpliad by tho
following ktor

No.8arldarnal&r 6
No. 7 * No. 2, Inalualw 6 ;
No. 1 1 a
N& OtOWOO 180” band 2
226,000 &Ukudob 1S0” band 6

FED. TEST METHOD STD. NO. 228

Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com
 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Method 5021
Agsil 14, 1%7

HEAT DISTORTION, INSULATION

1. SCOPE 4. PROCEDURE
Ll This method is intended for use in deter- U Unless otherwise specifbd in the detail
mining the distortion of insulating matirisla specification, the spximen sMl be subjected
It is particularly applicable to thesmoplaetic to a temperature of 121’=le C. (250°+20 F.)
insulation. for t period of 1 hour under the weight required
2 SPECIMEN in table L
21 Conductors N- 0000 AWG snd 42 Conductors&0000 AWG or smaller.
amalk Tin Spciman shall consist of ● right 4.21 The thickness of the insulation shall
cross section of the impection unit 1 inch in be detmmined as dsacribed in method 1011 ●nd
length *m which any covering omr the ineu- the due rccosded as T,.
htion has imen 181110TSti 422 l“haomnsba llheheatadto”t hem-
22 Conductors larger than No, 0000 quired temperatnra and maintained through-
AWG. The specimen shall oonsist of s piece out the taeL The thickness ~ 8.1.1, the
of the fnmhtion 1 inch in length and X6* $fe weight ra@rd ia @le 1, and the specimen
inch in width taken from the inspection unit shall be phwed in the oven ●nd allowed to re-
and buffed, method 3011, to 0.050=0.010 inch main for a period of 1 hour,
in thickxmm 423 At the end of the pro-heating period,
X APPARATUS the specimen shall be placed dimctl y under the
3.1 The apparatus shrill be ns follows: foot of the gage and the weight npplied to the
3.1.1 .4 did rnicmmetm with n tit anvil not gage. The gage with specimen in position shall
less than 0.375 inch in diameter nncl a flat pres- remain in the oven for the required tiun At
ser foot 0.875 *0.01 inch in diametar. The the end of the heating period, the diameter of
p-r foot shall be equipped to support added the epemnen sid “bered from the gage and
weigh~ table I, for ● pplying forca to the epeci- recorded es D,.
men. The surfaces of the anvil and p-r foot 424 The insulation shall be removed from
shall & padlel b within 0.0001 inch. The the conductor and the diametar of the conductor
micrometer shali be graduated to read in mile of the specimen determined as described in
or O.W)linch. method 1481 and the value recorded as L%
3J2 lV&ghti as required in table I. 42 Conductors larger than size WOO
AWG. “
‘rAaLa L asge bade 43J The thickness (dinmetar) of the ~i-
,
men shall be detmmined with the gnge described
LOUIon in 3.1.1 with no added load on the pmsesr foot,
Conductor sise (AWC))
&%) and the value xwcaded as TM
422 ‘I’hecw andiallb
ehastedtotheepeci-
) No. 1S. -------- --------- --------- ---
No. X6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..-. -------
fied tampetmtum and rnaintined throughout
z
Nos. 18 to q Irmludvo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . boo the tesL The thickness gage, ii.1.1, the weight
Na. ?to 1, Inddm. .-. --.. . . . . . . . . . 7s0 quid in table I, and the specimen shall be
Na. O@~, bddw . . . ..-. -..-... placed in the oven and ●llowed to remain for a
Na. larsorchaa OWO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XE period of I hour.
4S2 At the end of the preheating peri~
3U3 A rirrwktinp air own capable of the epeoimen shall be plaoed directly under the
maintaining the specimen nt the required tem- foot of the gage and the weight applied to the
pe.rnture within =1° C. (2° F,). gage. The gage with specimen in position shall

FEO, TEST METHOD STD. NO. 228

1
 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Method Sa@l

dilithOO~mfOrtieqti timam At U Oodudtwu&qruthau tMNAW@.

the and of the hbsting period, the thi-
thespeoimen shsJlb6xwsd flWILthO~d
of )
the value recorded as T* Wh8ro:
S RESULTS
6.1 Calculation The distortion of the in-
sulation of the spw”men W be caioohted w
fouowll :
&l.1 Uonduotor&m W AW@ and
8mauer.
D,-&
5’C- ~

Where :
T.-the th!cknea n! tba bsnhlon o! tba sgdmea
Mom beat t?ea-~ lnc&
)

FED. TEST’ METHOD STO, MO, 223

 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Method 5111
April 14, 1967

MELT, FIBROUS COVERING

1. SCOPE oven which has been pre-heated to the required
1.1 This nwtllod is intentied for use i]] determ- temper~ture. TIw specimen shall be heated for
ining the softening of the saturant.s and fin- the required time at the required temperature,
ishing materials in the fibrous covering of insu- removed from the oven, nnd rdlowed to cod to
lated wire and cable+ room temperature., The specimen shall be ex-
2. SPECIMEN aminixi m determine whether the paper ad-
2J The specimen shall be a 6-inch length of heres to the specimen or whether the saturanta
the inspection unit from which any covering or finishing materials have. become sufficiently
over the fibrous covering has been removed. fluid to be transferred to the paper in sufficient
& APPARATUS quantity to form a ridge on the paper which is
3.1 The apparatus shall be as follows: perceptible to the touch
3.1.1 A &vu/..kq U4F oven capable of 6. RESULTS
maintaining the specimen at the required tem- 5.1 Unless otherwise specified in the detail
perature within = 1° C. (2° F.). spec%cation, two specimens from each inspee-
3.1.3 Mertns for suspending the specimen tion unit shall be testd.
horizontally in the oven. 5.2 Tl~e resistance to melting of the satu-
4. PROCEDURE rants or finishing materials of the fibrous cov-
4.1 Unless othemvise speciiied in the detail ering of the inspection unit shall be the results
specification, the specimen shall be subjected to obtained from the specimens tested,
a temperature of 65°*10 C. (149°=20 F.) for a 5.3 Whether the p,~per adhered to the in-
period of 30 minutes. spection unit shall ba rwnr(]ecl
4.2 The specimen shall be wrapped, except 5.4 Whether the satwants or finishing mn-
for a distance of 1 inch at emoh em+ with * terkla transferred to the paper from the in-
piece of clean, white, glazed paper, The spection unit shall be recorded.
wrapped specimen shall be supported horizon. 5.5 The temperature and time of exposure
tally by the bare endn of the conductor in the shali be recorde&

FED. TEST METHOII $70, NO. 22Q

1
 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Method 5131
April 14, 1%7

DRIP, FIBROUS COVERING

L SCOPE removed from the conductor of the specimen for
1.1 This method is intended for use in deter- a distnnce of ?L inch from each end. The speci-
mining the softening of the finish in the fibrous men shall be suspended by the bare ends of the
covering of insu]akd wire or cable and its tend. conductor at an angle of 45° in the oven which
ency to soften sufficiently to run from the cable. has been pre-heated to the required temperature.
The temperature is higher than that used for the A sheet of paper or container shall be placed in
melt te9t. the bottom of the oven in a position to collect
2 SPECIMEN my dripping from the specimen, The specimen
2.1 The specimen shall be a 6-inch length shall be heated for the required time and at the
of the inspection unit. from which any covering required temperature. At the end of the exp
over the fibrous covering has been removed. m’s period the specimen shall be examined for
3. APPARATUS dripping, formation of globuks on the lower
3.1 The apparatus ehnll be as follows: side, or bubbles upon the surfaw
3.LI A drmdating air oven capab~e of 5. RESULTS
maintaining the specimen at the required texn- 5.1 Unless otherwise specified in the detail
perature within * 1° C. (2° F.), specification, two specimens from each inspec-
3.L2 Means shall be provided for suspend- tion unit shrill be tested.
ing the specimen nt an angle of 45°, 5J2 The resistance to dripping of the fibrous
3.13 A skt of paper or conttvh.er for col- covering of the inspection unit shall be the re-
lecting any drippings from the spcci.men. sults obtained from the specimens tested.
4. PROCEDURE 5.3 An? dripping, formation of globllles on
Q l=?~= ~~~.c~i~e .---;G.-A :- +~. J-L-:1
OY--8UGU .ii L4,G UCL*,A t.h~10’KerSiCla, ul. LULL]* Upull Lh kiUCf~C~ Of &
specitica~ion, the specimen shall be subjected to inspection unit skdl be recorded.
a temperature of 82° * 1° C. (180°=20 F.). 6.4 The temperature and time of exposure
42 All covering and the insulation shall be shall he recorded.

FED. TEST METHOD STD. NO. 228

 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Method 5141
April 14, 1%7

DRIP, CABLE
L SCOPE speeimen for s dietance of approximdely ~
11 This method is intended for use in debw- inch The specimen ahnll be supported ver-
mining the ability of eutumnta and tiniehing tially by the &e end of the conductor in the
ma.bwids in cable to resist flow at elevated tem- oven which baa been preheated to the required
peratures when the cable ie “m c vertical pcmi- tamperatum. A ehmt of white pnper or any
tiom suitable container shall be placed beneath the
% SPECXMEN Bpecimen in such s poeition thst it will catch
Z1 The epecimen shall be 8 piece of the in. any matial which dripe from the spec”ixne.m
epection unit not k than 30 timee the over- The epecimen shall be heated for the required
) all diamehr of the U&lQL time and .st the required temperature. At the
& APPARATUS ●nd of thee-m period, the {ower end of the
u The Sppamtue ehdl be as follows : epechnen shall he examined for globules of the
S&l A c+cw?uting nir oven of sufficient eize eaturanta or finiahkg materide and bubbles on
to accomndat.a the specimen in a vertical po- the surfn~ The paper or container shall bs
sition m}d c~pnble of nmintaining tbe specimen examined for any drippings.
at the required tamperatura within* 1° C. (2° 5. RESULTS
F.). 5.1 Unless otherwise specified in the dehil
U2 Means for supporting the specimen in specification, epecimens from ench inspection
s vertical poaitiom
unit aid be tested.
\J? 3.1.$! A .*Av~tof pnprr or a cnnto%~r for CO1.
Y \ 54! The resistance to dripping of the fibrous
]ecting any drippinge from the specimen,
rnvnnng n? ths irqwtim unit Rhall he the re-
4* I% OCEDU-M
U Unlesg otherwim epdled in the detail eulw obtained from the specimens tested.
epeci!kntion, the apeeimen shall be uubjccted to 5S Any exudation, formation of bubbke on
s tempemture of 80° * 1° C. ( 176° = 2“ F.) fors the inspection uni~ or drippings on the paper
period of 1 hour. ehall be Mconled.
42 All comring xnd iM&tiOll ahd be m- L4 The time and tanpemtura of expoeure
mowxl from one end of the eonduotor of the shall be recorded.

FED, TEST METHOD STO. NO. 224

 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Method 5211
April 14, 1%7
( .

FUIKMABILITY, HORIZONTAL
L SCOPE epecimen wham the inner blue cone of the flame
L1 This method ia intended for UMin detm- ia to in applied. The indiator paper ahail be
mining the tlame-ratadant propertied of in- motied just sullicient for proper dheaion
sulatad wire and oable without metallic cov- and wrapped onoe around the epecimen with the
m. St ie particularly ●pplicable to b _ aide towarda the wim and the en&
hne-retdant fibrous wvaring of vmiiahed paated evenly togethw sad projected ~ inch
dOth inadatd ti and cshb fmntheapecben ontheoppoeiternde towhich
Z SPECIMEN the be u to be sppiid The Tirrd bunmr
() 21 Theapecimen ahalibeapiece
apection unit St Met 10 incht, in length
of thein- shall be phead in a mrti~
9ameadjueted to6inchea
padtion and the
in height with the
8, APPARATUS inner blue ame l% inh in haighk
Xl The apparatw shall be aa follows: 4S The burner, in ● mrtical poaitio~ shall
2Ll ?’iwtA4mnikr appmxinmtoly B inciu9 bepiaoedeo thattbeinneroone jwttouchesthe
( wide, 14 inchee deep, ●id !24 inch high made
of sheet metal. The chamber ahai.i be opn at
under aide of the epirnen at a point midway
between the two indicator pqera. T’he flame
the top and front and quipped with aupporta shall be directed against the specimen for
8 inchee ●part for. hoiding the specimen in ● exactly 80 aeconda and then removed. After
horizontal position during the test= -of the epecimen haa~ the indicator
u rid bum having ● bom of ~ inoh” papem aid he examined to determine the
-d ● 4-incI.I iengch dove the primary air irdeta. maximum diatanca the 9ame extanded in either
V
{{J, $ 3.13 Supp?v of fuel qua, butzne or eov;w- direction from the center point of application
i, ,U W. The gua aym.eu ahail be quipped with of the *
( oontroia for maintaining the flow of gas to the 6. RESULTS
burner U Unifom pmre. &l Unk othemiee qpecibd in the detail
U*4 watch m dhu d-i- Which will mg- =.y SPBcJn from 4 inapeo-
hter the tie in mconda.
SJJ L!kd ad ~duati to % inch or bar U The llammahility of the fibrous covering
or its decimal equivaien~ of the kaiation or ehesth of the inapotion
L PROCEDURE unitahallbe the~tobtained from thespeci-
UThea#xnenah allbefmefromme - Inentmtad.
0h8nicai damag& T&l 9ammAMutyteatahau UWhenmom than one specimen ia
( bearried outin~mom free frwndrdt or a the ilammabiiity of the fibmua owering
under s hood in which the 90W of air ia not of the hwpection unit ahail be the average of
sukient to ●ffect the tlama. theramlts obtained fmmtbaapecirnwti
.
42 The apeoimen till be placed in B hori- 63 aammabiity
The (lwimum diaknoa
( I zontal position in the chamber on supports 8 the 8pecimm burned in either direction from
inohea ●part. Two stripe of indicator paper the oemter point of cppiication of the fiarne) of
shall be attached to the epedmen 4 inch- ●* the inapmtia unit ahail be recorded to the near-
each paper being 2 inches from the point on the cat~inoh

FED. TEST METHOD STD. NO. 228

( ..
 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Method 5221
ApdI 14, 1%7

FLAMMABILITY, VERTICAL
L SCOPE ‘ 4 PROCEDUBE
lJ This method is intanded for use in d*r- &l T’heflammabili~ tdshallbecanied
mining the flame-resistant prop@im of firms outinaroom fifran drafter mders hood
ooverings, other than tapeq of insnlati wire in which the flow of air is not sudicient to dad
●nd oable without metallic co~- It is dso theke. [email protected] ehallbefrea from
applioeble to the determination of the flame- mdaltioel -
amtardmt propert.k of plastic .bnlation and 43 Oneendofthespecbenshallbefastaned
jacketd. inthechamberbymunaof sckmp. Theflame
2 SPECIMEN i.ndioator paper ehdl be ~ to the speci-
21 The specimen shall bes pieca of the in- amn 10 inch= ●bove the point where the inner
spection unit ● pproximately 18 inch in length blue coneoftheflame is to be applied. The indi-
from which ●ny cxwering over the oovering to oator paper h?i be moistaned just dcient for
be t@ad has bean removed. proper abion and mpped onoe aronnd the
& APPARATUS ‘specimen vrith the gummed side toward the
3.1 The apparntus shall be M follows: specimen and the ends pasted evenly together
S&l Test chamber ● pproximately 12 inohes and projectad M inch from the specimen on the
wide, 14 inches deep, aud 24 inches high made of aide opposite to where the fhme is to be ● pplied.
meld shes~ The chmber shall be open at the 43 Tho burner shall he adjusted to produce
tQp and front and equipped with supports for a fhune S inches high and ● i) mer blue cone Lb
hohiing the specimen in a mwtial position and irmhsa high The burner n- .ted on the 520°
keeping it taut dining the test. angle blo.~k shrill be placed agriinst the jig in
o ““-- ?““ WI
3.:4? Uuvfny ..84,7
~w. ,Gc;, h..t-e~ .-IMe~~~?bfi.
B,U-.WW“. a-.. .b WA
-a bb. - +h. t +k .+;*O1nlmnm
A& Uk VM6 ~~~= & -.. d! ye . . . . . ~.....

&ttt. The pa systmn A-d] be equipped with through the stem of the burner passes through
controls for cnaintiitiing ~he flow of p to the the axis of the epecimem The jig shall be ad-
burner nt a uniform prmmre. juti so that there is ● distance of 1.5 inches
&13 A ak42 & gnduated to %2 inch or between the tip of the burner stem and the sur-
finer or its decimal quivalen~ faoe of the speoime% as memmd along the
8J.4 Watch or other timiay device which ●xis of the burner etmm The height of the
will register the time in eeconds. . ______ _ specimen shrill be ● djusted so that the point of
9.13 A Tirrell burner hnving a bore of ~ oontact with the dame ahd] be not less than 8
inch and 4-inch length above the primq ti inches from the lower end of the speeimen.
inlets. The bumcr shall hnve an sttached pilot 4.4 The pilot of the burner shall be tightad.
light and shall be mounted on a !MOengle block The valve supplying the fuel gas to the burner
in the heating ckamber. shall be opened and tho dame Automatically
3J.6 An a$j@abk atsel an g 1e (#g) spplied to the specimen for 15 seeonds and then
attached tu the bottom of the cbmntm to insnm the valve cloeed for 15 eaoonds This operation
the correct location of the burner with relation Shell be XqJeatad 4 additional times.
to the specimem 45 At the end of the fifth application of the
S.1.7 FZanM Jmficutom cnnrnstin~ of strips flnrne the perczmt of the extended portion of
of gummed krnft paper, 5 nlils iii uumilml dJuk- the indicator paper which is burned shall k
nesa and ~ inch in width. This paper shall con- eetimatuf and recorded. The duration of the
form to type III, grade B, PPP-T-4S. burning period of tie specimen ●fter the fifth
application of the flame ahdl be observed and
the valve mxzmkKL

FED. TEST METHOD STD. NO, 221

 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Method -

& BESULTS of the insulation or 8hth of the inspotion unit

5J Unkm @hmwiee epecified in the detail sbnll be the wemge of tbe meultaobtained from
spcrificntion, one spcimen from each inspec- @~-
tion unit sh:dl bo teetcd. . 5S Tbe chmtion of the h“ming of tbe in-
52 The hnunnbllity of the 5broue oo?er- spection unit after final application of the flame
ing, insulation, or sheath of the inspection unit elmll be recorded t9 the nearest eecond.
shrill be the remit. obtained fmm the specimen &4 The unount of tlq extended portion of
teeted. the imiktor pqer U@ burned from the in-
=1 When more t.hnn one epscisnen ie @on unit ●hll be recorded to the neerwt 5 ,
teeted, the fhmurdility of the fibrous covering -~

FED. TE$T METMOO STD. W. 228

2
 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com ,., ,,

Method 5231
April 14, 1%7
.
FLAMMABILITY, SPARK METHOD
1

1. SCOPE emitted fromthe heated spe@men. A suitnble

1.1 ‘This method is intended for use in deter- electric circuit shall be prcwided to maintain
mining the tlrmmmbility of flatuc-pmof, heat- continuous sparking at electrodesduring the
and flnme.rtsistsn~ and oil-proof wimt and tu& The plugs shall be tnounted in such u man-
oabks both with and without mrnor. It is ner that they may be moved sway from the
particularly applicable to wirw and oalh for specimen after ignition ties placa so as not to
une on shipboard. intarfem with the travel of the flame ond to
Z SPECIMEN pruveut the electrode from becoming fouled.
2.1 The specimen sball consist of a piece of U3 A edahJP ~mm tmd ww for judg
the ixqwct.ion unit approximakly 18 iuchas in ing the UIstanceof time tmvel shun be mounted
length, near the spimen and in suchs position as not
3. APPARATUS to interfere with the tivel of flame.
3.1 The npparntus shall he as follows: &LS .4 mnatti mwiwtt se required in table
3.LI ?’cst dinnzbm which shall b of ,suffi- I ahnll be supplied from a euihble trmsformer
cient size to contain the specimen, specimmj SII1)- ‘source to the heater coil.
port, hearer coil, spl~rk pl u~ flame ttavpl gngc,
and other rtccmories, M shall be constructed so TADLt 1. Cu~ent in ?trater coit
t$ as to eliminnte air drafts and to penrtit a cleor ——. —
\ ~iew of the interior through shntter-proof glass
Nominal diameter of rnpeeimen (~clteo)
Cument
●mpenmi
windows. Vent holes shrill be proriclecl around
the sides adjncent t.n the b= 10 permit the ad- ___-—--l’’m””’’m””
mission of fresh nir. An exhaust fan ~hnl! bv 0.1 46
connected to the top of. a c8paeity just Suf6cient .3 47
tocxwry offsrnokeand~ ,3 48
%12 The support shall h suitable for hold- .4 49
ing the specimen in 8 vertical position with an .5 so
.6 51
unaqprtad span of not 1- than 14 iIlCb4U .7 62
3S3 Heater coiln rxmsistin~ of 7 turns of .8’ S3
NO. lIJ ( U.i@-ii)* di~e~r) ~i~n~ win, Al 54
spnre wound 0.25 inch per turn, The nominal 1.0 65
inside diameter of tho coil shall be 0.5 inch 1.1 b 1.3 M
1.4to 1.7 57
gmttter than the ov@ dinmete.r of the s~i- 1.8 to 2.2 M
men to be tested. The lower M of the coil shall 2.3 W 2.9 59
he lamktecl 1.5 inches aho?e tbe top
of the lower ——-— ——— ..- —— --- -——— -
sperimen suppo~ The rteistarm wire shall
❑ eet tbo requirements of Fed Spec. QQ-R-17S. 3A? , Watch or other tiw;nq dt:vict which
will regietw the time in secunds.
3.L4 Two qwrk plug8 with extanded alec- 4. PROCEDURE
trodea spaced ~ inch from the surface of the 4.1 Time of heating.
specimen elm]] be Iocatad on diametrically op- 4&l Unks otherwiso spci6ed in the detail
poei@ sides of the specimen and shall be placed specihtio~ for all armored cabl~, whether
with their longitudinal centerlines in a hori- tasted with or without armor, the current in
zontal plnne ~ inch above the top of t)ie heater the heating coil ehd! be turned off 30 seconds
roil in such a position as to igni(,c any gnses after ignition ocmma

FED, TEST METMOO $70. NO. 220

I
 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com
—... . ------- ----- - .- -—------ -

4J3 Unk othemiea qded in the detail d end the PIIWS*f&d ●WBy from the-k
~iktion, for d unrmnomd =ble+ where !IIM maximum dksnee which tbe ikne tmv-
tho ikmition time is lees than 60 eocmn* the eis along the mwfsoe of the spdrnen before eS-
current in the heating coil ehsll be turned off tincticm Alf be miemmmdfrom the top of the
60 -de after being turnd o~ bester coil ●nd modad as the &etuM8 whi~ .
4.L3 Unless otherwise qwcilied in the detail the fhme *rek
epeciiicntion, for rdl unarmored eablq where 4,s Time reuahed for aetf+stinctiom
tbo ignition time’ is gmmter than 80 MXWA the The timq in H* that the specimen con-
current in the heating coil shd] bs turued off tinues to bum after the current u cut on in the
when ignition OrxUrh bester coil un!il the ~tion of ●ll flaming
4Z ‘i%e lower ml of tha specimen ehaIl be 8hall be mrorded u the time of eelktinctiom
wappcd with varnished cambric or, similar & llESUL’!%
rnnterial in such a manner that say gasu rs- u one spmimen fmun each inspection nait
lessed though this cnd shell be diserted t~ ebalI be *
wad the Spark pla~ L1.1 The ihmmebility of the inspection /l&
43 Time of igdion. we specimen shall unit shrill be the results obtained ~ the npeci-
be renterad in the hater eoiL The spnrk PIW rncn turte&
●nd flume ~b~ shall be placed in pofdtion tmd 62 If the reenlhrfzmm one spec”hkn f~il to
the chamber sh:tll k closed and the rcntiluting me& the spwified rqnimnents, four additional
fan sturted. The wntch or timing device dml~ spmimens shall iM t@d
be Kt.arte(l simulltuwously with the oncrgizing 5.21 The fianlrnnbility of the jnspertion
of the hm tcr coil hy the current in :wcordnncm unit shall ho the avemge of the mmdta obtained
with tublo I and tl~c energizing of the spark from the fin epmimens *
plus Ibmition elmll be ronsidored as occur- 63 The iime required for the ignition of
ring wlm)t the fi:lmc transfm-s frwl} tllc csrnping
tb kpwtion unit elm!] be reccrtkd to th~
gnscs to the surfnre of II]e specimen and con-
nearest second
tinws [here. Fl;lshes which nmy occur in the
5.4 ‘I’lie time mcprimcl for enlf+xt inrtion of
gaseous space prior b oblaining s sustained
flame shall be disregarded. The tinie from tho the inspection unit ebaii be mxonled to the near-
stmtiug of the current until ignition shsll be - eeconcL
recorded ss the ignition time. 6.S The dtieeI the fbuns.tre?ele along the
4.4 Distance of frame travd Immedi- inspection unit eimll h mmx?iad to the nammst
ately after ignitiou has occurred, 4.3 the cIG ~ incib
tricnl cupply to the spark plugs shall be turned S3 Thetime of btiag8bubmdd

FED, TEST METHOD STD. 110.Z#

2
 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

wthod 6011
Aptil 14, 1%7

RESISTANCE, ELECTRICAL STEEL ARMOR

L SCOPE - 20° C. (08° F.). Ifs Iabotvttq with tempera-
. 1.1 This method is intended for use in deter. ture eontrolkd at 20° C ie not ● ruihtb]e, the
mining the electrical rettistamx of steel armor Iqwcinmn may be tentad ●t room tempemture.
of wire nnrl rablw The rpcimcn shrill be ●llowed to condition for
Z SPECIMEN at least 2 hours before testing. It sh:dl then be
U The sprcimen shall be n piece of the in- nmintuinod at the mqnimd potcntird for a pe-
spection uuit nt lenst 10 feet in lcrtgth from riod of 1 minute ttnd then the mistancs meas-
which nny covering over the 0rotor hstt been ured and tlIc due mumled in ohms M R At
Mmowsi. this pint the temperatam of the surrounding
Z, APPARATUS medium shall be rwxwded as T.
2=1 The apparatus shall be as described in L RESULTS
method 0021. &1 CaIculatiolb
4. PROCEDURE 5.14 The nmistanm of the armor per M)
4A If a Whentstono bridge is used. the ~ feet shall be calculated M follovrs:
‘? Si#nIlrc of the lcn~ls connecting tlw lwi(lue to
the specimen droll be ohtnincd with the Icnds l*Ml~~~t obm ~ 100 teet=$ X 100
b W-hw’o:
Short-cirfxlitw.l on themselves nrd the results
R=the n%ktnm of the sperlmen Mwecn lrnds st
$]+ eubt MC(ed from the measumd resistance of the t~t tvmprrut Un o~.
pcimen. L-the 14m#fhof the SpWhnea bx’wuen le8dl& f-
l\ U1 If the teste are ccrndncted with R Krl- 5.1.2 R~istance menaurementrr mntie at tem-
1 vin (1 OIIII1O Ilrid:e, both curmt]t nrd potwltid
pcrutllres otlwr than 20° C. shall !.)0corrcctml to
leads trlut]l be MS& TIIO rurrent. lends kll k 2tJ0 c. as folks:
attached in such mnnnm ne to give assured c(m- n
tact vvith n clenned surfnce of t he qwximen. The
“@i*n= ‘t “ c- --mFs-%%i5j
potential lends should ho attached by encircling
whom:
clamps on the bnmd armor or to a binding of
l?==tbe mnistnam of tbe ~+mcn ●t temt temprr.
fine copper vrire wmpped tightly for eeiwrttl ●!nm, ohms
turns ntmut the bnred nrntor. T=:k t$VIIIWmtUrSOf te6t “a
40L2 ‘he twt dud] be made by a method .~=the t~,l~mt”re ~lmt ~{ ~i”t~ of @
wing both current and potential luarls if ths armor nwtul cslatlw to tit coppsr
mistnnce is 1ss thrin I ohm. Wlwm potentiaI ●\VIKWN ts aot lmowk tbe tut ebaUIISeomloeted●t
laeds am ud, the distance” hetwerm each lewi a’ c
SIKI the corresponding current lead shall be at 52 IJnksa otherwise specified in the detail
least the times the diameter over the ●rmor. qecification, one specimen from each inspec-
42 The length of the specimen till be tion unit shall be t~ed.
menrmrd to ● sccurncy of 0$2percent by means 53 The resistance of the mnor of the in-
of the steal ecttle ●nd the TSIUSmcordod as L spection unit shrill be the tia obtained front
43 The epecimfxr bntwwn potential con- the specimen tesrtsd.
ductors shall be ccmnectsd to tho testing ittstrn- 53.1 When mom tlmn one specimen is ta3ted
ment as described in 4.1.1. The specimen shall from each inspection uni~ the tmeistmwe of the
not be tested while it is under teneiom It msy armor shall b the amrage of t&e -Its ob-
be laid flat ml stni@t on a ckm dry surfnce tsined from the specimen &stcxi
of material having low conductivity, such as 5.4 The resistuwe of the mnor of the irt.
psper, wood, stone, or cement. Tile IJmrutm-y epection unit in ohms per 100 feet shall be
hmperature should be es near as pmctiqble to reeorded h the nesrest 1 ~~

FED, TEST METHOD STD. HO. 228

1
 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Method 6021
April 14, 1%7

RESISTANCE, ELECTRICAL, CONDUCTOR

1. SCOPE short-circuited on themselves nnd the resnlt s\lb-
1.1 This met iiod is intendetl for use in rleter- trnctwl from the memured resistance of the
mil~illg the electrical resist~r)ce of solid find sp{~cin]en.
straukd colidl]ctors of insulated wire and cable. 4.12 If a Kelvin double bridge is used, both
Tho conductor resistance test shoukl be con- current and potential leads shrill be USML ‘Nle
ducted in the plnnt of the nxmufncturer of tho current leads shrill be uttached in such manner
cable. ns to give assuml contm% with nll tlw wir~s of
2. SPECIMEN the conduct or. The potential leads S}1OUMbe
21 Factory test The specimen shall con- nttached by encircling champs on the bnred con-
sist of one or more coils or reels of finished ductor or to n binding of fine copper wi m
insulated mire or cuhle or an equnl length of wrapped tight]y for several turns about t 1M
insulated wire or cable tiken after the vulcani- bare conductor.
zation process but before the braiding or finish- 4.13 The test shn]l be mado by a method
ing operation. using both current and potential lends if the
22 Laboratory teat. The slwcimcn shall ~sis[ nnce of the specinlen is k-se thwt 1 ohm. -
be n ]Jiece of the inspection unit nt least M l~hwe potential lends are used, the distance
inches in Iengtl, or an equal kmgth of the bnre between each lend and the corresponding cur-
conductor. rmt lend shall be at least 3 times the diameter
3. APPARATUS of the conductor.
3.1 The appnrntlls shall be ns follows: 42 Factory test. ‘1’he resistance of the
3.1.1 A w’table d. c. rwrent mirrc for the conductor shall be rbtermined after c~mpletion
.. ....-4.. ,,.? 1,,.,,
Ira,:,.,l,. ..fi-c,we.m~~tc.
,. f)f tl~c insulation re~ist;~ncc test, method 6031.
3.1.2 .1 witdie bridge o? potentiorwter 4.2.1 The length of the specimen shall be
with the a(’ceswry eyui pment ]lCWS5ilrJ’ for the nwnsumd to an nccuracy of 0.2 percent and tho
mem.urement of resistance with an accuracy of vn.lue recorded es L
0.2 percent. A Whetkvtone bridge has been 4.2.2 The specimen sh?ll be immersed in the
found suitable for measuring rosistnncee gywnter writer bnth for 12 hours: except that finishwl
thnn 1 ohm nnd o Krlvin double brklgc for cables having n load or other metnllic covering
meawlring resistance leas than 1 ohm. need not be immersed in water. The ends of the
3.13 Z’Pmperature nhxwwinq equiprnen# specimen shall be kept well nbovc tl)e surface
thnt wil I mwwnre the tcmpernture of the con- of the writer. The wutxx shall be stirred well
ductor to within 0.5° C, (1° F.). during the test in order to mnintnin n uniform
!L1.4 A xtcd tnpc grncluntcd to }&, inch or temperature throughout the bnth. The speci-
finer or its decimal equivalent or other nppnrn- nmn SMI be connected to the testing instrument
tus which will measure the length of the speci- ns desoribed in U,
men to an accuracy of 0.2 percenL 43.3 The resistmtce of the specimen shall
3.1.5 A rndtaHc container equipped with s be mensurecl and the value recorded in ohms ns
stirrer, in which the ~pecimen muy be immersed E nfter indications have become st.w-dy for not
in water. lcm than 1 mirmte, The pmvniling tempcrnture
4. PROCEDURE of the bath shall be measured to an accurncy of
4.1 General. 0.5” C, and the due recorded M T.
4.1.1. If n Whetstone bridge is used, the re- 43 Laboratory test. The length of the
sist ;Ince of the Ids connecting thu bridge to specimen between Potenwll condwtors sh:tll be
the specimen shn!l be obtained with the lends mensured to nn accuracy of 0.2 percent and the

FED, TEST METHOD STD. NO, 220

I
 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Method 6021
value recorded as L. If a W%eatstone bridge R
Xtedstince ●t 20° C., ohms= —
1+0.00S96 N (T-20)
is used for measurement the length of the speci-
whine :
men shun not include the portion of the-con- R-the reststnace of the spedmen ●t the test tempe~
ductor held between tho jnws of the binding ature, ohm-
poets. IQ order to avoid raising the tcmpem- ?’=th~ *nD:~rature of tbe test, “C.
ture of the specimen nbcwe tlmt of tlje surround- h’=tbe trmpernture cuerl!clent of reslstnnce of the
ing medium (air or ]iqllid both), tile mngnitude conductor rclntl Ve to soft cowwr. The follow.
lng mlues of N shall be used:
of the current shall be kept low nnd the time of Soft or mmmled copper-L6fW0s
its flow through the conductor shall be kept Mert!usu-hnrd.drnwn: SIZW 1/0 and lsLrL?er~.976.
short to minimize the change in resistance due Smuller than l/lL&M6S.
to rise in tempature of the specimen. The Hard-drawn: Sizes 1/0 tlnd larger+l.f)716 -
specimen shrill be connectad to the testing in- S1- smaller t!snn 1/0-0.0616.
strument as described in Al. 5J! Factory tesL
43.1 The resistance of the specimen shall 5.2.1 Unless otherwise specified in the detail
be maaured nnd the value recorded in ohms as specific:.tion, the entire delivery of the wire or
R after indications have been steady for not kss cable shall he tested.
than 1 minute. The ambient temperature shall 53.2 The resistance of the conductor of the
entire delivery in ohms per 1,000 feat shall be f? JQ
be measured to an soouracy of 0.s” C. and the
vnlue recorded ns T. recorded to tho ncnrest 1 percent.
5. RESULTS 5.3 Laboratory test.
5.3.1 Vnlesq otllerwiw sl)ecitied in the d~tail
5.1 Calculation.
spcci fication, one specimen from each inspection
5.1.1 The resistance of the conductor per
unit shrill bc tested.
1,000 feet shall be cdculat.ed as folknrs: 5.32 The resistance of the conductor of the
Resistance, ohms RGS1,000feet-+x 1~ inspection unit shall be tho result obtained from
where: the speci nen tested.
R-tiIe rssisunce
or tbe specimen or the Ienatb of 5X3 When more. thnn one specimen is tested
aptximen potential conductors, ohms,
between from each inspect ion unit, the resistance of the
L-the length of the s~men or the Iezsgtb of ~1-
conductor shall be the avcmge of the results
men between potenthl conductom feet.
obtnined from the specimens tested.
5.12 Resistance measurement made ●t S3.4 The resistance of the conductor of the
te.mperntures other than 20” C. shall be cor- inspect ion unit in ohms pm 1~~ fet ehall be
rectedto 20” c. as follows: recorded b the nearest 1 percent.

FED. TEST METMOO STD. NO. 22$

 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com
. . .

RESISTANCE, ELECTRICAL, I USULATIOU

1. SCOPE S*1.8 AByappamtue thatwtll-urew

le~ of b -en to M ●cmracy of 0.2
1.1 Thte method t%tntati ior use to per-
detarmfolog ttw tnaulation reaisteace of
inaulatd wtrearul cable. TbsteABlaluldbe 4. PROCEDURE
oo@uctad after the voltage wlttutad tee$
method 8111. m insulation roeWXKe b-t 4.1 tiee8 ~e qecttled to the detatl
ahoukt be coticted tier the aupe*tOo of the epectficaUon or apectkatinn sheetj the tnsula-
trmpector tn the pIant 0! the manufacbor of tbon reatstance shalt be determtnuf on the came
b Uiro or cable. SpeCtman ueed for deter- the voltqm vtth-
stamt method 6111. 2t is destrable
that the tsst
2 8PECIMEN be m~ lmm@at91y foux the voltage
wtttta=teeL haqaeetha ~tmenahall
L 1 The epectmen shall cmmtet of O= or b ~ ~ mawlobly dlecharged before
more coils or reels of fktshed Lneulated wtre hemawwawatti ~a realetance ie made.
orcable oranufual length of bmdated *or
able taken tibr the rukudzation process M 4.z:-Lfnle8e 03harwM 8pectfkd in the detatf
before the braidtnc or fM8hhg operaf.tm apectfkatXm or apecifkatton sheets, the ineula-
/7q tton redstance shall be mesaured 1 minute after
3. APPARATUS the ctrcutt te clooe&

k 1 The lQf)=stuS %hd be ●% fOi~OWS: 4.3 The teet vol~e shall be as specified tn
the detail epeclflcatlon or epecfficaUon sheet.
3. 1.1 A %ui@le eontatner, q- with “
stirrer, in whtch the specimen may be immersed 4.4 The Inmktton resistance tsst may be
L-bwatt r. m=+ &for@ tlw braiding or finishing operatton
during manufacture, but not before nnv vulcaNz-
3. 1.2 A standard res{@ance, scale, ●td tng procees. Stngle conductor cable shall be
shunu of any 8uI@le pattern. tested tmtween the cmductor and water in which
it is immereed, Lead covered single cmtuctor
3.1.3 A d. c. vol?a@ source preferably a cable As.11 be tested prim to application of the
LWtery of dry cells, that will supply a voltage ‘ lead sheath. Individual conductors of a
of tmt less than thatepedftedinthedetatl multiple cmiuctm cable shall be bsted before
8pecXtcatton or specification hee~ aeeembl y se described for single codwtor
cable. After aesembly, the multipk-oomtuctor
3. 1.4 A suitable instrument for rneneurtng cable Aall be tested between a stngle comiuctor
the resistance that wlI1 give an Rccumcy of auahwt alf other cmatuctors arranued in two or
wtthtn 10 percent ad a sensithtty of 1 percent more groups for tes~ these tests may be
of full scale deflecttm comfucted withnut immerelon or witi immersion
uetag the water se a groti Mer covering, a
3.1.4.1 A gahoometer of fatrly high lea+cowrd cable abalI be tested betwxm ●ach
eensiuvtty and havtql the loflowim (fuaMfIcauone oomiuctor ad the lead she or be-en each
has been feud to meet the accuracy rerfutre& cmductor ad Its contiguous comtuctors and to
The gatwummeter constant 9hall ha mt less than the ~ wtthout tmmeratom
50,000. The means for tndtca* the denectlon
shall produce a sharply outlhed t@kation on b &5 TIWepectmen sballbetlnmereedtn
BCS2eI,and the ~enecttna shallbeaot less thuI water for a period of at least 12 hours before
100 ctMsionn (measured from aero) when the applkation d the potenfiaL Unleea otherwiee
vartable shunt has been stt to determine the con- speetfted tn the detail epectfkation or spoctfica-
stant of the gahmmeter. The reststmce of Uonahee$ tapwaterwltfbeusd The water
tha shunts and the calibrating redetor shall be Ln which ti epectmen te tested whtle tmmerseq
checked from the @ Ume. as well as the lead covered ad mulUple txm-
~r cable, ehall be at a temperature between
3. 1.4.2 Any other eultable qutpmtnt 10* ad 27” C for at haet 30 mtrutes before the
arranged to apply a voltage of not iess than that tes~ Tba ●rxts of the specimen 8hall be kept
epeclfktIn the de&aJl spectfkation or apecUka- welf above the surface of the water and the
Uon sheeL covertng removed from the surface Df the

FE9, TEST METHOD ST NO. 228

 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

lnsulstton for several inches at each em! in order seriec wtth the @mmmcter m prfxhw a gslvs-
to reduce surface leaksge. The ●nds of the speci- tmmeter sale deflectbn of on tie dlvbkq
men 8heU be dippm4 @o melted psrntfln or other either wtth m shunt or for shunt coaat8at equal
satisfactory materl.sl to mhhntae the effect of tountty aldthetiue ofvohs.geequal tothai
moisture tn reductng tnaulation resistance be- required tn4. L (lap4rqF@e 4.8 Md5ti
ween the covering a.rd comiuctor. The water in conetits Sasdsfordnmt*~ *ae-
the bath shall be ctlrred well to rnatnt81a a eumedto bethe1’8ii00f tbeisppedr9$tSkoce
untform temperature throughout the batb during the tothetotal twtst8aoe ~tishuat (Ayrt0atype)
test, The specimen shall be sssemtded in tbe test rm~y ~ct8d stm+es * galealumebr
circuit es deocrtbed in 4,6. . termtasl. )
.
4.8 Totiowf oranykahgecunwatto
4.6 The test Instruments shall be mounted grourd -m @ -ry, Irntrumoats, esd ell
so thst they wilt be reasonably !ree from vtbra-
mwcttmw thegahaometer defhctkw rmt
tton end wU1 not be tiecteci sdversely by kcsl correspomltag shuatsmetsntssbsll blW-
cmdttions. A typical test C&CUt~ 8S - in
Curded fitb the ~ bew9ea m battery
figure 6031, shall constst of 8 K!’OUWMgaN8no- lesd C @ eldter the speetmenarx opm
metsr wtth Amton shunt b seriet wfth ● suttsble Tbe ~~r Mkctioa aad m.#USctUIt :
swttc~ s kmmn resistance, and a battery wtth & *r tbe IosulsUon re8tstaaoe of ti~ctmeq
the negative terminal connected to. one Qnd of the shdlthen berecordedwfththe~ hdC
conductor of the specimerb The circuit shall be connected b one ed of the coducbr of the
completed through the inter ●lectrode or metaltic specimen at potnt 11. The galvsnometer deflec-
sheath which shall be &!ounded. tion shall be recorded after an eiectrtftcation
period of 1 minute. U the cm af 8 sl@e coil
“ 4.7 The gdvammeter constant K shall be de where the deflection ts SMS.Had is &cre&;ing,
determmod with the battery lead C connected to the galvamxnetsr scale readtq -y & tsken

f
grvufd at& The Qvammetsr shunt constant at the end of 15 seconds.
IS defil]ed as Uie vzlue of resMance required m

GALVANOMETERS

/
b GALV
SHUNT

I I

i+$fa-’
FIGuRE6&l

FED, TEST METHOD STD. NO. 228

 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com
.,

METHOO 6031

5, RE$ULT$ 5.L 2 Unless dherwiee specified In the detail

epecKicaUon or speclficatton shee$ the tempera-
.
5.1 Cakdatimb ture correction factor shall be aa Bhown tn tahIe L
U the measurement 1s made at a temperature
5. 1.1 Th@ resistance Of NW lmtitt~n Per other than IS. 6“ Cy Me mamkwturer Shall cor-
1,000 feet shall be c4mJE@d aa follows: rect the meaaurea value of Ineulattort resistance
to the restetance at 15.6* C. If the tnaulatlon
resistmce Js eqal to or ~ter than that
requtred when the measurement ts made at a
temperahre greater thsn 15.6’ C, m correcUon
where: factor need be employa& Tbe manufacturer
R = the r@stance of the lnsulaUon in megohms AalI damonstratc that the correction factor ts
for 1,000 feet. ●ccurate for Ma compouncL
K . tie @vammeter COnSWik~ dOeCrbd
il14.7. 5.2 Uniess otherwt,ee apeclfted in the
L - the length of specimen in feeL detail apectfkatlon or speclftcation sheeg the
D = the galvanometers scale deflection tn enttre delivery of thewire or cable shall be
divieione for tbe spcimem teata&
d = ~. @v~m8tar scale defhC~n tn
ctlvtmona !or the leakage readtng. S. 3 The insulation resistance In megohms
s = be shunt constant for the deflection per 1,000 feet shall be recorded to the neare~t
observed for the specimen reading. 10 percent.
s s the shunt constant for the cteflectton
observed for the leakage reading. 5.4 The test vt)lLIw imrl time of application
F . the temperate correctkm MtOr (able L). shall be recurded.

TABLE L
-.. - . .. —--- ------ .- —.—— --. —
,. . . .. . ..
Temp?raturc
------
● ~ ~ -“=-; “-;- “;;;*;,
I
:

RW TW
----- J .- .—------ . .-— -- i
.. . .. .
i—
50 0.60 0.79 0.73
0.63 ; n. Cl 1
0.76
I
:: 0.07 0.82 f 0.78
53 0.71 0.84 0.80
&75 I 0. Bti .0.53
54 J
55 o. ?9 0.88 0.80
,
56 o. &!2 0.90 0.88
57 ‘0.86 0.92 0. !]I
0.90 0.95 0.94
:: 0.95 I 0.97 0.97
60 1.00 L 00 1.00
61 1.05 1.03 1.03
62 1.10 1.06 1.07
63 1. 1s ~ 1.10 L 10
64 1.22 1.14 L 13
85 L 28 1.19 L 17
60 L 34 i L 23 j 1.20
67 1.41 1.27 L 24
1.48 L M I 1.28
68 ~
1.55 1.39 i 1.32
% ! 21:1 1063 L 46 I L 36
I 1.55
71
72
! 21.7 1.71
1.80 I 1.67
1.40
1.45
?3 1.89 1.78 , 1,50
74 23.3 1.88 I 1*91 1.55
75 23.9 2.06 I 1.59
76 .:: I 1.64
77 i g; z 29 :: [ 1.89
78 25.6 2*40 2.56 I 1.75
79
—80
26.1
26.7 —:-
z 52
2.65 i.-
-. .-
2.75
— 2.93 —. L I 1.80
1.86
3 FED. TEST METNOD STO. NO. 228
 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

)lETHOOW41
Aprii 14, 1%7

SURFACE RESISTANCE, FINISHED WIRE AND CABLE

L L S A manometer, of fairly high seneittv-

1. SCOPE ity ad imv~ the followirqf qualificatioae, m been
fraud to meet the accuracy required. The gal-
1.1 This method is Intended for use ta ?anometer conehat shall be rmt less than 50, 000,
determining the surface rcsishmx of the The mesas for imiicatiag the defection shail pro-
wire or cable. This test is aot required for duce a sharply outliaed idication on the ecaie, and
ehiekded wire. the defection shalI be not leas than 100divis&ne
(m8Mured from aero) wbea the variable shunt has
2. SPEC2MEN been setb determiae * mrutaat of the gahwJo-
metsr. The reeietaace of the ihuats ad the
2.1 The specimen siraXlwwwist of a 6-tnch calibratlag resistor shall be checked from time
Ierqrth of IinIshed wtm or cable. fn the aam@Iac m Utia
operation ad subaaquenUy until completion of
the test this epeclmenshali be tta@ed with 4. PROCEDURE
maximum car. to avoid even b siighteat 4.1 Tbe Mach specimen shall be provided,
contamination especially with regard to the near its center, with two electrodes spaced L O
muface area which will be under teeL M inch apart between their aearest edges. Each
cleaaing of the specimen is appropriate, it ●lectrode shall be cmqmeed of eewral turaa of
shall be cleaned by a distilled witer wash, fti (AW.G27 or ttaer) U&coated copper wire,
fdiowed by an Ieopropyl aicoiwl wash ad a ~ SMV _ b c~cumferen~ of the
eecoml distilled waler rinse, dried carefully epecime~ leaving a free ead of the fine wire of
in an ak ove~ md hamtled uubsequenUy with sufficient length lor eoiderkng to electrical lead
maximum care as previously directed. wires. With the specimen ad electrod~s thus
prepareri, the ●lectrodes sN1 be soldered to
S. APPARATUS lead wires in the test chamber, the test chamber
shall be ckB@ ad the test assembly Shali be
3.1 The apparatus shall be as folkwe: comiitiorbed for 96 bum St the epeclfiod relative
humidity and temperature. The surface resist-
a. I. ! A tpstchanlkr capabh? d ]ua.mtaining ance Lhlween the electrodes shall be measured
a temperahi.re of 2S” * 1S C ad an internal with a d. c. potenti 0: rsx iess rhan 2W VW.S
reiative humidity of 95 i 4 percent. A recom- nor inure than S00 volts, while the specimen is
mended chamber may be formed from a Ughtiy- stili within the test chamber, by noting the
covered rectarguiar @ass veoeel oontain@ an potential d Mica@ current after 1 minute elec-
maple re-rvoi r of satumted squ~~ Wlutiorr trification No temperature co~ction factor
of cbeaiiceIly pum poteeaimneulphate (see shall be applied. The ●wface resistance comp-
ASIW E 104). The climber aboald be uted W multiplying the applied&c. woltage by
18etruinented kI measure the reldtve humidity the meamred overall diameter of the apectmen
within the chamber, with the humidi~ indication in inches_ dividing by the leakage current in
visibte from outside the chamber. All inetra- mi~res, SW be -t 1*SS ~ ~
mentation through-leads into the chamber shouid specified h the detail specification of specification.
be euitably protected where they enter the sheet. ?oUowiag the t.aMtal redatsmce maaeure-
chamber, to preveat Intrrxtuction of aay ●rror me~ s & 600-volt (rme), 60 cycle potenttai shall
ia the specimen meaaurementa. The ●lectricat be applied betwemr dectrcdes for 1 mimrte. There
resistance of the chamber measured across shall be m ●rideace of distress ●ch as arcia&
each pair of led wires with rm specimens la S- bur~ flashowr, or dielectric
place, shall be not less tiu 1 million mephma. fdlure~ Mteradiacimrge interval aflSto20
This mmeuremeat should be made a!ter tba mhmtq followirg the potmxtld test the tiaoe
chamber has bees closed aml eoIWtioaed for reds-es Sbau be remeamued amiahailbelmt
96 IKW8 at95 * 4 perceat relative humidity ad he than W specified ia the detail apeci2icatioa
●temperatllrsofzs * 1“ c. or Qectficauolr Sheet.

3.1.2 Ad. c. voltage source preferably ● S. RXSULT2

tmttery of dry cells, timt wtll supply m voNege o!
act less than 200 nor mol, tbaa 500 Vdtal s. 1 Ualeea Othem Specified in the dew
specification or specification abee~ oae Specimen
X 1.3 A stadard restetaaco scale, ad from each Iaepectiorruait ehall be tested.
ebuntd of any suitable patterm
S, 2 The d. c. potential aad Miimgs current
S. 1.4 A wi@ble Iaetrument for meaeur shall be recorde&
tbe current that wtll gtw an accuracy of wi&!I
)0 perceat SXI a sensitivity of 1 percent of fkll 5.3 The surface resistance value and the re-
●ale defiectsom measured surface- resietamx ralbe shall be
recordd
FED. TEST METHOD S10, NO, 228
1
 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

METHOD 6111
ADrll 14, 1%7
—

VOLTAGE WITHSTAND, INSULATED WIRE AND CABLE

1. SCOPE 4.3 Unie$a’ otherwise ~cjfkxt In the detail

epectfksttoo or specification ~heet. the test
L 1 This method is tntended fur use in voltage et@l b applted for a period of 1 m!nutc
determining whether the tnaulation over ● mehl- from the Ume the ● pectfikct voltage has hccn
ltc coaductor wU1 wlthatand a ●wctfied voltage reached.
.
without rupture. The voltage wlthatmxt test
should he conducted under the supervidon of an 4.4 The t@ voltage shall have a frcquenry
inspector in the plant of the mwmfacturer of the not groaber than 100 mm less than 2S cycles and
Cable. shall have a wave form approximating a stne
curve as clocely as poastble.
Z SPECIMEN
& 5 The voltage wfthatand test maybe made
2.1 The specimen shall conatet of one or before the bratdhg or ftntahtftc c?watmn during
more coils or reels of fiJU@ect losutated wire ‘ mamfacture, but mt before any I-. ..:.nuing
or cable or an ~uat length of tnsuMed wire or procesm 8tn@o co*ctor cable ●all be tested
cable taken after the vukantzatton process trot between cmductor ad water tn which it is
the
before the braIdlng or fintshing operatiom tfnmcrwd Lesd-covered slnglo-conductor cable
shall be tasted prtor to the application of the lead
3, APPARATUS shea~ individual conductors of a multtple-
conductor cable shall be tested before assembly
3.1 The apparatus shall be aa follows: as descrtbefd for single conductor cable, Aftm
-~spmhly, the mult@lc-ct@uctor cable fiha 11 be
3.1.1 A suitable container equtpped with tested hetwean a sh@e conductor afplnst all
stirrer tn which the Specimen may be immersed other co:xiuctors or arranged in two or more
tn water. groups fnr testt~, these tests may be conducted
without immersion or with lnlmersmn USIIII: the
3, 1.2 A suitable gmxmding ehxtrde or the water as a gmmcl. After covering, a lead
cquivaieni (w-i)icij llhi~ h iii~ Suifhi ? d Z ktiii L’ ~c,.,.cre. ! t.ahl..
.“-. . .qh~!! I-8,J@s@d h~~w~~n pa(-h COII-
metal and not tneutated from the water). ductur ml the lead eheath, cm between each
comtuctor ●ml its cont@oua eoductors and to the
S. 1.3 A cirruit-hrcakcr and a suttable means ahea~ *thou~ immersion.
for hxticatiag the current flow III the test circuit.
& 6 The specimen stroll be immersed in
S. 1.4 A suitable eource of powor of not less water for a period of at ltiast 12 hours before
Man S KVA, tuving a frqucncy IXIt greater than the epptlcation of the fmtential. Unless otherwise
100 ad nnt less than 2S cycles per second nnd a speetfled in the det@ spedficatJon or spectflcd.ton
testing transformer, the output voltage of which sheet, tap wdrr *111be usetL The water tn which
can be adjustsd and whjch shall provide a teet the specimcu is tcsledwhile lmmcr.wd, as well
vultaga having a wave form approximating a Sine *u the Ieact-rtnwred and lllultiptc-(.nl~uctor cahk,
curve as closely as posstble. sl~ be al a tenq~rature of lx”tween 10C ●d 2’7’ C
Ior at least 30 muwtes before the tesL No cor-
3. L S A suttablc means for mcaeurhw the rection fartor fur temperature is to @ applied.
secondary or titghvoltngestdaof the transformer The routs of the specimen shall be kept well alwvc
Such as a terUary coU ad voltmeter, aN eiectru- the aurlace of the Water and h Coverhw iemovcd
stattc voltmoter, or a potcnttal tramaformer wtth from the surface of the havlatiou for eeverd
suftsble low-voltage hsibtor. hchee at each end tn waler to rwtuce surface
kakaga, U the irtaulatton resistance of the ●peci-
3.1.6 The assembled apparatus shatl be such men ts to be measured iWer vol@ge wtthatsd
that h capacity of the 18st circuit SWly will tem tbe ●ada of the specimen shall be dipped into
beadquatato matnmtn the required testvoltage melted _ or other aattafactory. mtertal to
wttbout overheating the testtng qutpment. mlntmlse tho eIfect of moisture in rortuctng hsula-
. Uon restatance between the coverm and conduc-
4. PROCEDURE bm. Thewater tnthebath ahaUbesttrreid to
maintain a untform temperature throughout the
4.1 The vokge withstand test ohall he bath rturhqf the tesL
ooducti on the specimen before the tnauiatton
redstance test method 0031. 4.’7 stsr~ at zero, the applied vultage shall
be hrreased gradually untit, the rqutred test
4.2 The test voltage ehd be as Spectfted value Is reached or unttl breaMowa occurs. The
in the detail spectficatton or apectfkatton sheeL 8@ed voltage shall be increased as untformly as

FED. TEST METHOD STD. NO. 228

 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

IUETHOD 6111

)
possible so that 100 percent of the rated voltage 5.1 Unless ntherwtse speclfled tn the detatl
Of the specimen Ls reached in tmt less than 10 specification or specifkatton sheeg the entire
seconds and not more than 00 seconds. Failure delivery of the wire or cable shall be tasted.
can usually be determined by & midden current
increa..e and may be indicated by the trtpptng of
5.2 Whether the hedatton of the enttre
a circuit-bre.n.ker in series wtth the test coil, or
deltvery withstood the spuclfkt test vvltage
by other mewm, 1! may also h idicated by a
flash at the point on the specimen where break- wtthout fat lure shall be recorded
down occurs. If other means fal~ the lnamlatioa
resistance readings described in method 6021 5.3 The test voltage and ttme of application
will detect the voltsge wtthetand failure. shall be recorded.

S. RESULTS
)

. )

FED. TEST METHOD S70. MO, 228

2
 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

- Method 6121
April 14, 1%7

VOLTAGE WITHSTAND, INSULATION, FLEXING

1. SCOPE mnn(hd th~ rquimj diameter. The name eeg-
1.1 ‘Ilia method is intended for we in deter- mnt t)f tho ~mrm shall be atnightenal and
mining the ability nf imwloted wire or cnble bent through a 180’ ●R in the oppiti dirvx-
to mithstttnci a limited amount of flexing with- tion. Tlto aperiman ahatl be atraightaned *
out brwlk~lom of the inwtltttion, It ia pnttictt- and tho double bend @a qeati, making a
lnrly ●pplicublc to rarnished cloth inattlated totnl of 4 bend.. of the amaaegmenL Theapeci-
wj;w ●nd cable with or without metallic men shall be m held that rotAtion about the
COveriugs. length axis of the-t donenot occur during
2 SPECIMEN UM bcndittg operatiom Aftar the M bandxng
21 The spwimen shall be a pieca of the in- operwtion the ~peci~ till be left in the bent
qwtion unit at leaat 19 feet in Icn@ paaition. The entire kt portion of the apeci-
.
3. APPARATUS nwn phta an addititi 90 perautt of the Iq@
3.1 The apprtmtns shall consist of tI mnnckl of 1hC unbent portion beyond each and of the
of t.hc Bize spPcifiml ill tho {Ictnil spceifirntion. “ am An]l h wrapped in metal foil or other aui~
4. PROCEDURE alh vnmhwting mnterisl ‘“(except when Ie8d
4.1 The test rn!tn~ and t)w Pcriorl nf time Shmthwl ).-
of its opplicntkn shall Iw m qvwifird in tho &l ‘l’lie beut specirn~m ehsll be aubjectad to
detail apecificat ion. the dtm~ withatsttd teat u dacribad in
42 Any ccnwring ahnll Im rwnm-ed frnm the method 6111.
sur~acc of tlm inwllntion of n siu~~]c Wn(llll+or 4.5 .1 fl:tt twin cable shall be bent on the
epecimen for n distnnre n( nhnut 1 irwh from minor :lxis of its crum aaotion only.
~Ltd!d. The ende As!] h dippd into meltfi[ ~ ~~~~?~~~
pamtlin or other atdtablo material to minimise U I’uless otherwim epeoifkd in the detail
the effect of moi*ura k #uring insulation *
spadkation, one specimqt from earh inspection
aistwwo between the revering and the comktor.
unit shall be*
In the caaa of multiple-oortdwxor cable the con.
rluctors shall be eepnrnted ●t each ●nd of the 5.2 Whelhar the inadation of the pcimon
apeciuwm and the ends treated ae described for withstood the apaoikl tAvoNmga without fil-
single-conductor CWMC. In the ~ of lead. Um Shall be recmrdd
coverod cable the lcm.dehall be strippd back for ~S3 Tho vol[np withataad of the imndation
s distanm of 8 or 4 inch- ●t w\\ end of the of the inttpection unit shall he & mvult +
Dpwimcn. tained from the apechan ktad.
43 A ergmeut of length of the apncimen 6A The teat vol~ time of Sppliutio%
ahnll be bent through an arc of 180° ~rcmnd a and aim of tnnndml ttatd shall be xwxwdad.

FEO. TEST BE’I’IIOD STD. HO. 228

 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Method 6131

VOLTAGE WITHSTAND, INSULATION, FLEXING, LOW

TEMPERATURE
1. SCOPE fmm each end. The ends shall be dipped intn
1.1 This met.lml is intended for u.vein dcter- melted pafiln or other suitnble material ta
mini]lg the ability of insulated wire and c@e minimk the effect of moisture in reducing in-
to withstnnd a limited nmount of flexing at low aubttion msistanee between the rxwering and the
tetnpemtum without brakdowu of the insula- exmductom. In the case of multiple-conductor
tion. It is pnrticulnrly applicable to mtntisbed ettlde the condnctm shaIl be arparated at each
cloth and rnbber insulated wire and csbl- end of the specimen rmd the ends treated ns de-
2 SPECIMEN scribed for single~onductor cnble. In the c.nse
21 The specimen shall be a piece of the in- of leadawered cable the lead shall be stripped
spection unit nt least 18 feet in length back for a distance of 8 or 4 inches at aaoh -d
& APPARATUS of the specimen. The specimen Ann be placed .
S.1 The apparatus shall be qa follows: in the low tcm~.mtum chttmher at tbu requirrd
S.1.l A mundrvd having the diameter indi- temperature for the required period of time.
cated in tuble L 45 Xmmediatcly nfterthe end of this period,
the specimen shall be tvmowd frnm the low
TABLE I ternpernhlre chamber and a segment of it-q
length bent through ml arc of lSOO around a
hfandrel diameter an multiple
of overall rnhlo dismeter mnndrel of the size required in table I. It shall
Th1c4Deaof em- be stmightenod nnd tho same. segment bent 180°
duct w inoulatlon u~ri@#OLp ‘ ‘“w in the opposite direction around the mandml.
(Whs inch)
I
mr mu
Cone
‘“c’or
‘1 drck overmll
[
mnriuclrtr
snd
T1.--,.~,.; n.,.,. eh.lll
A#**. ... ,u&, t4#,,.,, . . .. . .
]}r l)plf !!/ :1 I!II~fIJr)n UI!P .s()

that the time of bonding shall not excwd 0.5

minute. The spec.imcn shall bc hold so that
rotation nbout the length axis of the acgment
dm not occur during the. bol]ding olwrnt.ion.
4J Immediately nfter the second bending,
&13 A cold oFwnbm M s rafrigentor or
the bent specimen shall be suhjocled to the volt-
other equipment cspsble of maintaining the
age withstand teat as iiescrihed in molhod 0111.
specimens ut the mcpdmd temperature within
47 A flat twin cable sM1 be bent. on the
=2° C. (4° F.). minor axie of its crose section only. ‘f”he minor
4. PROCEDURE diameter shall LMwed in arriving IIt the size of
4J Unless otherwise specified in the de~il the tnamlrel.
specificatioi~ the specimen shall be subjected to S. RESULTS
a &pmtW of e~o=~e c. (14*=4@ F.) for
!&l Unless otherwise specified in the detail
● period of not 1sss than 5 hott= epecitkation, one specimm from each inspection
U Unl= otherwim specified in the detail unit dud] be tested
speoificntion, the test ~oltage shall be applied .S2 Whether the insulntifm of the spocirnen
for a period of 2 hours from the time the epeci- withstood the spocifkxl test voltagu witbont fnil -
tied voltage ia reached. Ilra shall he Lwxx’ded.
4S The Ust voltage shall be as specified in 5J The vnltagn withstand of the insulation
the detail spediatiom of the inspection unit shall ha the remdt obtained
4.4 Any covering shrill be removed from the fmn tbe specimen tesrt~l.
surface of the insulation of a singk-conductor &4 The tuw voltags+ temperatu~ and time
cable specimen for B distance of about 1 inch of exposure Shall be reeorded.

t
FED. TEST METHOD STD. ND. 2X
 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Method 6211
Apil 14, 1%7
*

INSULATION DEFECI’S, SPARK TEST

L SCOPE chanical eontad with the aurfnra of the insula-
1.1 Thin method is intended for uae h de- tion of the wim or cable undergoing t.esL A
twting dafmts in the inmdntion of innulatcd pi~ dkd spring, or the like slutll not be
wires and cabla Pmaence of B weak S@ in ●xwptnbb
the iumtlation rmlta in ● breakdown st that X12.2 If the link or bead+hnin typn of ohc-
spot. When breakdown occu~ @e spark td trode ia mud, the bottom of the rnetfd electrode
eqnipnwnt is amnged to either ● utomatically Ulcloaum Shall be Whapd Thechains abau
atop the coiling quipment or pruhca a tilblo hama length ●ppreciably greater than the
or mulible signal, lhm” the manufecturet% depth of the endoaom The width of the
‘) vi.srpoint, this method is preferred to the im- trough sN1 ba ● ppmximataly l% inches!
memion teut method aa it *tuta a con- greater than the diameter of ,tbo largest wira or
tinuous teat that can be wed at ●ny tirnc ttftcr cable to be teetod.
md~niaation of the inaulatiom lt i%in rffwL ~LZ3 If s heddmin type of t+rtrnda is
instantaneous, whemaa the standanl wdtagw uwd, the heads ahnll hnve a diameter of ~16
withstnnd test and insulntiou resistnnw twt re- inch. The longitudinal spncing of the chains
qllire Llle iimmmion of the wire in water for n &all be not. more than YA inch. The trans-
:uinimum period of 12 lmum It is not intended verse qmcing of the c]mins shrill be not mom.
thmt the spurk ~t completely replace l.he volt- than .% inch, excqx that, the spacintg mny be
n.ge withstand test nnd insuhtion r4@”ance ~ kh if the ttmruvverae rows of chnin nro stng-
teat. The rnelhod is applicable to single crm- @.
(luclor wim or cnblo size No. 6 AWG LIXI xla~ q-h,t ~lf.rt rml,. sIM1l IN. 1mori[ltd wiLb
srmdirr. s ~ttmkd m~ts?!ic screen fir Iim eqnivaltnt
2 SPECIMEN as a guard against contact by personnel
21 Unkws otkwirn aperifkd, tho qwcirnen 3.1.2!! Tho lCO@}) of olmtmde shall be snfi-
~hnll k the entire length of win’ or cde offered ciwtt to meet tho t+piirements in 4.3.
for inspection. .3M Fatdt nifpubq Jmicc.
1 APPARATUS 3AM A fault ~gnding device or system
W The nppnratun Ohall be ●n follmra : ahnll inoimln ILvisible signal, a defect rncording
SJ.1 spcrktf?m!rr. dvvicc, nmVor tm II utomn t ic stt~p (Im.irr. The
3.1.}.1 A tmnsfmncr of rndlickt enpncity .nrmngwmd All ho such that dwn the fault
to mnintain t.hc teat voltage speci6ed in !ho signal is gilvn, il will he mnint,ained unl il nmlh
detnil apecificntion un(hv all nomd conditions Uolly reset.
of leakage currenk 4. PROCEDURE
&l.LLl The core of the tinafonner and mm 4J The spark tmt ahnll he conducted as nenr
end of the secondary winding droll bn connected the end of the mrtnufncturing procms ns is prno-
to ground. tirdlr. pmfembly as tiie wire or cnblo is being
SJ.L2 A voltmctm ahll hew Iwatd in the cnt into shipping lengtlm
circuit that it will indkate *tr nll tim~ tlt6 4J The t-t ~ohn~m shrill be ns qwciticd in
Rctual test voltmgc nppliwl the detail S@6CAOJL
U13 The spark Mar shall not be simul- 4S The specimen shall be ttttnelmd to the
tnneous]y ronnected to mom thnn one cleclmde dect.rode and tho tktrode connectad to onc
dtwxibed in 8.1.2 Send of the tran..forrmv wcomlnry, Both ewht
w x’luct?od& of the conductor of the specimel~, the other sec-
3J21 An electrode which makes direct me- ondary 1~, and the transformer COIWAali h

FED. TEST MEIWD STD. NO. 228

1
 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

●
Mothodtzll ✍✎
✎

grodd Aditioo nM40tkn8haubelnade of the cpeoiman tmvd to s maximum of ~~

bekvrae”?~e ground of the oimductor at the teke- fact per minuta per&b of doctrode length
up end and tho transfomnar mmndax7 grod & BESULTS
The voltnmtar Ioatad in tbe *t till indi- 5.1 Unless otlmrwi~ -i&d in tl~ detail
oate the uwt potential at all tinws during the specificntkm, the entira delivrty of the wire or
- Tbe 8peed of the epecimeu through the tible ahsll be ~
electrode sbali be adjtuted DOthat contact be- b2 Whether the insulation of the entire&-
tween @e electrode and my point on the in- livery withstood the 8pccified t4st voltage with-
sulation of tbe qecimen will be tinteined- for out tilura droll be recordd
St kwt 0.15 seoond. W r8t4 limits tie sped $A TbO - volts@ Ohdl be recoded.

FED. TEST METHOD STD. NO. 28

 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Method 6221
“AwN 14, 1%7

DIELECTRIC STRENGTH, CLOTH AND TAPE

]. SCOPE mte of MY)rolts per seconcl, except that if lnmk-
L1 Ilk method is intended for use in dcter- dmvn orcum at this mta in less tlmtl 40 aemnd~
mi~lillg t)w nrcrnge vollngv per unit of thickness lho wltnge rate Rhall h demwscd so thnt tl~c
tlmt nn i]mllnting cloth or tape will withstand Imrnk(luw]l will rrqliim at least 40 smwnds. If
wit INWLt)rcnkdown. It is particularly applica- the ruuteri:tl fails at leas (han 5 kilovoll~ tiw
hl,, to vnrnished cloth or tap minimum time shrill be mthIrNl frwu 4) to 20
2 SPECIMEN avc.onda The brenktiown voltnge shrill be n-waa-
21 The specimen shall be s piem of the umd to the neamet 50 volts nnd the valuo re-
varnished cloth approximately 2 feet in length corded as V. Five teats equally spnced nluhg
) taken from a single tape (layer) of the inspec- the length nt the center of the specimen shall be
tion uniL Inada
3. APPARATUS 4.4 The thirknmm of .t.he spnrimon did @
3.1 The nppnmtua shall be ae follows: mmaured ns drecribed in method 1051 except
3.1.1 A tran,a~ormm with an adjustable rmt- thtrt orw thirlnms mmsurcment shall be made
put vol(ngn~s[ll,lJJie(l by n source having a fre- ncnr r:If:lI puwturo J1 SIII”h n way as to represent
~lll~tll(.y~lfQSto 100 cvcies (preferably ~ CYCJH? as C1OWI,V M pr=illle tlm thickness nt the ]roiut
.
nnd a wnw form approximating n sine curw of pIIIII=I Mro nn(l t hP WIIIIC wwrded ns T.
aa clomly as possible. 5. RESULTS
&l~ A Wt 0/ bkm fir POPPW C?P@WdPR1/, 5.1 Calculation. “l-lie dielectric strength
;wA ;O d~(~mcft cr. lb dectrodes shrill in! oi ,~lot})ur /ttlW nt tile poilit measured ahnll be
ruun(kld (I):1 r:t(lins CI[ 1A2 i]~~llnwi fiuishm] wirl~ cnlmlln{(’il n~ f{lll,~i~+:
a fia L po] isiwti conL:tct rmrfnce. ~iie~ shrill be !_?}9!wB~r!~ V
-*w*@\},t.,,l~e~r mll - —
r
adf-a Iigning nnd mounted ● xactly opposite endi whrm :
otlwr sn as to prmwnt any surf- burning of the I”= lb pmwltmln~ roltagwnt lbe pint nrasurc+
Tdtn
ta lm or Il:whovers. The electrodes shall h clean T= lb? Ihickna nmr rhe pdnt nf ym!!n?tnrq” mlln
and polished. S.2 ~Jnlees otherwiso nperlfied in the ddnil
3,L3 Clom~M and blnda of insulating ma- spwifkatirm, OIIp sporirnen from enclI iqed iam
terinls fu. iwh;liIg tile spcrimen. nnit shall b twat~l,
& PROCEDURE Xl The nvmm~w hrvnk!hnrn vollngv of the
4.1 .ipproximu(ely 2 feet of aach tape layer tape shall t-wtlw awwngo of tlm fivo Lvsts mde
almll be removed from the inspection. pnit. Un- on the spw.imew
lws ot lwrwi.se Kpccifid in the rlctn]l qwcifiru - 5.21 WIIWI rmw Iltnn cvw .qterinwn is Iwt cd
tion, 10 pw-cent of the tapes but not km than from ●arh inspectilm unit, the avernge brenk-
fivo tn]m droll be drnwn at random for teat, domn voltngr of tlw clothor tape shall be the
42 The sperimen ahaIl be wmditioned for 48 avwvtge of the IVWUltsnhn inwl from the speri-
hours nt n temperature of 2?0= 1° C!. (73.5S=20 mens t#ed.
F.) and a relative humidity of 50*4 percenk 5.4 The minimum brwkdown voltage of the
43 The edges of the specimen aldl be cloth or t;tpe shall be the amnlleat of all the
chmped betwen blocks of insulating mataride vaiues nvemged in detmniniljg the avemge
under s presmre of ● pproximately 100 pounds breakdown voltige, 5.3.
per ~uare inch to prnvent iiashovem occurri~ &5 The svemge and niinimurn dielectric
before puncture. Stnrting at zero, the voltngc strength of eseh tripe tied shrill bo recorded
shrill be incrensed uniformly to breakdown at ● to the nenrest 50 Toks per mil of thickness.

FED. TEST METHOD STD. NO. 228

I
 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Method 6271
Au* 14. 1%7

CAPACITANCE CHANCE W’JTH TIME IN WATER

1. SCOPE period oft ime, A M-font portion of ~ch end
M This nwtlwd is inten(led for use in detm. of the tqwcimcn slmll be kept vrell ubove the
IIlilling the cffwt. of moist urP IJn moistum- SI rfwe of tho w:t@r us lemknge insuhltioll. The
mistn nt insulnl ion Ihm to irnnmrsion in writer copncittiwr of the insulation tihall tM deter-
for vnryiug Iwri(uls of tinw by measnring tlw mined nt a frequency of either 1}000or IX)cyclP9,
ehnn~~ in the II id~tric conetnnt of t hn in.su- nsi ng a suihhle capacit ●m bridge, Tim volt-
lnt inn. ●ge impwscd upon the conductor shall be zuf-
Z SPECIMEN f)cimt to give the ~uimxl smaitirity of meaa-
21 Tho spm.imon shall hen l!hfrmt hwgth of umnuwt, oxrrpt that the impressed roltnga on
the inqw~lirm unit from which any roveriltg thn conductor shnll not be great.ar than 40 voka
ov~r the inrndnt ion has been removed; or the ~r mil of insulation .thickmgm. TIM c~imen
~imrn mny k t.nkrn nfter vulennizution nnd ~hnll hn imnwtvwd to the mme depth nnd the
prior to thn n~q}lirnt ion of any rnrorittg. tempcmtwe of tlm wntnr hnth shall be the sanm
3. APPAN.4’ITJS nt the t iwm rendi n~a nre taken aftar ●ach im-
3.1 The nlquimtus shrill be as {ollriws: momion period.

&l
3.1.1 .4 -g;f~?J,’ W?nrwww hr;tl.”” Tim 5. RESULTS
bridge d)nl! IW (wlml~lo t, I 1,,, a .,, I i~)g t]w 5.1 Calculation. Thr di~lectric constant
n
‘t cnpwitance with a limit of error of 1 n\irromi - (K) of tlm insulntilm shall be cnhmhlted after
crofamd. It shnil be eapnble of mmwuring tha each immemion period ~ follows:
utpacitanm of a spcimen one side of whirh is x-ltMOO c b% r)ld
gromvlml. Trovicions S]lill) IN? m:ldc for wwk-
wbprr:
rmrt.irtg nnd disconnecting tlm specimen ~t the ~=!~~ ~.~e!tanm !a m!erdnrndm nf th? irnmm=d
spocirnrn ml of the leads conducting tho qwci- 10 feIMof the qwclrnen
men to the bridge. ~-~ dl~~r “-r ~~ i-nlati~ l~b~
3.1.2 4 *fi~’..- Anth in vrhich tho sptwimen d-the dismetw mm t be conductor, hcb
can bu JlnUVM!4$d. S~ Unlew otherwise specified in the detail
L PROCEDURE specificnt ion, one specimen f mm each inspection
4.1 17nlcse otherwise speciiied in tho detail unit shall be tested.
apecihcntkm, tho speeinw droll Iw imlnrmcd 5.3 Tlw cnpneitirwe change of the insn]ation
in vmter nt room tempemtnm not lew tball 21° of thp. inspcci.ion unit shall he the result ob-
C. (70° F.) f! r a period of 14 duy~ tained from the specimen taated.
4.2 Unless dherwiw s]wifiw] ill tIw {Ivtnil 5S1 lVhOn nwro than one specimen is tested
qwci6rntinn, rcndin~m Fhull b iaktw nftw !?2, from each inspect ion uni~ tha capncibma
1M, and 334 hotm of inlnwmirm in wntm at clwtge of the insulation of the inspection unit
morn lenqmnturc not lm thnu i?l” C. (it)’ F.). An] I lm tho nmnge of the IWUlta obtained
! 4.2 Tlte dian~ctrr of t hr slmcimen over the from the apminmns teatd
insulntiml nml ovw t.hr romluctor ahnll be dcter- 5.4 The capnritnnce c)mnge of the insnlmtion
minod as d~rilml il~ mkhod 1o11 nlld Iho of the inspction unib slut]] be ~rdod to the
valuo rwxwded as I) nud d *pert irely. ll~ei neamt 0.1 parcanL
middle 10 feet of t,ho specimen nhnll he im- 65 The temperature and time of immersion
mersed in did i!led wa*r for tho required shall be Kuxdd

FEO. TEST METHOD STD. NO. ~

 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Method 7001
April 14, 1%7

CHEMICAL TESTS; GENERAL

X. SCOPE “ 3.1 The following generul laboratory ap-
1.1 This section describes various chemical pmatus nnd reagents shall be available. Special
test methods for insulated wire and cable. nppamtus tind reagents are described in the in-
Methods nre described for the determirmtion of dividual methods.
reaistnnce of coverings to acids nnd alknlim, 3.1.1 Apparatus
armor and conductor contings, mineral content 3.LL2 Analytical balance and weights.
of coveri U=%,composition of hmd coverings, and 3.1.1.3 Bat h-r, water, steam.
the qualitative identification of ~lnstorucrs in 3,1.1.4 Beakers.
insulntioll nnd sheath. The qmditntive methods 3.1.1.5 lkmww, gu.
include tcsta for natural rubber for the purpose 3.1.1.6 Burrttea.
of IImore positive identification. 3.1.1.7 Cheew cloth or other wiping cloth,
2 SPECIMEN 3.LL8 Crucible tong8.
2.1 Preparation of specimens of insula- 3.1.1.9 Dc8iccator8.
tion and sheath for qualitative tests. Threc- 3.1.1.10 [email protected] oven, uent2ated.
or four-gram portions of tlm inaulntion or 3.1.1.11 Filter paper.
shenth shn]l be tnken nt different places on each 3.1.1.12 Fliwks, Er?enm.qm, suction, etc.
inspection unit in the snmple. Each portion 3.1.1.13 Furnare, mufle.
shall be cleaned of any adhering material wltl 3.1.1.14 Graduate cylinders.
ground by pnssing three or four times through 3.1.1.15 got plate.
R clenn cold ]LAboratoryrubber mixing mi]] wit!l 3.LL16 Laboratory mill.
1110rol IS set close. A totni of :Lcieast ifi griIJ![s ~ 1 -.1 A..
U... 17 ]J;p?fe?.

of the ground material shall be prepmcxi for 3.1.1.1.8 T/iewuometi’r8.

the qualitative tests. Sprcllllel)s
‘ SM] be t&,, 3.1.2 Reagents.
from this composite snmplc for use in the ~uri- 3J2.1 A~*etone.
ous qunlit.nt ive t e.sts described in method 72G1. 3.UZ.2 Alcohol, ethyl, methty?.
21J If the uniformity of the oompoeition 3.L!L3 Ammonium. hydrozide, 8P. gr. 030.
of the insulation or sheath of the sample ie in 3.12.4 Parbon tet ruehloride.
doubt, n ground portion from each inspection 3.12.5 C?tloroforw..
unit shrill be prepnrd eqmrntely nnd tested. 3.1.26 Zli*ti?lmf trater.
22 Specimens for tho other chemicul te?ts 3.12.7 Ether.
shnli he tnkcn from the inspection unit nnd pre- 3.12.S l?ydrorh~oric aid, 8p. Jr. 1.19
pnred for tests as deacribcd in the individual 3.1.2.9 h’itric un”d, sp. gr. I..&.
te@ method. 3.1210 Lqdh /Ii /l&OXidC.
& APPARATUS AND REAGENTS 3.~&lL &d@ic acid, 8P. gr. 1.83.

FED. TEST METHOD STD. NO. 228

 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

mtlmd 7011
April 14, 1%7

RESISTANCE TO ACID AND ALKALI

L SCOPE 4.4 ‘lie qwcimcn htl! be fret’ from meehun-
L1 This method is intended for use in deter- imtl [iunmge nnd shall not be bent or ficxwl ~~uti]
mining the l=istance of the fibmlis coverini “it hns rwwhcrl mom tempwmtura Handling
and armnr on insulated win and cable to wide and flexing of the s~imen shall be reduced to
d nlkaiies. It is applicable to single and n minimum nccesmry in carryiug out the @st.
multiple conductor oable with non-metallic Tbe ends of the specimen shall he sealed for a
srmor nmis saturated fibrous over-all covering. distance of nbout % inch by dipping in mehmi
2 SPECIMEN pdin, .m~phrdl or other mtisfn~~w ~lling
21 The specimen shall be s piece of the in- medium. The specimen shall be dried 4C houm
spcwtion unit 12 inches in length. ur ti a constant weight: whichever is quicker, il)
& APPARATUS AND REAGENTS n desiccator over ● nhydrous calcium chloride nt
3.1 The appsmtus and reagents shn]l be as room temperntum The spocimcn shrill theti be
follows : removed from the rhwiccntor, weighed wii Itin 3
3.LI BaZunce aecumta to 10 milligrau minutes to tilo newest It) n]illigrsm% unri tlw
3.12 G]axx rontaim nf sufllf.irnt size for wcigllt rccordd as W’l. Four specim[ws All
complete immersion of the specimen. be prepnred rind-mm imnwrwl in em+ of the
3.13 Gias.i ~rmnemrk or other d~ricc for solutions specilird in 4.1.
Supporting specirmws so ns to pmvont thwn 4.5 The sjwcillien shall bc pl:wed in the im-
f mm t w+ing each othor or the snrfmw nf t hc mersion msscl nnd c[m)idetdy surrounflud wit!l
eont niner. the solution in such a manner that the scdutirm
**4
68.* %’tit#J’ AcUIAt f-qil~prid i?~tli ‘--”-r&,
%w. nul rirctll:tiv Ilm!IJ
● ‘“-’ - ~tr(}iiiiJit L?iiiViig t?l~ CX -
cnldjle O~t JInLIIIl:tlIIllIg tl]e spcrinwn :lt Lliu lMfiIIre ]wriwl. Al tho A uf the cxposnre pw
mqniml tmnpomture within =0.5° [?. (1° F.). rival, .4.$ [hc slh”cinwn SIKI1I lJQrcmwed fmn
3.15 Acetic am-d, 5 percent solution by the solution. rinse(l for 15 sccomis in running
volume. wtter. slutkon to rcmnv~ nny h- water, and
3.1.6 ~tdehm> hvJrom”Jr. wlurated SOlIIIirm IJny n~liwring wrfncr water removed by hlott ing
3.1.7 ,s,ti~,tfw I#f/dr*i//,*. N snlut ion. lightly with clcnn dmmhrnt cintil. ‘l%r q-nwi-
.%1S ~~t~lptturw mvd, h !wrmnt snlut ion by
mlw shall hn mighed within 3 minutes to thr”
Iwlltnle.
]m:lmst 10 milligrams :Jml 111P Wcigilt mcordwi
4. PROCEDURE
ns V-$. Tile fihrJIJs covering nml :irlli~w slmll
4.1 llJIless nthmnvi~ spcrifiml in the ~lol~il
)JO ox~~minod f~w visible dlxt of nt tuck }Jy the
qwcifimtt irm, tlw following nnlnt ions Rhall h
i.hemimtls nnd then stripped off.
umd.fnr innneision of the *1* ’inwii:
(a) I$omOal fuxlinm IIytlroxiihi w,lM i~,m The ronductms+ inmlntion,and insul;~-
4.6
(b) %itnmtwl rnh”iwm ltyllrmci(lv snlutinn. tion covering shall be weighed to the ncwwst 10
(c) Sulphwic nvid. 5 pmwnt solntion tly vol. mi!iigrums and the Weight rrcxmhd us ]i”a.
ume. & RESULTS
(d) A ret ic nritl, ~ Iwrwwt solIIt i{ul I)y volum~. 5.1 CMcnlation. The wiution absoriml by
42 Unl- othorlvi~ qnwifiwl in (hr detnil tho fqwcirneu shrill ho caimiifited as fu]hWs:
Rpeeifimtion, t ho qwrimcn shun ho whjwt ed to W,-Iv,
1° C. (7i2°*2° for * Aharwpchm,Iwmmt = ‘~pw: X lm
n tenqwmtum of ??”t F.)
period of 4fI* llL km. Whvw :
lV,-1 IIQ-lcht of tlie dry apecimm, granm
43 The contents of the immcmion mssel W,=tlte weight of the qwcimen rtftrr immvr-iou,
sliull he restricted 10 specimens known to be of pms
W.-the weixbt of the ennducb)m, Inwlntion nmt 111-
the same mmnposition. nutatlon awertng, cmmn

FED. TEST METHDD STD. NO. ~

I
 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Method 7011

62 Unless otherwise specified in the detail ‘be the svemge of the meulta obtained from the )
specification, one epecirncu from ench inspection qmimcme tested.
unit shall be tested in each eolutiom 6A Any attaok on the fibrous covering or
●rmor of the inepeetion unit by the eolut ion
5.3 The absorption of the covering or irmor
ehnll be recorded.
of the’ inspe%ion unit for the particular solu-
5.5 The atmorption of the corerin: of the
tion used shrill be the results obtained from the
inspwtion unit ~hnll be recordrd to the nenrest
specimen tested. 0.1 percent.
53.1 When mom than ono specimen is teet~ 5.6 The immemion solution, expoeuro pe-
the nbeorption of the covering or amw of the riod, and expoeure tempexnture shrill be re-
inspection unit for the particular xdution 81MM !Xmied.

‘)

FED. TEST METHOD STD. NO. 225

2 )
 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Met],,,,l 7111
ADtil 14, 1%7

ZINC COATING, STEEL ARMOR .

1. SCOPE previous to immemion in the copper sulfnte
1.1 This wwfhnd is intrndcd for nFSin (l~ter- ,qlllltion. S! nml:ld cnppcr sulfato Mlt ion
rnining thr llniforrnity of zinc rt)nting on steel droll b nddwl io the ixu~;iluw to n Iicpth nf 2.5
nrmor of inwlln(efi cnl]lr. inrlws nn(l thr (rmlwmtum adjit=ted to l~e C.
2 SPECIMEN (WIo F.). Tho hwned $inch km@lI of theSpeC-
2.1 The qwvinvm JInll k tlm nrmor re- imen shall k immm+d in the w-dutinn by plnc-
t-n(ItI.tl from II piww of t)w inspection nnit nt ing it in tlw rontor of the rontnilmr in n vertical
Ien+t(iinrhcs in ivngth. position. The specimen shall remnin in the aolu-
3. APPARATUS AND REAGENTS tinn for (ii wwonds without being moved or the
31” The npp~rntus and rengents shall be as solution stirred. At t.in en(I of the immersion
follows : peritxl, it shall M rmovd from the solution,
3.1.1 Chs,t mn~a;mr with 2-indl infide rirmed with running wntor wliilo being rvbbed
clinm14,t 4,)1 k+ :JIg Ao. 1~-ga~w mire and lightly with dwrswldll 10 rmnvn any lmwely
smnller, :tnd .3-inch inside dintneter fur wires n(ihering hkk IIoposit, and dried with cheese-
lorgvr thnn 12 gage. cloth. TIKI surforc of tlw spwimen shrill be
3.12 (’oPppr .Illfatl’ *(JutioTt. ap. o). IJ.W. exnrninwl for bright coppm dcposif. avoiding
4. PROCEDI.:1{1”: mIt:IIl of l[ICslwf:m(’ with I Iw Immls (luring the
4.1 I’reparation of standard copper-sul= clemling, drying, nnd Cxalnirling periml.
phate solution. ‘1’hcsolution shrill he pmpmed 43 UIIlms otherwise spccifiwl in the detail
by dissolving commercial copper-sulplmte crys- specificmtiou, on~ add it,ionnl immersion nnd ex-
tals in dist illml writer. F.nongh crystals dIoIIld aminntit~il d~nll be mwk ns rkrikl k 4.2
hc :1(1(11+ to inwlre n solutifm which, when vooled 4.4 ‘I”Iwpm-rn{ngc 0[ t]Ie tol:!] nnm of the
to 1P” (.’., miii hnw n specific gniv~t~ fif fit !:rist ~mimen =h!m-ing fixml myq-wr drpnsit shrill he
1.186. ho grnm of cupric oxide (CU,O) per determinmi by viauul examination.
liter nhall b tided to the solution for tho pur- 5. RESULTS
pose of neutralizing mIy free ●cid which may 5.1 Unless d herwhe qw-ifiwl in tlm detail
be present. The solution shall be diluted with specit%ntinn. tmn s~imcws frwn ench inap
water to Nqwri6c grayity of 1.186 at 18° C. (66° tion unit tihall be testwl.
F.). ‘W snlut ion shrill ho rwtcmed for em-h 5.2 Tho uniformity of the zinc mmt.ing of
qwimw tested. t.]m inspection unit shall he the ttrcrrtge of the
42 llw sperinwn shrill he f~ from mdmn- rwwlts oht mined from the qecimrms Ir+twl.
icul dJIm:lgm ‘Die surfiwo of onn wId of the 53 TIIe. imrnerwd nrw of the inquwt ion
speci:nen slmll be clenn~l for s length of at u]]it nhowing fixed enpper deposit nf ter ●ch
lemst 3 inflm by means of the anlvent, rinsing immersion of the inspection unit shall k m
with wntcr, and drying with cheMKwlotL The corded to tho ncm8t 5 pereent.
clmned purtion of the specimen shall not be 5A “rho number of immersions shal! ha
allowed to contmt the Imnda or foreign matter recoded

FED. TEST METHOD STD. NO. ~

 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

h?ctht)d 7121
April 14, 1=7

CONDWI*OR COATING, SODlll M 1’OLYSULFIDE

‘;illwl wntw. This soll~tion shrill be &msided

CSII:IIILi
Ni f(w fd l)ur~ww when the following

-Cyclrs :
.-. . ,.. - ———- 1
-- - —-- ——
M8ximum num-
hcr of nprcimeoo
Win, diaw%cr (idll tf~tod for 2 c@H
in l~#l~nSOM

. . . ... ---- ——. - --— I -. —-— —

o.vifimil]- .. ... . . 2
O.l WO.OMI. . .. . .. . . . . . 4
O.I-IN.WO.(LW1 . ---- .-. . . . . . . . G,
“M O.MCS)11.0:;s1 . ..-
11.IHWIn o.m I .
.. .. . ‘If’)
32 “
(u-mm)l) IMl:ul. -. . - - - 14
I
. ..- -.. .-— ------- —

1.2 The ~pwimen shall be free from me

chnnic:l I damage. ‘1’1),,sllrfncc of the speci-
lImII Auli he clenrwl hy immersing ill cnrhrm
tN 17dlhmidt! or ofher mi(ddc wh-ml fur nt
h$m.t.O minutw m{ ~i]JiIlg dry with cheew-
cl(tl h. TIN* portion of the qwcimen to be im-
Immd in t hv trst” solut ions shrill not come in
wmtnrt with llIC IUIIIIISIIr fruvigll nmtter dur-
ing t]]p I(+, Swlituu ~MJ!~Wl[ilhw)lution Sltllll
IIC t r:~nxfmwd to the routnilmr to ILIIepth of
4\~ iwlms. A ~iu~ilnr wnount of thp llydro-
t’l~hwit, will mlution shall be placed in nnother
(~}lllf~im,r, Iluth solut iow shrill br adjusted to
n teIIqnvNtIIre of 180=20 C. (G3”=4’ F.).
43 Immersion of specimen, lead-and lead.
●lloy-coated. UJIhws otherwise specified in
tiw detail qwifirntiun for lend- and kad-idloy-
t.ontd comhwtors. n ~! j.inrh lmqgth of tlw clean
qwcinlcli khnll k imnwmml iu nceordame with
tlp following cycles nt n tempomture of 18° *
u“ C’. (c)”=4’ F.).
43.1 ‘iI]irty HWIIdS in the sodium polysu.l-
tillc SOIIIIion. 3.13, w:ded in clcnn running
nutcr. nn(i shnkrl~ to reIIIOVPCXIWSwatw.

FED. TEST METHOD STD. NO. =

 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Method 71Zf

434 The name 4~-irmb length shall be im- be immemed for 80 aeoon& in the sodium poly-
memed in the hydrochloric acid solution, S.1 9,
for a period of 1 minute, washed in clean run-
auMde solution, waehed in clean running wat.a,
and shaken to remo?e extzm water,
)
IUng water, and shnken to remove excess water. 4.5 At the end of the above cycles of immer-
4.3.3 The snme 4~2-ilwl~ length shal] ngkkr sion, the o~imen shall then be examined for
be immemed for 30 seconds in the sodium poly- the presence of blackened areas resulting from
sulfide solution, wmhcd in clean running water, the action of sodium polytndfide. Blackening
cnd shnken to remove excess water. that occum wjthin 0.5 inch of the cut ends shall
43.4 The snme 4}~-inch length shrrll agnin be disregmled. Blackening of the catted sur-
bc immerwd for 1 minuto in the hydrochloric face caused by treating the specimen with
acid solution, washed in CIP:LIIrunning water: sodium pol@6de ebould disappenr when
and All km to wlIKw excwm wntrv. treated with hyhchlorio ●cid ltmving black-
4.4 Immen3ion of specimen, tin-coatet ened amns only wham copper is exposed.
Uniess otherwise specified in the dct.ail qeci- 4.6 T’ho percentage of the total arm of the
lkmtion, for tin-coated conductors n 4+@wh specimen showing exposed copper (blackened )
hngt h of the clcnn qxwimrn ddl be immersed aren) shall he ddem]ined by visual txu,ninn-
in accordance with the follmvin~ ryrlc= nt a tion.
tmllpellltura of lR” Z2” c. (I;3”*.40 F.). $ RESULTS
4.4.1 One minuto in the IIydrovhloric ncid 5.1 Unless otherwise spccitkd in the detrril )
solution, 3.1.2, wnshd in clenn rnrrning water, spwifiratinn, three qwcimens from aach inspec- ~$v
nml dmkfw to remove emws wutfv. tiorl !Illit dml] I* tesled.
4.4.2 TIIe srurw 4Y:-inClI Iwgth shall bc im- 5.2 TiI*s mli fwrnity of the routing of tlw
mersed for %) swrrmis in the sodium polysIIl!idc conductor nf (IIC insertion unit shall h the
Solutim. 3.1.3. w:mhed in clcnn running water, arom~q of (he mmJks ohtnined from tllr qwri -
:m(l slI~lwII to remove cx~:es~wntcr. mrws te.ted,
4.4.3 l’hr mnw +}~-illcl] lcngt h sh:Ill ngnin 53 ‘1’Iw imnwmwl nr-m of the iuqwrt ion
bv iir]nww~ll f(,r 1 nlir)litv ir] tli(~ I)ytirotl)l,,ric Ilnit Jjulvi]lg l.xlNIwvl q>!wr shrill 1]{*rerordcd
acid solution, vvnsi]ed iII clmm nmning water, to tim nearest 5 percent.
and A&en to remove exw% writer. 5.4 TIIO nunrhcr of immemifm ryclm nnd
4.4.4 The same 4~&inch [email protected] shrill again tmnlmnt.rlm of solu~iou shall be recmded.

FED. TEST METHOD STD. W. 228

t
 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Method 7123
- April 14, 1%7

CONDUCTOR COATINC, AMMONIUM PERSLILFATE

1. SCOPE 0.00, and dihlii~ h) I liter with distilled water.
1.1 This method is intended for use in deter- The ammonium pmdfut e crystuls ~hull cun-
mining the uJli formity of the ctiting on iopper tsin not k+ than 95 percent smmonium per-
couductom of insul:tted wirs ●nd cabk It, is SUIfnta. The tudut iou shall he freshly preparl!!
:1,~ldirnljle to hxul-, :Iml hwd-alloy-cmnted COp- ench dJLyand ahnll not b subject cd to tcmper-
Iwr. For determining the uniformity of lead sturee mbo~e38” C. ( W()’ F.).
or lcml-nl]oy ormtings this mcthud giv~ mom 4.1.3 A?elemmce oolor atandonf; copn6r aul-
conclusive results thnn method 7~21 nnd it fat+ammtwtium hydm-ide The reference
&JuI{l \m wed. iu cuss of dispute when the color standard solution shall he prepared by
two coatings are inrolved didving 0.100 grams of anhydrous copper
2 SPECIMEN sulfate in distilled water, adding 75 millilitcm
2.1 m qterimen shall h the comluctor re- of G p ammonium hydroxide, sJp. gr. 0.90, and
movml from the insertion uni~ Tl)@ length diluting the volume to 1 liter vrith distilled
of the specimen shall he llotmw]inetI hy suhsti- water,
tntil)g the nfqm~priatn vnlIle of K. givivl in table 4.2 Vnlem IIIIwrwi.w fqxwificd in the ,Iet ail
1, in tlm fnrmlJln: L-EK!?}, wlwru 1. is the spccificntion. the qweirnen slid! be imnwrswl
l+mgth in inchcg of tllq sfmcittm and l) is Lhc frJr.:1 period t,f 15.21$ minute nt n twul}ertiture “
diamtcr in inch of IIIC lwntcd m)dwtm’. of 31V’=10 (’. (M*=2” F.).
4.? l’lm spm:imcn shall he f~ from me.
Tm.z I “ rhnllicnl dnnmkw$ The qwcimcn shall ho
—-. .. ...— —... —. .--— .- . ..— ....-.
elt,:tnc~(l1y i?tlnlwsir~ ill witnblr sf]!wl)t for
Wirr {lLwIIL,t(.r (llll.ll) ( Ii
—— ..— . .— hot, ]6s ttlml ~; J]liulllcs tlld wiping ({ry W1tl\
0,4( W.4.Y?I. -. .
“1 ‘2 R
Flwm cINwwwl(~tlt. TIN VIWLMW1 >Iwillwll siiull
0.320-0.101.-. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . (). not bc bundled with hare h:uxls or cmmo ill con.
o.toLho.o&ltl. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 tnvt with fomig!l mnlter slid shall be kept
o.nwm~tn{t)o-..--..... . . . . . ---- .- .2
O.(lwn:ofwmfl. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . “il wmppw] in n clean rlutl~ until Ivquitxxl for
-— ..—— — —-..-—.—.-. -- ____ lest., The ends (If the specinmn slmll b coated
with meli cd Imrdhl to protect the expose~l cop-
3. APPARA!X’US AND REAGENTS
ixw. Ilt! llatttflill-[.ll:lt[~ll ivngtll stlnll ],ot lw
3.1 ‘rho uppwwtus IJNd J11.igwits&H Lmus
inrludod in detcrrnini]lg tho Lwgth of thu
follows :
speciamn. ~
3.1.1 (;Jn.sx 0-(Jufainrr of sufliciumt size for
4.4 The spx-imcn of the reqliirecl h.mgth, 2.1,
immcrsitm Ilf Itw spwouJwn.
shall ho inltm.med in JJtest tubs ill the quantity
3.12 Whit? twnw.
of tmt solution specified in table 11 for the re-
&L3 A mnbvmwn lwrsul~atc 8Abliok
quirw.1 period of time JJ1 tlm required t2nlper-
3.1.4 lhfmwnw eohr atanibd du.bk
4. PROCEDURE
4.1 Preparation of test solutions. The ----- - .——--—., —
test aolution~ 3.1.3 and 3.1.4 shall be prepared Quantity of
Wira JIMMWWfinch)” I.mr nohlt km
as folluvra : i (I,lilljljlera)
——--—
4.1.1 Attamunium pwmflfate noldiom ‘~he 0.460-0.321---- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
~mmonium persulfom aolntion ehall be pre- 0.3H.161-------------------------- 100
pnrrd hy dissolvi]lg 10 grams of c. p, ●mmonium 0.IOLW.0810.-. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . 50
persulloti crystals in 500 UJLof distillwi water, MMoo-o.woo.-.--.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . 25
adding 75 ml. of amtncmitlm hydroxidw sp, gr, 0.03H.WW- . . ..--. --... ---.. -..... I 12 b

FED, TEST METHOD STD. NO. 228

 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Method ?12#

4.5 The Specimen shall then be removed und

the color of the test solution rompod with that
of un w]lml volume of color St:Indnrd in n test
tuh of equa 1 dimensions. Tho discontinuity
~Jftlw co:tting is rqwesented by the intensity of
thr color of the test solutiwl in ndntion to the
intensity o~ rolor of the standard solution. The
cuhlr mmlp:u”ison shall Ite rondo hy viewing tlm
solutions iqg hwisc ahminst :t whito b:wk
gtTMIIId. lf nvniloble, a cdorimetx or qwctro-
phdomcter JXIn,VLw usd in umking the color
wmqwisw.

FED. TEST METHOD STD. NO. 226

)
 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Method 7211
April 14, 1%?

MINERAL CONTENT, COVERINGS

1. SCOPE mom over-all fihrottt)eovering?+ the mijteral filler
1.1 This method is intundcd for use in deter- content of nll the fibrons coverings 5h II be de-
mining the mineral content of the fibrous cover- terrninrxl in one o[wmtion as desrrilmd in 4.1
ings of immlnt ed wi ro and cable. lt is espially for th outer covering,
applicable to wire nnd cable designed to km !i RESULTS
weather-resistant. !Ll C81cttlatiom The rtlinernl c~ullrtlt of
2 f3PEC1MEN the specimen shall be calculated ns follows:
21 The Npwium dlall be the fibrous covm- Mineral eonteat of nb cowrlns,
ing with atllwviug compound t~kel~ from a piam -t--xlOo
of tho inspection unit rntleast 6 inches in length wbem:
S. APPARATUS I!”,-* U’et*l or mu asb ptas eracmle
$1 ‘l%c appamtutt shall cwaist of a 75 mL ~ =lhe weight d b WVIW matertdn plus tmtrlble
crnrible. 11’,==
the dcht ~ b ~b&
4. PROCEDURE 5.2 Unks otherwim speci&d in the detail o
4.1 Tlw spocimcn SIUIII }to plnrwl in n tared qwriflcution, ono qecimen from cinch ilwpecliun
cruciblo ( WQ), n-ciglml, uJI(i tlm weight ro- unit shall be @stad.
Cm”llwl usv-. mlr crwible containing the ma- 5.3 TiLe miueral content of the cof~’ri]]g o [
tcrinls fdmll be hentml :Lt.hnr ternpernture to W i~lspection unit. shall be the resilt obtained
remow mmt of the linrnmdde nmtwiul and
on the specimen t-
oshed Io b constant weight at about 600° C.
53.1 When mom than one specimen is tested,
(11 l!!O F.) in a mdlks furnnm, The crlw.ilde
the mincml rnntrnt of the cmving of the in-
shall be conlod to room tcmpernture in n clcsic-
qwctiou unit sh!d] be the ttwrqge of the wmlt+
mtor$ mighw{, nnd the m-eigilt reeorcka as W,.
The wpights slmtl be mnde to an acouracy of obtainvd f rum the specinmns tcstrd.
1 milligram. 6A Ile mined content of the fibrrms cover-
42 UAss otherwi9e specified in the dcloil ing of the inspection unit shall be recorded to
speciticnt io~ in cwnstnwtions involviug two or the netttwit 1 permm~

FED. TEST METNOD STD. NO. 228

t
 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Method 7291
April 14, 1%7

LEAD SHEATH, COMPOSITION

1. SCOPE of two Iezd ●nodes enclcqed in alundum shells
1.1 This method is intended for use in deter- 19 by 00 mm. nnd a single platinum gnuzc cnt.h-
mi~ing the comjiosition of knd shcnth of in- orlr 25 to 80 mm, itI dinmpter awl 4) to 50 mm.
wl:lttxl wire am] cAIc. l%wedums am de- in length to fit n MO-m!. ttenker. The three elec-
srril w-l for the determinant ion of copper, bie- trodes shrill be connected tos single bindittg post
rnlllh, nrwmic, antimony, tii~ iron, zinc, mid so that good electrical contact is mnde. !I’hd
silver. “llw nmount of Icml present is detcr-
minerl h.v (lifllwence.
Z SPECIMEN
2.1 ‘l”he tipwinmrt shall consist of approxi-
mately the following amounts of lead shenth
tikrw from the imqwrticm unit:
2J.1 (lqqw mId bismuth determination
tut spccifirll ii4.1.l.
21.2 -~rwlir, nlltimmly, anil tin detcmlinn-
●tions-511 grnms.
2.13 1rot) dvtrrlllinht itm-Xl grmlts.
2.1.4 Zinc dt~tcrn~i;~llti(llj—~~~j ~t”iil])c.
2.1.S Silver dctcm]innl i~m-1~} grnms.
3. APPARATUS AND REAGENTS
3.1 The itpparntus shun he .ny follows: UBIUQ
s.~.! -~ ,., ,Oi(. fJ,’\:;/l’t /r,’()!A f7,t>p(11’:ftll.Q. ‘1I)(? TUBltfG
A])l);;l:ltll$ SIII)’ITII ii) fi,w Irr 791P cIInll consi=t
of n MM-ml. Erleumryrr flnsk fitted with a
grmlllfl-plns9 Stollpcr cnmyillg a }j-inch gl:l%
distil}ntiol~ tulw, n thernwmtetw, IIIILI B hum
inside dinmctor glnss cwtpilhwy pressme vqrlIltt- SHELL
tor whif’1) extends to within $$ inch of t.ho bot- L MODE
tom of the Il:lsk.
3.1J Jlwtd.*, ghtse.
3.1.3 /hrAncr fund, approximately 5-cm.
in dinrnetcr.
3,1.4 ~oloriwwtt+c tihcs, !OO-m], or suitable
colorimetm or spectrophotornctet.
US (’omprrand air 8ou*.
3.L6 Prwm’lde, Gooch, with mdwztos pad. Fmm8 72UJA. Amrstus for tntorusl etwtro~
3.1.7 Cylhlr? of cm-bon dioxide.
S.13 Flmk, gl:ms stoppmwl iodine, WI-ml. anodes shall he made by winding pure lead wire, .
3.1.9 6Vt)*awool or cottfm 25 ~m. in diameter by 70 cm. in length, around
3JS0 Hydrogen J@’&& gsnsmtor. U-mitt. glare tubing to form s cmnpwt helix,
sol.] 1 lce bath. kaving sufficient wim at the top to form a lend
3.1.12 Litmu8 paw. to the binding pod (coppor ●nd bismuth). Fnr
3.1.13 Silver dcrtrolym-a appawtw. The stirring the catholyt~ the nppnmtus shall be
●ppnrntus shown in figure 7231A shrill consist equipped with a glses corbm-ew stirrer with

FED. TEST METWD STD. NO. 223

I
 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Method ml

ttmgs$tw ah ft ●ttached tos 1,000 r: p. n~ motor a blackening ●ound the colunlw When this
gm rrd so t hnt tlm solution is drnwn townnls
I 11Pr:tthtmll’. me nl~pnrntus shrill he eql[ippetl
dnrk layer hss eztemlexl ono-htdf to tJNVM-
fauths of tbe hngtlt of the tube dowv~ the
)
wit h :tu :inoly[ e reservoir for flushing out the
nnt KICrhnnllwm during the Awt rolysis. The
:I]Jlmrnl tw slwll bo equipfwl with UIInnodc of
column; the silver chlorido nntl silver AILII be
tmrtsferred to ● benker and cmerml with 1 to
190 sulfuric acid solution and 8 zinc rod placed
.
l)lll.(l cf)ljl~.r will,, ~ mm. in dinn)ctt”r, silwr-fw in the henkm so thnt the zinc ie iu crmtnct with
1111~1IIImnWmkWl) for we iu detem~inatinn of the silver chloride. The silr~r chloride i~ tw-
si lyrr. dueed to siker which shell be wzzhed *nd
3,1.14 ,u:)t’t’r
P#”,l?&*tor. rdumd to the inductor column for fud~r urn.
3.1.14.1 ‘l”h IS npparatus shall be similar in
l]~i~ll ~11f@l~ ~~:)1~, JInd S]lJLII(X)llff}J7ntO the
f,,1h,wi ng d inmlmions:
Inhwml dlnnlctvr ------------------
Length et rednrtor rel!tmn -------
W tn W mm.
120 to I:*1 n~.
)
CnwickY of r-rudr--- 73
.---------—— 50 to ml.
3JJ42 Pr#,pmz@m nf dtw wihrfor.
Sixty gmms ot silver nitrttte shall he diwnlvwl
in W) Id. of wtttcr and n few drolIS of nitric WRETTE
TIP MOLE
.)
ncid ridded. A sheet of medic copper, nhout
10 cm, squn m., shall be suspended in the siJver
uit.rute and the solution stirred mechnnimd Iy
until all the silver hzs precipitated, as shown by
the hence of silver chloride precipitate on n(l-
{Iitirm of hydrochloric ncid to a few n)illilit~’r=
uf the solution. The sheet of copper shrill k
rcmorcd from Limsolution and the l}recil~it.nLc~i
~ilvcr wrbahod by decantatioo with sulfuric acid
stdut ion (I t,o l!M) until ~ of the dissolwd
copper is removed. lVzt8r zhsll be addwl to the
silver precipitate and the mixture poured irtt o
the reductor eolunq the 10WQW end of whicJ
crmtnins n plug of glass wool placad over n few
gbs bends. Aftm t he solution has dmhed to
the top of the silver column, the silver precipi-
tate shall be wmhed rupeatdy with 1 h 100
tndf uric acid ul~t.il all the copper has been re-
)
mo7ed, ns shown by the nbmrwe of a LJIUO rohm
t-mthe addition of mnmonium hydroxide to the 3.L15 Tin reduction aPPIJmvtua. The sppa.
washings. The inductor ehzll then be tllkd with
I to 9 hydrochloric acid eolutiort. When not in
mttte *own in f~ 7YW3 shzu Oomist of ●
flnsk cbed with s three-hole rubber stopper
)
use. t.ho reductor shall km kept full of hycl ro- containing an inlet tube for carbon dioxid% an
.chloric neitl solution (1 to f)). ttir wnclen.sor, and a hole for n burette (glare
WWI RcqvwwWwI d i+hw. During plugged ).
tho reducI ton w terric iron by paasmg u hydro- 32 ‘Me JVIY~JltRldlnll he Rs follows :
cldoric nrid sfdution of iron through the mrluc- 321 A mmnnivw ,,?w)I dv~ion, ‘Il~e W] II.
tnr, silver chloride fomns at the top of the lioJl Shll k pt%pmd by dlsedvmg W gmns
column. This silver chloride dttrke~ knving of nmrnunium alum ( AlNH, (S04) ,.~tf J)

FED. lE$T METHOD STD. NO. 228

 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Method 7Z31

ia 100 ml. of distillsd water. (One ml. of the wmml” with water ●nd evaporating agsin to
enlut iou cont~irte qqwoximrkely 2 nig. of AL) demo white fumq snd diluting to 1 liter with
3.2# A tntnow”*mt Wimidc, 1 rwrwni wlu- Wiled wster in a Volumetric flask. This pri-
tbn. maqy mJlutinn shall b dihhed 1 to 10 for bk-
323 Am-”twn pwtitate, 10 pawnt mutk standards.
#o/ti”on, pqmmd fresh M mquimd.
324 J m.modwb nutfatc, SS prrent dv- RC,KWan
WoTQ?s M& *WOW
timk-l%e sohtion should m.mtain law than -<
mnFeaAtm ..
0.0005 pwwnt twannic. Fo;w:w ‘ .
‘.,
3.2!5 .4 ftl)tlO?N’U7?b thioeymte, @ fWTWt
dwtion.
. . AMALOAMATCO
snm
3.26 Ant;mony cMW mktion. The -“ @o To so mslo
●
Ml]lttit)n sIKJI & prqvnrwj hy ditvmlving ? gtnms
of nllt imony chloride (SM’ll) in 200 ml. of
hydrcwhkic aci~ sp. gr. 1.10, nnd dihtting to 1
Iitcr with distilled water. .SLASS WOOL

-- 7MERMOME7ER -CLASS SSM

.-. --a ToPcoGK

t
.-9 MIA
.@&lmT II
,- -v
?0 SUC:IOU PL49tl
IJwmu WID. Wwr rmluctor.

1
“As ‘ 32.8 nt’8 VRfl t A Colorhlw$c Iltandurd-1.
w LLAt ThaBO shndards shrill hc prquwd hy trans-
rust
ferring to 100 pd. tmlorimctric tuk, 0.2 to 1.4
rng. of bismuth, in intnunen~ of 0.1 reg., from
—. .. t.h stnndnrd snlution in 8.2.7, utl(liug 2 ml. of
---s00 40 pwawt pdnasium iodid% 9 ml. of 20 percant
\ FLA8u sodium thiocyanwto snlution, 0.5 ml. of etsrch
sol utio]l, nnd 2 ml. of 0.1 N tmdi~yn thiomtlfate
-- solution t.ueach tu~ diluting to 90 ml. with dis-
---- tilled water, adding 1 ml. of 1 to 1 sulfnric wi~
-.
-.-- ---- and dihlx to I@ d These StJU&X’dS
@ = should he pmpamd jti before the test is txm-
~GUM ~lC. A~mtw tOr dlmtlllnt~ooOt ●rDACIlC ducta4L
329 8mndard d &f& m)lktiivnq OJ
327. Bimwtii ed@e, dandavd 80&diaL N. This srhtion shall be prepared by dimmlT-
The solution shall be prwpamd by dimol~ing ing 64 grameof C8(HS0.), in SOOm.1.of dis-
1.0000 gram of metallic bknuth in s end ex- tilled wat.ar oon&ining 16 ml of sdfuric X@
cess of nitric ●
cid, sp. gr. 1,49, adding 20 ml of ep. gr. 1.83, and diluting to 1 Iitar. ‘The eolu-
sulfuric aci~ Ep. ~. 1,83, evaporating b dcuta tion shall be standardixod by either of the fol-
white fumq cooling, rinsing the sidtu of tho lowing methods :

FED. TEST METHOD STD. ?40. 22S

‘a
 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Melhod 7231
...\
S29.1 MethadA. ApproxinwtdY
of iron of known composition sbd be trans-
W ~ MIS Forw& add ~. ‘Ills Bohltion
ahaIl be prwpamd by miring 200 mL of fomnio )
ferred to B 250-ml. beaker ar.d &uhd sin aci& Sp.gr. 1.20,970 ml. of d%tilled water and
20 ml. of 1 to 1 hydrochloric acid and 1 to $?ml. 30 ml. of ammonium hydroxide, sp. gr. 0.90.
of satumtd bromine water. The solution shall =6 Fomtic oaid ddUIW wudb ddiom

ho boiled to expeI exct== bromine, stwmns The solution shall be pmpmed by dil@ng 2S
chloride solution (150 grnms of SnCl,.2H,0 ml. of formic acid mixture, 3.!!.15, to 1 liter
in 1 liter of 1 to 2 hydrochloric ncid) added with distilled water and satumting the solution
dropwiae while stirring, until the yellow culor with hydrogen sulfide.
just disnppws, and exactly I drop in excess. 33.17 Rykrdne m!lfl?t~,
The solution shrill be cooled to rwm tempera- 3.2.18 Llydmqw prr-”dP, .9 prrernt wZu-
ture and 10 ml. of 5 pnrcent mercuric chloride tioll .
added all at once. The precipitate should be
whjte and milky. (If it is grny, the solution
QL19 IZydwgen aulflde wad 8olntiom
Tho solutirm shrrfl be plqwod by saturating
)
shall be discarded.) One drop of ortbo-pheunn- @furic ●cid aolutio~ $! to 96, with bydrogeu
throline ferrous complex indicator ahnll be sulfide
added and the solution titmted with eerie sul-
fwe to a pale blue or colorless end point.
32.92 Method B. Twenty-the mL of 0.1 N
3.220 Iodine. 0. T N solutk. The solution
sliall ho pmpnred hy rlixsolving 12.7 grams of
iodine and 40 grmru of pntmsiurn iodide in 2fi
)1
arsenous acid solution sh:dl be rrch.led to a 400- nlI. of distilled writer. When solution is com-
rnl. beaker, 10 ml. of 1 to 1 sulfuric acid, 3 drops plete it sh:lll he dilutal to one liter and stored
of osmium tetroxide (2.5 gmrus per IIter of in a cool plnrc in n Ark botde. The eo)ution
0.1 N sulfuric ncid), as ● catalyst, rmd 1 drop of shrill bs al nm-larrlid as follmva: Tern ml. of R
ortl]o-phenarrthroline ferrous complex indica- tin solutiou (1 ml. cquir) to 0.001 gram of tin)
tor added. The solution shn!l l-w titrated to a shall b )Jipettwl iuto n NM-ml. flnsk, 10 ml. of
pale blue or colorless end point wllh the standa- sulfuric acit~ sp. gr. 1.t3. ~! ,grams of sodium
rd ccric sulfate solution. Clllurillv, 73 JII1. of ll~dmchloric acid, sp. gr.
3.2.10 Cilm’c acid, W percent aol~ltiom 1.]9, nnd 5 grnma of h-t lend ruhkd. The snlu-
U-11 Copper nitti anolyte solution. tit-m shrill he rwlucml and titrated with the iodine
The anolyte solution shall be prepared by dis- solution rrs dmrrihed in 4.3.4.
solving 4 grams of metallic copper in nitric 32.21 Irm ~ttwrdad wAItion The eolo-
acid, sp. gr, 1.43, evaporating I ust to drynessi tiori shall he {,rvprred i}}di.wolvitlg {).1000graur
adding 30 ml. of nitric acid, and diluting to 1 of iron (Nat ionnl Xhn-eau of Standards standa-
liter. rd ~ mplv R’o.55b of ingot iron is ad is fartory)
3.212 Copper urblfate dixnduni adution in 10 ml. of 1 to 1 hydrochloric ●cid and 1 ml. of )
The solution shall be prepared by dissolving bromine n-atrr, baling to rwnova tho em=
1.0000 grab, af metnllic copper in 15 ml. of 1 bromine, ● dding !M ml. of tho hyclroehhmic acid,
to 3 nitric acid, adding s ml. of sulfuric acid, snd dihating to 1 liter in s volumetric floak.
W. gr. 1.W, and evaporating to vrhite fum- $2Q3 iilanvanene nitraleb 10 pemcn4 oolu- )
The beaker shall be coded, the walls washed tion.
down with 20 ml. of distilled wster nnd the 32ZI Mrmyane.ee d?nt~. M ywvrt MIW -
solution rrgnin evaporated @ dense whiw fumes. tt”on ,
Two hundred ml. of 1 to 1 sulfuric acid ohall 3224 Md?tyt mvvnqe {nttiflator. The solu-
be added and the eolution made to 1 liter in a tion shall bc prqwcd by dissolving 0.1 gram of
volumetric flask. mrthyl mrnge in 100 ml, of distilled water ad
3213 ~o}’pf’r M!rlutc, 04 yr-nf ~chffon, filtering off nny residue.
3.214 Fomic am~, 8P P. 130. 3.2.25 Uetal’tio merewy,

FED. TEST METHDD $TD. NO. 223 4

)
 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Method 7231

ml. with distilled writer, cooled to room texn-

pwntum, ml titmtewl with the stnild:lrd sodium
t hiosul fate solution as rksrribed it~ 4.1.2. If
sulfur precipitant es during preparnt ion or on
etnmliug, tho snlntitm shttll bc di.wnrdwl.
3.X17 .~t~.~” ~6. I pi”wtnf ~n?~t[ion, prcpnred
frrsh 0s l,~l~l[itwl. “
3.Mti 7,1?d sJ/*pPJ’xion. T II o suslmnsion
shrill III’ lm’lwrcd hy Suslwlltling 50 grams of
tnlv ill 1 lit~r of {Iistilled water.
3299 ?,? *’/~rr~~ ,teid- chloridr-fr~c.
32M Trd ltd.
) 3.241 7?)0!.

%2.42 Ziw rfi lIIrLtr ●n?vfion. ‘1’IN! solution

droll be .prqI:Irrd dlssulving 4.WW grnms
by
of lmma zinc ill 200 nd. of 1 to 4 hydrochloric
:lcill mId (Iilnting to 1 liter.
3.2.13 7;IIfl tII&;Ilit!J # t n n ~?Q .-d t. ‘Me
stntl(hr[l.< +1:111 I)y(rnll=f~’rril):
IN+IWPII:IIWI ro
511 nil. r,llorit~wt ric tilhw ]ww( ituls of ll)e zinc
mlllti(jtl prr]wrtvl t) t-.) ~.~lll:lij)illg
in 3,-. fl~llll [).~)l
to (L1 mg. of Ziuc, in immwrnts of (MI reg.,
nml :l~l~lil}g15 1111.of 1 II) O lly(ln\410ric tttid
:1~1(1t:, 1111,of~!i:tilh.,1 IY.,I,,r t,, tlt(~ 1111,..=. Fir{,
ml of (1.7 prrrtwt !)411It%l 11111
fe,rroc}:tllifiv sultl -
ti(m dInll lti” :IIl~lIwlIln(l tlIIO wduriul) mcwl.
“J’110d:In(ltiI IIS shouhl he prqmred just bvfom
the test i~ cmldurtr~l.
4. ]>l{()~~~~JRE
4.1 Copper nnd hismut h iu Irak contain-
. 611:()) in 1 liter of f]whly boiled ●nd conlMl ing over 0.0’.’.percent bismuth.
dist illml witer- The snlut inn slmll’ he et:l IId- 4.1.1 Srwv’)’,r, q;>fi. The siz(, of f he qmi-

---
tmlizfwl As f(dlow: Trft ml. of Mnudttml wppr+ mei) U* II will dipcnrl on the rqqw wIl )lis-
mdf:~tr w)llltion shnlf he transferred 10 a 2:AI-1111. ImIfl I c(mre~lt nnct SIUIII b us imli~mtcd in bhe
wide-nmuth flunk, the ~lution diluted to 25 f,,ll,,u”irl: 1,,1.lr :
.
Weight of npcchnsn

1-
?ypa Of toad “ c!!per Ekmutb

‘
(%rlper Bismuth
dstortnination dcwmhmtioa

PwoPUt Percrnl Omww Gmm8

(%ml,,
c,n dmilwrizott id A --- . . -------- ~{)lto~~~--....-.
0002.%Max----, ... . 0.13 2n
Aml kml ----------------------------- 0. 0?5 20 K
U}llm.rh d-------------------------- 0.04 to o.08--------- aI 10 10
———

FED. TEST METWD STD. ~. 223

s
 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Method 7231 ,

mixtum of 5 ml. of !t pmwent hydrogen peroxide

mtd 2 ml. of sulfwic acid, ap. gr. L83. The
ekdrd’ dud] be well rinsed and removed from
)
the flask, the solution evaporated to dense white
fumes to remore ~!l the hydrogen peroxid~ the
residue roo)edf and diluted to 25 ml, witi die-
tillrd water. Fi w u-L of 40 percent potnssium
iudido nnd 5 IIIi. of a 20 pm-cent solution of
sdium thkcynnnte shall be sdded and the
eohd ion titmted with 0.1 N sodium thimul-
fnte. When the end point is reached, 1 ml. of
1 percentstzrvh solution ahd] be ●dded nnd the
stdutiou titrated to the diaappexranee of the
blue color. The number of milliliters of sodjum
thiosnlfnta uaod ehmll bo recorded u l?, (In
)
t Im t it rntion of anlutiona ron@ining bimmtth the
Stnr~.h indi{ ntnr must hc mhfwl ●fter the ●cldi-
~k of thn sodiwn thioqonntc and before the
Iwgitlhing of the ti~~tinn,)
4.2 (.opper nnti hittmufh in leads contain-
ing 0.02 perccn t hismut h ●nd under. A
q>l.{.illw~ ro)ltuillillg 20 grnms 4JItll be ntrrd for
Icnll slmall,s Ina(!( of wf~ un~esi]ve~ ]-d
nnd chmnirnl hwl. A qwcitnen eontnining
nlt(}llt 20 grnnw (If ‘ tic 11.n{lshwt( h shall be trans-
I’rrrcd to n (ifW Itll. ixwkrr, thu Specimen diS-
Q,,ltI.11. !IIII fm!)!~.r qlII.1 !lis!!)l!t!~ dp;)~~itci], a::~ )
tlm mppr tit mtod as kscrikd in 4.1.2. The
Ilumbr”r nf millilitws of sodium thinsulfate re-
4]llilwl to litr:ll~ the wqqror SIUtll be recorded
n~ fl. Two ml. of sodium thioeulfate in excau
sh;III lw tukh.tl. Mxmmf ed fiher paper shall be
ntltlud, lhp su]utiwl dihJted 1(J 1(X) 111~,in ● grad-
unf P cyli rider, nnd then flltervd thrlm:h a cloee-
trxture, dry paper, An oliquot of the filtmte
cotitniuiug 0.2 to 1A mg. of bkmmth ahnll be
trunsfcrmd to n 1~.ml. cohwirnetric tube ●nd
)
cliiutml to Ifx’) ml. with distilled water, The
drw An]] b wmpansd with n amins of fmddy
prrymmd bkrrmth rolurimetric et andnrds. The
pnl]mrisrms may be made by risunl drarrra- )
tions of the snlutions itl tlthtw plneml ttpxinm
n w]titu h:wkgronnd. 1f nvniktblr+ a mlorim-
cter or a qwdrophotometer may be used for
making the culor comparison.
U Amenic, antimony, ●nd tin.
4.3s Pvpl+on P,f Mlution @f aracniq
ontimonw. d tim A epicimea containing
about ,50grama of the lead sheath shalt he tmrta-

FED. TEST METHOD STD. NO. 228

s
 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

M9tltod7zu
fermi to ● MO-ml. Erlenmeyer flask and MO-ML then bdd over m open flame until the volume
dltollnitric acidadded. hemixturaddl haabaan duatdtOaboutlOmL TheameniG
#e heated gant.ly to dkdve the lead and than ●ntimony, and tin shall he debrmined as b
boiied to expel the brown fum= The oolu- ~ibad in AS% 4.53, and 4.8.4, or in 4.9.5, 4A.%
tion absll be diluted to 800 ml,, heated to boiling, ●nd 4.8.7.
10 ml. of 9 pement potaaaiumpemnanganate snd 49802 Am-’e & -w ?q( bwmJM%
90 mL of 10 percent manganeae nitrate add~ tibmt$om The solution froJn 4.q.l Rhall be
●nd then boiled. gently for about 9 minu~ cooled tmrmom temperature, the oidm of tho flnslc
The hot solution ebdl he filt.crad thrtmgh a washed down with !50 ml. of distilled water,
rapid filter paper and the precipitate washed 20 ml of hydrochloric acid added, an~ the aohl-
with bot writer. The filtrnta shall be labelad tion heated to abut 90° C. ( 104° F.) to dissolve
(a) and meervad. The pnp containing the all of the lend aalk One drop of m?thyl omnge
precipitate shall bo returned to the originrd inrlicutur Aal] be added and the solution ti-
Erlmneyer flask, 15 ML of sulfuric acid, q. gr. t~tecl with 0.01 2? potassium bromnta until the
l.tRLand M ml. of nitric aci~ sp, gr. 1.43, ad- red color weakexm A eerond drop of methyl
and the solution bettted ~ntly tn hui}ing to de. orange shnU h added and the titration con-
tiroy the Mcr pnper. The solution shall be timwd slowly until 1he odor chnuges to yellow
labeled (b) and JWJMWed. One-hundred ml., or or culorl~ fie titrnted solution sh~~llbe rw-
enrmgh tn rmlih-o 811of lIw lrwl nf :UI prrrent servcIl for um in 4.3.3. A ld;~lik ~lrtw[lfimition
ammfminm wtlf:~lr, shrill k nlltl(.,1 ti, thli tlltrllte sII:I1l k J,II:UIIStf+ing t hc wnc ntnfl~int I)f rno~wnts
htbdwl (n) whiht stirring, tlw wdllti(m mnlPIi nml following the snme prumlurr. The ntffuhw
to room temlw.mt we, filtered fl)rongh a ClQSC- of millilitrm of potassium I.momntc rcquilml to
txwurml papw on n BIIchImr funnel, nnd titrutc tlw arsenic and antimony (A) is equal
washed onto with distilled wnte.r. ‘UK: pwci - to the totnl ti~rutioii minus the IAwk t itmt.ion.
pitot~ of )WJd .wlfnto dl:tll IW IIisrnrflrtl. TIw 4.3 ? A )~tin)my fiy ?~ronl.otr iitra!ion.
fi!tP-!o e!:::!! !* nw~!rn!izpf! wi!!l nl!w!wiw! (;I:Iss in.:tilS Aa]l b utlI]fd 10 the t itr:l(e(l sOlll-
hy(lrnxide, lfi ml. JJ(l{leIl iu {xt”fw. Imntcd to Liou rfw.mcd iu 4.3~J uml lhu solut if!li Imiltxl
boiling. 10 inl. of 10 pmwnt amnwliium pwxnl- unl il tho volume is rmlucwl to 100 ml. The
fato ttddwl. IIIId then hnihwl vigor(}lwly for 1 solution shall k trnusfwml to n W@ml. glms-
minute. TIM solution shall he filtertxl through strIppered iodiue thk, the 500-ml. Erlennwycr
a mpid filter pnper, the prtwipitnto tmnsfcrrml fbmdcriJwod with 40 ml. of hydtwehhwic m“id nnd
to the paper. mshd four timca with hnt wdcr, the wnshin~ added to thr. imliuv flnsk. TWO
and the fflt rntc diwwdod. The pnpor nwl pw - ml. of 0,4 percent cnpper Slll[nto Sllitll Im udllc~
ripitnto shrill be tmn~fwmd to the snlntion in the snlution cool~ to rootn twl~prrntllre, 5 III].
the .500-Inl. l?rlalm~yer fhwk lnheled (h). This of metallic mcrmry Juk.hvl (if mcr(,ut”tuw clllo-
fhwk cmt uins nl] tho marnic, Ilntimmiy. and” rido is pmci] Iitated more hythw”l~lorif. ni!iil
tin plus snmc mungnnwe, led, anfl a tnm of should & nflckxi), ml the flfisk stoppeml nml
copper. Thirty-livo ml. of nitric aoid ftp. LT. tdmkml vi~rmwly for 5 minuks. The snlnt ion
1A, shall br ndhd to t he ~lnsk n ml the tmlution An]] ho dofwdd itdu t hf~ MO-III!. Yh+wmvyer
h-ted gently to destroy tho enrhonaceoue ma- fhwk nnd the mcrcmy wnshed, ridding the WtISIJ
tennl, mhling more nitric acid if necetmnry. to I Ifn snllltirnt. The solution sh:dl he dilutd to
T)Je &dution dm][ he wfqwtmlwl 10 ~hvvx!whito olrnwt :x(} ml. and. with nir bulddil~g slowly
fumm. IIfe rmiduo roolcd, 3 gtxni,q of potns. through it, hctttetl to !lo” C. (l!) in F.). Ttm nir
siurn bisulfnto aofl0.1~pwrn of hytlruzine SIJL atraam ~hnll he discontinued, 1 drop of methyl
fate adIhxl, nnd the sides of the flask wzhed omngo indicntur addeIl, nnfl t hc fffltlhony t i-
dowu with water, mnking uvrtnin tlm( no Ilydm. trntf3i slowly d M“ C’. ( IW’ F.) with U.[)1 S
zinv sulfate remaina on t]lc nvL]js. ‘1’JIc~lllti~n potnfshm hmntm ‘1’hLI titr:iLmi SoIulioll s]: II]
ahull be evnpornted to dense white fume+ and be nservcd for tin detcrminrftion in 4.0.4. A

FED. TEST METWD STD. ~. ~

1
 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Method ml

blank determination shall be made using the apparatw% %.1.1,900 ml. of water ploeed in the
JMIIWumounts of rrapywts and following the rmiving tkk, the distillation desk lwmted to
INL)IIL![)tWWdU1
l’. ‘h number of miHilitere of boiling, nnd continued until the tempmntmv of
fwluk~ium bromate nqllirwl to titmte the nuti- k distillwl vapor ~hm 105° C. (?21° F.).
nmny (1/) is Cqllill tLJ lhe Iutal Litmtion minus ‘I%P distillation flask s@Il be unstoppered, the
tile Illnllk ti\r:ition. hot plate remuwd, mid the r+dution rescrvc([ for
43.4 Tin Ly iwlilw /iJrufiow Thixty mih antimony detmninntiotl iu 4.3.0. The delirery
lilit.cm of IIydrochlwic ncid, sp. gr. 1.19, ●nd tube shnl] be rinoed into the mceivh~g flask and
sufficient 0.2 percent nnl inmny chloride solution thn distillate heated ntnrly to boiling. ‘I%(I
to nmkc the total nntimony content of the flask solution shall be titrated at W *EQ C. ( 165° *
equnl to nbout 10 mg. shun be ridded to the 9° F.) with 0.01 N potsssium bromate solution,
tit rnt Pd wdut ion reserved ill 4.3.3. Five gmms adding methyl orange indicator near the end
of trst lend slmU be added m-id ti:n solution of the titration. A bhnk determinant ion @hnl!
)
boiled gmt ly for 15 minutes. When the dep- bo mndvlming the same nmounts of mqents nnd
osit ion of nohla met nls is eompletc, the solu- following tbtt same pmmiurm The nnmbw
tion Ann be filtcrvvl through Mton w glnss of mil]ilitem of potnosium hrnrnate soluticm re.
WOOI iut.o a wille-mm~th fiIHI-IIil. EA*nnqw quiml to titmte the nrwnic (4) k eqtld to th
flnsk Pnjitni]lij]g s prims I,f twt lVJII1 nm! QI~ tntnItitrnt inn nlims the Mnnk t itmticm. )
gr:tnts of mt{ium cIIliwitlc. ’17w fl:~-k ~lI;~ll Lo L7.tl .1 Ptiniony d, fcrrn ;nvf;nn. Twn llun-
IIsselIIIIlcIl into N t ill rml~wtirm aplmmt IIS n~ drwi ml. {If watm shttll he nddwl tn ~bc s,}l~tion ~1
+
{Iew.rilw{ in 3. I.15. J4 strwm {*f r:lr)m]l in the (list illnt im tlnds rxwervml in 4.3.5 nml the
dinxi!l~ slm]l 110IVVWO{l fhr~wdl th (ln*k. tlm solutinn Imikxl t,} diwudre nll of tlm MIIS. The
solu{itlll ~mdlmlly lmtml 10 Ltililtg. nnd lMIilrII hot solution A:II1 1101it ml IW1mit.h 0.01 N potu~
for 11 I(NIr. ‘1110 llnsk stroll bu t mnsfmw[ 10 nn SiIIrII bmmt;tte. mlding mr! }I)f nrnngc indientor
i~w lxttll :IIItl (1111(WIIJIjII tlt~txi(](~ It. L~IIl,III.] .SO rw:ir llIP P!III I)f IIIC titr:~ti~jjl. TIII\ ti[r:ltwl so-
lht n!) uir wiii im sIIckud Iiit{.k IIItI) Ilw ll:I+k. iutlOll 41:111 1* IWSMVI[ ftlr tilt fldermiwtion
Tlto S(,IUIill!, JI;III Iw ,wJII*(l tI) ;IIY)III If) (’. III ,1.3.7. dl.i~’rtl]ij~:~lil~llSII,IUIn mwh;
.i hluuk
(W’ F.) II I~Ilrr aII nlmosphwe of mrbon uqing llm same nmmmts nf rmgrnts mId fcdlow-
dioxide, t h plII: JWl]fWPil frllm tlw tIlirll Imle ing the snnm ~mwmhm. w numhrw nf milli-
of I hc ruhtrnw ~tolqrr. n~I~l5 ml. of III pvrumlt lit em of potuwium Immnto HIM ion rquired
potnssiurn iodiile Solutiuli aml 5 ml. of 1 pcr- to titntte the antimony (8) in qunl to the total
fw)t stnrrll dutiw Iuldml. ‘l%! tip of Iho 1ittul ion minns 1he hkmk t itmticm.
b!lrottv rontnillillg 0.1 N iwiirw s~lntioll +Itu!l 4.3.7 Tin ~y ;nf?ifl~ titrvftiIJn. Thr SfdNtiOII
be imn)edinl~ly insortetl i)lto t}w other htdc of lvw!rv~ in 4~3.tJ~]m]l k diluted to Wit)ml.,75
tIw rlill}wr d q)lwr rInrl lhe solution titrntrd to Inl. of hydrochloric aci~ sp. &r. 1.J9, f~ildc’~,nlld
the first [wrnument d~utle IIf blue. ,i bl:mk tho t in cWcrminnt ion completed nn drsvribwi in
determinntio~l nhnll lx! mwle using the same 4.3.4, adding only 10 granw ?f sodium chlo-
anmunts of rmgentti nmi following (ho same rklo in~eatl of he !?ograms specified in the
prmmlum. The numlwr of millilitrm of iodine Jmoedum
mlution required to titrntc tlm [in (f?) is ~Nal 4A Iron by ~ohnetrlc or eolorimetrie
t.o 1)W 1.oQII t itrntion miltus tke Idnt]k tit mlioh metho~
4.3.S .4 rmnic Ljt diafiilflfion. The solution 4.4.1 Pnymdon O! xoludon of irnn. A
of nmwir, nntinwny, and tin hludl bu lwepnred qweimen mntaining about 50 giams of tbe lead
w dexribcd in 4.3.1. This nohtion shrill be sheath sMl be trmsforrod to a WtO-ml.beaker,
cooled to mom tcmperatmn, 50 ml. of hydro- UN ml, of I to 4 nitric ncid nrlded, the nlixtl~~
cl~loric nrid, sp. gr. 1,19, alul R to 10 grwns of I:mtd gently to dissolve the lead, nnd then
sodi urn chloridu Tile 500-1111.Erhm-
nddd. tmilcd to expel the brown flzme~ The Iwnker
nl~ycr fli~sk shall & connvctw] to tlm distillation shall be removed from the hnt platn, 35 roil. of

FED. TEST METHOD STD. NO. ZZ

8
)
 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Metbod 72Sl

1 to 1 sulfuric sold adde4 the scdution Wn’ed mination shall he made using the same ●mounts
through s clom-texture psper m ● Bachner of mqents and follow’mg the same procedure
funnel, and tho beaker and psper washed with Tit. number of milliliters of ccric sill fate solu-
hot water. l%. fikmte and washings ebdl be tion rwquimd to titrate the iron (A) is rqunl to
collected in s 600-mL beaker, evqorated to thri totalIitmtion minus the blank titrnt ion.
white funw+ the besting continued until the 4.43 hwn by cobrimetric mcfhod. The fe~
~olume of the sulfuric acid is mducad to about ric hydroxide preripit.cte from 4.4.1 sh::ll h
9 ml., snd then oooled to mom tsmperatum dixeolved in 20 ml. of bot 1 to 3 hydrochloric
One hundred mL of wster shall h add~ acid nnd IXWIMIto room tcmpmature. The solu-
the solution boiled for ~veml minutq cool~ tion nhnll he tranefcrred to a 100-mI. cArinwt-
made neutral with ●nmonium bgdroxid~ and nc tube, 2 ml. of 20 pemrnt ammonium thio-
9 ml. of hydrochloric SC@ sp. gr. 1.19, sdde& cyansts addwl, clilutnd to 100 ml., and mixed
Hydrngsn sulfide ahd be @ into the xJlu- well. Tho color of the solution shall be com-
tion for ●bout 15 minuttq the precipitate al- pamd with a standmd cnntnining a known
lowed to settlq and then filbrd Tbe pre- amount of iron. ‘he stsndmd shall be prepsred
cipitate shall he wnsbed with hydrogen sulfide by ridding drnpvrk stanrkd iron solution to
water snd then discarded. The filtrate snd a calorimetric tube mntaining 75 ml. of dis-
vvsahinge shall be baled to expel tbe hydrogen tilled vmter.2 ml. of 20 perrcnt ammonium thio-
m]lfide and the iron oxidkxl by tho addition eyw-mte, nnd 20 ml. of 1 to 3 hylrocl~lnric ncid.
of a few drops of 3 percent hydrogrm pwoxide. The sduf ion shall be mixed well nnd ~ornpnrrd
The solution shall he ● vapomted to 50 to 75 ml., with the nnknmvn boyvisual obwrvat ion ngn iww
cooled slightly, ●nd 5 mL of anunoninm alum n white bavkgrouncl. If nmtil:~hlc~ n twlnrimetcr
solution ●dded. The solution shall be neutrsl- or tqmctrophutmneter mny be used for making
ixed with ammonium bydroxidq uhiiqj 2 the color comparisons. The st.andurd iron solu-
ml. in esccs~ boilvd for 1 rninutq and t)len tion slmll 1~ mhiwl until the vo]or m~ttchw tlmt
mt sside for ●bout 1 hour. The precipi- of t lie specimen, Lringillg t.lm volume of the
tated iron shall be filtered on to rapid filter iki comparison IJI) to ii)fi mi. in ~iw iiik. A
PSW, W* with hot 1 percent ammonium Mmdc &trmlinntion shall be made usiqg the
chloride, and the fihute rtserved for tho de- enme amounts of mngmts rind f ollovring the
termination of xiac in 44. Ths iron shall be enme prncedure. ‘1’huJmJdwr of milliliters of
detemnined on the precipitate by the volumetric irrm solution required to match the specimen
method described in 4.4.2 or by the oolorimetric (B) is equal to the totnl iron volume milms the
method as dmribed in 4.4A volume of iron solution requird to match the
k~ lson * valumstrie mathud. The fer- blank
ric hydroxide precipitate from 4.A1 shall h 4.5 Zinc determhtstion. The arnmonical
d~lved in 20 ml. of 1 to $ hydrochloric acid, erhtion in a tWO-mL besker maerved in 4.4.1
the solution diluted to 50 B& ooolo& ●nd then sl&l be made just acid to litmus with 20 pwwnt
passed through the SUvsr rdlctor, SolJ& St citric acid. The solution shall be noutmliaed
therate of80mL per minute. ‘Ilwmductor with ammonium hydroxide 25 ml. of formic
shall bewashed witblOOmLof lto80hydm acid add~ the solution diluted to about 200 ml.
ddO!iC ui~ adding the SOhltkm in sevsrd por- and 1 mL, of tile mwpension ridded. The n~ix-
tinn~ and mllowing each eddition to grain to ture dd be heatsd to about 95” C, (90..0 F.)
the top of the sliver column Mom the nsxt is and hydrogtn aulfhlo pamcd thrnJlgh for 30
edded. TenmLof ltilsalfuricuddsnd minutes while allowing to am], The baker
1 drop of ortho-phenanthmlino indiutor sbsn shslI he set aside for nbout 1 hour, the pmcipi-
be added and the Awed iron solution titratal tite flltsred on ● 9-cm. clnse-texture paper, aod
with standmd cerio sulfate solution to the dis- washed with formic acid mixture mash solution.
appesmnca of the pink oolor. A hlsnk detsr- The xiuc sulfide shall be dhrdved from tho filter

FED. TEST METNOD STD. NO. 228

9
 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Method 7231

pnpsr with 80 mL of 1 to 9 hydroch)ork acid,

collecting the filtrate in a 100-mL volumetric
be dried to cot@ant waigbt at 110”=1° C
(MtP *2’ F.) ●nd vreighetL The weight of the
.)
thdc. The IWer pnper shall be wazhed with crucible plus the pcipitate minus the weight
hot water Bnd the mu+ingx added to the volu- of the cmcible is equal ta the weight of the
met tic fhtak. The solution shall be cooled to silver iodide (A) in the specimen.
room t.mnpemt ure, dilllted to 100 ml., and mixed 4.7 Silver by ●lectrolytic method. A
well. Au aliqwt corttnining not more thnn 0.1 qwcimw crmt l~itli:lg nhout 1(M)grnms of the led
mg. of zinc shall he pipttted into a 60.n]l. rolori. shmth shell k ttntmfcrred to ● 800-ntl. beaker,
met ric tubo and 1 to 9 hydrochloric acid added 320 ml. of I b 8 nitric acid addn& ad the rnix-
to mmke the total volume of acid equal to 15 ml. turehratcd on a steam hnth to dimnlve th~ rnehl.
Ttw mlntiort shall be dilntd to 45 ml., 5 ml. of If a dnrk xwidue mmnin~ it shall he tlltered off
0.7 ~~rcent. pot:minm fw-rmynnide added, nnd and dissnlvvd in 6 ml. of 1 to 1 nitric acid and
the snllltion mixed WPIL The turbidity diall
Iw r~m~lwed with tI aeriw of utwdttrds contain-
then mhld to the mniu anintion. ‘J’he solution
shall be bdrd to rxpel the brown f nm~ diluted
)
ing from 0.01 to 0.1 mg. of zinc.. If availnble, to hut 600 ML, and roded. One pemmt po-
a onlorim~ter or qwctrqdmtmneter moy be used tassium pertnnngnnnt~ twlution shall %s ●dded
for mnking the turbidity comparison A blank dropwiae uiltil the udution turnss prmznent
detcrrninatimt shrill be nde usiug tho anme pink color. Twt grams of tnrtnric Al shall be )
nmolmls of rwtpvks JIIIII following the snnm ttd(l(~l, tlw wllltirm diluted to ?(KJ ml.. and A’
fmmdura ‘Mo number of milliliters nf zin{: ]wntd tn nhwt S5° f’. ( 1%0 F.). The soluiion
s(ndnr~l mquirexl to match the specimen (.4) sltnll Iw clwtrfdyzocl nt nlnmt W“ (3, whilr stir-
is equal to tl)e tot,ol vnlim-w minus the volnrne of ring, ii) a 0.1 !Iorctw[ wpfwr nit.rnte eslution as
zinc required to match the blank the auolyl r, wxing tlie apparmtlm described k
4.6 Silver by iodide method. A specimen 3.1,13. TLe snndc chfinhetw S}MNbe tluehnd ●nd
cw]tninillg nlx)ut II%) gran)s of the lm{l sllwtth ~lt(~ si(lw l~f tlm Iwnlif+r Widi(wl ~hmrn mlcc or \
shall be trunsforred to n t500-mL beaker, 1 gmm
of chloride-free tartnric ncid, and 400 ml. of 1
twim~,Illritlg the dw.I rolysis. After M minuta ..)
of tdeclndysis tho solution shall be rwtoved
104 nitric ncid added, nnd the mixtnm heat.od from the beaker IJJ siphoning while contenting
gently to dimolve the spevimert. Whtm “keaetion
the stirring and ●&ling ~ liler of wuter. The
cca~ 10 ml. of nitric acid ahsII he added and
electrode shall Im malted in two su-ive bathe
the hrnting continned until all the metnl is die-
enlved and the brown f mm expend. TIM aolu- .of sthyl alcwhul or wthyl ●hwlwl, dried in ●n
tinn shrdi be cooled to rwm t.smpemtme, fihm%d own at 110”21° C. (230”*N0 F.), for 5 min-
through a Gooch crucibk, and the precipitate utes, cuolo& ●nd Weighed. Usually the deposit
maintains a bright siivery ●ppsenuwa throttgh-
diecarded. The filtrnte shall be tmnsferrad tos
600-mL beaker, diluted to 400 ml. and heated to oot tbo ● bctrolyaia ●nd idpure amugh for dire&
)
55”*6” C, (131”=0° F.). Five mL of 1 per- weighing as metallic eiker. If the deposit b
cent potaszinm iodide aludl be added while stir- dark, due to contamination, it shall be dieaolved
ring, the solution digested at 50° C. (MY F.) in 5 mL of 1 to 1 nitric acid and the silver deter-
for 15 minutee,nvoidingcwnt nct with direct aun- mined by repwitingthe clectrolfi% The weight )
]igh$ and then fih.emd through ● weighed 15-ml. of the ehxtrode plus the aihr deposit minus
(31wrh crucible. The precipitate on the Alter the weight of the clean electrode is qual to the
shall be washed twice with hot nitric tartaric weight of the silver deposit (A).
●cid wash solution, followed by waahii with & RESULTS
hot water (by filling the Gooch omcible and &l CdcuktfomL
draining by suction) until the filtmtashown no &Ll The oopper and bismuth content of the
color on tmatmont with hydrogen eulfidw The lead ahcnth apeciman ddarmined as described h
silver iodide precipitate in the crucible shall 4.1 shall be calculated as foliows:

FED. TEST METMODSTD. NO. 228

la
)
Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Wbcrs:
~.tbe ~~ ~ @ of pI#~~ b~te -
to titratetbe●-k
r=the gmrmcof-menk per ml. ofpohnalum bromate
~=t* ~~ght ~ * tad abeatb apclmen
B-the numkr or ML Of ptsDIum b?oma~ ~
to tkram tbe aDtiDoW
E=theb~~~ of ●tlmony per rd. o! potanlum

f)-t)wa@mtuxefmL of kdtneto tttrate the tin

‘ F-thv frratnu d tAa per mL of kdloe Solut.ton

&L4 The iron contant of the lead sheath

spqimen de&mined as bcribed in 4.4 ~,
G calculated M follows:
5J.4.I Iron by volumetric msthod in 4.49

lnm, P&tnt- ~
Axc x 100

5.1.4J! Tron by the calorimetric method in

4.4 .:; :
lrnn, ftrrmnt = L:& x 1~
lrllww :
J/ -- I tJII nnrnkr
Of ml. of iron sturrdamd reqnired to
mnlrb tho qwclnww
1) ‘th@ Crnme of iron per ml. of Iron standard.
I;= f h,. wt,i~ht l)f the lend sbmtb specimen.

%]s Tim zinc colltcnt of the lead sheath

~iwifnvn dctcrmitml n9 dwcribed in 4.5 shall
iw rnlrointed ns follows:
AXB Xlm
Zinc, permmt. ~
Whfvo :
A: =IM number d ml. OC xhe atnndwd regtahd to
match the wnwtrrwn.
/1-tIIP aolatton.
SMIJLSOf am pm ml. of zinc stnndard
U =“the weight of tbe kad attcnt b apvelmen.
5.1.6Tim silver em]tent of the lend sheath
sptx”ittm dete.rmind RSdescribed in 4.6 and 4.7
Bilail be culcldaled M f Ollows :
5A6.1 Silver by tho iadhle method in 4.6:
iluvez, PmstBt-A*~Xloo
wlwrr:: .
A+he weightof the Nw? Mfide P?dpihte.
(;athc wdght Of the kd -tb SPSChHi .

5.1.6.2 Silver by ohwtrolyais in 47:

whew:
A -lbe weight of Nte dhe? deposit on ekt?ede -
U =tbe wetght of the lead sheath 8-II -

FED. TEST METHOD STD. NO. 226

 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

I
Method 7231
I
S.L7 The lead content .ef the epet&em shall M The metal coxkmt (had copper, bis-
ba Calcddad aa folhlm “ o ! muth •rneni~ antimony, tiz+ iron, tine, or 8il-
~er) of the tthed,h of the htupaction unit shall
.)
bad, prrcont=100-(lwr’mt eapmr, blsmut& ●rnak
anttumny, W, lr~ 8111C,MId be tile aversge of the mndta obtained from the
slt~ xh specimens tustad.
52 TJnless otherwiss I@Afied in the detail S,4 Tbe lead content of the sheath of the in-
spwitlcnt ivn, two spwimena from each inspx - spection unit shall be -KM to the nem-n5t
tion tit shall be tested. 0.01pntwmtm

FED. TEST METHOD STD. NO. 228

12
 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Method 7251
April 14, 1%7

IDENTIFICAT!ON, SYNTHETIC ELASTOMERS,

Insulation AND SHEATH
1. SCOPE 3.2.4 .lf~rmmic Ucduter 6 ~rccnt in rnethyI
1.1 T1~ismrlhod is iut.entlrd for NW in i&n- ●lcohol snlution.
tifying nntuml and synthetic ruhe~ and 32.5 Petroleum ethr, boiling rnnge 30° to
polyvitlyl rc~iils n-hen each is present nlone in 60° C, (86e to 140° F.).
n compound. It may nko be used to identify =6 PA ,)18;1.
ttm mwnponent in .mrne mixtums containing 3.2.7 Sodium hydroxv”dc, 3 nnd 20 per cent
nit-m th:tn one type of rubber. Iu threw cwax~ eolut ions
espoci:l Ily in mixtures Trhcro nmbignrms colors 328 Sodium nitrite. 0.6 N solution.
●re At nined, it will he necuaary tn Imo qwci- 329 Mutton No. 1 ( p-dinlethylamine hen.
mtms that hnve been previously cxtrmted with .8WeAyd#-Ay&oqu/’n#Je mhl!tw’rl. one gram
wwtmw, of pdimet hylotninu benzaideh yde and t).01
2. SPECIMEN grnm of hydrnquinnne shall he lliswlvvd in 100
21 The qwrinmn slmli consist of at kmst Itl ml. of ahsoluto methyl nlcohol. 1-iVP ml. nf
~runs of tlw imuln:im or ehcath cmvpouml h~’(lrnoil]oric nci~ q}. gr. 1.19, t~nd 10 nil. of
t:lkrn from tile inspvtinn init. ptvpnny] nq d hyletw glyd All he n(l(lo(l nml tlw qwrific
dvw’ritnwl in rrm( Id 7(01. pnvity ~tljlwtd to ().851 d f!fi”,f 1°C. by the IId-
3. AI’I’AR.4TUS AND ItE.4GENTS dition of mcthy! nlcnlml or rt]~yicne glycol,
M The appnratus shdi he as follows: ‘1110 solution slmll be dored in a dark brown
3.1.1 BatJ.t; ioe. stemn, hntt \c. Tho solution is st nl.h for sovcrul
3.1.2 { ‘Opp’rU’;?’(. mfmth~ wh storwl ~IIvlrr ouch ronrlitirm.s.
3.13 0/.vtiflatiml fzppurotcu consist mg of a 3JL1O .Vohitiun No. 3 ( Metanil yeltuto).
test tulw. 1~1by 75 mm., equiplwd with a glnss ‘L’WIIgrnms of %ulium cit ratn (Xa,CJI.0,.
rondmwm t dm 4 mm. in outside rlia[nohr 1 IH,O), 0.2 gram of Pitric ncid; 0.03 grnm of
nttrwtwd to the test, tube by nwnns of s cork Worn. Crrsni grown. nnd M~3 zrnm of Wtnrul
stopper. Ih romkvwr tube shall k tmt ●t yellow shnli ht~disolved ill M)(Iml. of distilled
least 90° frwl hrll ●xterul ahmit 100 mm. hc- water.
yond the hwid. 32.11 S@ t@ paper (ehlnmpmnc-nitriie),
&l.4 E’rqwruthq dia~ 7(I ml. 3.2JL1 llendine hydmc]~h~c!.hpdroqui.
3.1S E~/ra~tion quipm@, Soxhlet or nonu vytting uoZution. Two am-l ono-hrdf
eimilnr Lype. grams of twnzidine di-bydrochhwido shall be
3J.6 Funnc2, sepamtr)ry, 250 ml. diasnlvod in n mixture of 600 ml. of mothy] td-
3,1.7 /iaating ehment; electric+ or flnme- cnhol and 600 ml. of water, and 10 ml. of 0.1
hented knife, iron, or file. per cent nqueous solution of hydroquinone
S.14 [email protected] ap-. whlel The solution uhall be stored in n dark
3.1S 7cRt tube~ la hy 150 mm. rmd 10 by brown hnttle. lf prntfwted from light and air
76 mm. the mlution remnimq stable for eoveml months.
32 Re8genta ‘h magenta shall be to A pmcipitnte that fcwma on standkg does not
- /lIowx : affect the efficiency of the mlutiom
32.1 ?l.napAtAol in s percent sodium hy- 3.2112 ~ed WV. ‘hvo grams bf CllpI’iC
drnxido solution. aostate and 0.!2!!gram of lfetanil yellow Bhnll
3.23 Brom&w be dissolved in 600 mL of methyl alcohol. F’il-
323 iodine, 0.02 grun per liter of carbon tar pnpar shall ha impregnated with the aohl-
tet.rschloride. tion, dried, and then cut into strips b form tat

FED. TEST METllOD S7’G, LC, 228

 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Method 72S1

)
paper. To conduct the tut this paper till be ~ PROCEDURE
moistened with the wetting solution in 8Q11.1. 4J PWOl@U tak A specimen contain-
32.12 spot tale piape? (Polyieohutykw). ing about 0.5 grum of the rubber cnmpcwd,
3.2.121 Mercur& od$e-eulfurie acid lrwtting ftw from adhering fnbrirs or other mnterial,
sozution Eiye grams of yellow mercuric oxide shall ho trmwfermd to the distillation tube of
shall ~ ridded @s mixtura of 15 ml.. of sulfuric the dietillntifm ●pparat us %1.S ●nd a condmwr
acid, sp. gr. 1.83, in 80 mL of watar, and the tube sttached. Tho distillnt ion t ulrn ntmll be
mixture boiled until the mercuric oxide baa fextened in position by mennn of a chmp and
diaschd. The eolution ehatl be coded and di- then hrated with n very low tlams until the
luted to l(Ki mL with diatilhd wstar. specinm lwgins to deeompae. When vnpor
32122 Teat appears in tlw tube,the end of tho condeneer
+%%e:%ig%x%
shall be HiOIStO tbe eha]l be immemrd in 1.5 ml of eulut ion
ecribd in 8M!M and then cut into xtripa No. ~ contained in ● M tub and the distilla- )
3ZJ3 spot ted ppef (A%w’-etymne). tion continmd until it hae tin determined
3JM3.1 %Abvao& 40 i &wornvlm nol whet }wr a rolor chnnga will derclop. TIM oon-
wetti ng 8ohJtim ‘T%irty gram of trichlo~ t.iemuwhh rdmll then I* rwnnml kom eolution
acetic acid droll -be dimmbod in impropanol No. 2 nnd tm]ufcr~i ton Remnd N!CCiTingtllh
)
●nd the solution diluted to 100 mL with the contninillg I.fi ml. of wht(ion No. 1, -ml the
anme solvenk The eolution should not be al- distillation rImt inlml flw a [mr minuios. Tho
.
lowed to come in direet contact with the skin. disli]ln(e in the two recciring tubee slmll lm
P
3213Jl Tent paw . The eolution shall be roolcd sh:lkrn. TINI tub ccmtnining eolu-
n~d
prepared by dissolving 8 gmme of p-dimethyln- tmn No. J nhall IM cxnminexl to determina
mine benxaldehyde ●l 0.05 grout of hydro- wh(~tlier the (lrnps of distillate sink or tlont on
quinone in 100 ml. of ethyl ether. Filter pnpers
solution No. 1. Both aolutiotrs No. 1 ●nd
ohall he irnpreegnnted in t!~is du!iou, dried, nnd
cut into strips, The paps shall be stored in a
No. 2 shl I Iw Awwxl
Mulion NrJ. 1 dtnll k
for nn,v rohw rhnp.
tmnsfrrrd ton 16- by
)
brown glue bottle. Pmpera I$omd under aurh
condition are stable fnr eewvaI months, but M()-mm. tmt tub, 5 ml, of dxvdute mdtyl nleo-
lose their eilkiency if ctored in the light, Ta Im] nddw{, the mixtum bested on writer bath
conduct the t.cut for natuml rubber rmd atyrene nt 100” C. (212° k’.) for 3 miwltm+ nnd nnyoolor
polymer them pap shall be moistened with thnt dcvclrqm mcm+d. All ohewations made
the wetting eolution deecrm m 3JL13.L WI both snhltinns RhaM hr rrrnrd{’d nml the ma-
&2914 %oj gromwod. , terinl cla~.ified hy menne of tnbie I.
..

- —---- -— .- .-—- T-
-.-— ..— )
Soiulion No. 1 pdwim”rh.3
Ms@Al
dor
fniuai
)
BIank Palo yditw I%ioyniiow Own.
Polyvinyl ddor+b Yellow Yeiinw M.
Cbiom$mae . his yellow$- l-h.
lwtdie
Cbiomprsndtrsb
ora2”Kd
m.
Ned
Do.
mom
Yaibw to rd.
Stpm Yeiiowgmmb Gmn Cheri.
Natural robber Bmn Vkbt Mlw no.
&o at~nO-50 rubbur Ouvo gmoll Gwn the Do.
Pot@eobutybne Yoiiow(drophrt floats] Peie blue gmcm m.
PolyTiIlyl Mew Youow MO yotiow gmon Yellow.
— ——
 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

42 spot kw9
421 Chborrrwwru “t.riie 8Vot teat. A lMLt-
iJIgrlwnent such ns ● lmi f% file, or iron sbnll
k hwlted, either chxtricslly or Lrymeats of a
gns flwu~ to a temperature su5cient to produoe
~h.tl~ofllnms bllt ~Jot ]iigll enough to ibmi~ t}~e
— IIIIIIIW slwcimrn. T)m ruihr trpccimett slmll
be lmwd ngninst thr hentin: element until
fmnrs arc Iihernted. A N rip-ofthe ehloroprenc-
nit rilo t M. lmpor Am II be lnoistwml with tlic
Imlzilli)m i)y(lnwlllori~lo.]~ydql~ il)(lno wetting
ftoIII~i~jl~ ;III~l t]lcli Iwhl jn a pnmllc] position
~}utIII ~ I)im. nbovc tho surface of the herding
) unit, which is pmrssed ngainst the rubber qwci-
nwn Imtil s gmxl color is probed on the side
oft Iw pnper f sting the fumes without srorching
the IMpvr or lho impmgnnting matM+rLlrL

TAttI.E 114
----- -. —-.
i
Materiil Chkwqmmo-nit rilo trst ~ ]’,,lyidm,tl.} 161M lost
ltutllw~r-ql yrQIIP
t-l
.—. - ..-. — —. —.-—. . I. . .
.. . ----- —----- --- .- — -— .-. -—.
—.-—

CMoruprmw Rod lhnk I Grum.

~ itrik } (: f?v.1, I’filf, 17!, I, Yrllow grrrm.

Ctllornpmilo-tli l.rii(. mid,um i l!er!/srw!?

I
Do. [ ( ;rf.P,,
t
Pdyl.wlmtylcltc ]hnk 1 } Vll,,lr I’:111, h: fmler.
NutIrai rubber I I’lrlmll nhle. .
Stymlle k: b. I{IIW grr!en.
i 1I I
-.. — .—. —.- .— —- .-—I —— . —.— --- .- -- .--. .— -
I JIJsrik ahr tosti IUBy he @e hrtmn mthw t hntl wI( Awn.

42.5 Mizturcs 01 ?wwr COrnpovrnd~.

(%loroprmw-nitnle mixturm enllt.t~i~lil)g trmro
thnn 3~ lmrcent of chlornprone rubber give n
pmwn color on the wet *Nmtion and a red color
on th* t?ry portion of tho spot t~ prrpcr wlwn
testntl trs dwwriherl in 4.2.1, Chlwnpreno in
quunt it ins less thnn 30 pemant cannot umml!y
be del mted in this mixtum. Chlor6pmne
pdynwm will not normally mmqk natuml or
polyisolmtylmw olnstome~ but may rwwk a
tiyrene polymer. Nitrile polymer will m:tsk
st.yreue RA Jnny nIso c:tuse snmo ditlicult y in do-
tAing n~turnl rubhrv. Pldyisnbutyleno poly-
mers tmrmnlly cm be dmtocted in thn prrsmce
of modernte nmmmtg of tho other four rln+
tomers. ‘he Chloroprunc-nitrile test is not
mrurked by th~ preaeoce of the 01hcr tjmeu mutu.
riuls. Styrrne rubber is quite difficult to detect

.
Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

.-
warmed to remora tho cmbon tetmchloride. A
bluo or rwl-tiobt odor indicntett. the prtmence
of natural robber. (Oil-type reclshned rubber
gives this fast but alkali-type mwlnirn does ~
Polyi%prene ah givee i poeitive tcsL)
4.X3.3 rf~r ,r ~,h’ f,,r R+VWW* ;Sdfpwrn. The
prtqtlre of stymue polsniwn nl~y bt) further
mufirnwd hy I itis trst, One or two -pros of the
sjmimcn Hlmll he extrncted with scetone and
driwi n~ desrritwd in 4.8.3.2 The dried speci-
men slmll be plnced iu a xmnll flask 20 mL of
nit rir ncid, sp. gr. 1.43, added nnd then rdluxed
for 1 hour. Tm refluxcd mistnre ahull bo di-
)utcd by pouring into NM ml. of water, then
ext m rted with 50-, 25. and 25-nA portions of
cl her. llM ethw extrncta ehall & oombkd,
wnshrd twice with IS nd. of water and the wnsh-
i)lgs rejrcted. The dlwr solution nhdl & ex-
trnrtm! with threw lfi-n)l. II(wt ions of” 5 perent
~nliltllt hy,irt)si~lc. f,dl~meJ by extinction with -
~1) ,,, !. “f ~J-OIVr, nnt[ tho e[lwr discnrded. The
s(~{lilllll l~ylrosido nnd wrwhing shrill be
extracts
c(mlbi 11011,f hci, ncid with hy&ochlo-
nmde just
ric aci~l, sp. gr. 1.19, :Iml ?~t ml. added in cxces
Tile c~llllfi~)n -i, Ill IW lICfiIId {m tlIc stmm bath
r,itti tIii iu !K,IIzII;c urid r(,tiucwi with 5 *W of
~?’xflllhlfl’fi XI I:(!. ion dIall be made
‘LJW si)]ttt
nlknlinc wi[l~?0 perrtmt sodium hydroxide, xdd-
iug st(fli(’ietlt e.wcs 10 just di.ssrdvc lhe zinc
h) llroxide precipitate that furms The solntion
shnl I h! ext meted t wire with r(lmr and the@ hr
disrnr(lvd. ‘h nqu~xJnesolution tdmll he rrmde
nrid wJth hyd rochlnric nci~ sp. gr. 1.19, tmnlml
to roum temlwmtum, nnd 2 ml, of 0.5 N eotiiurn
nil rite addtd. The solution shall be poured into
mI cxresa of s sniution of 11-nuphthol in 5 per-
ctwt sodium hydroxide, A vivid scarlet color
indicatrs tho p~ce of ctyrene polymem in the
ehetnmer.
43.4 PoJyiwbty7cnr pdynmm. The pm
mm of polyi.aobutylwm polymer may h fu~.er
cnnfirnmd by the fol)owing: A bat delivery
tube shall be sttached to a test tube No. 1 by
Iw:Im nf n rubhor d qqwr. Thn ddiwry tube
dL;Il1 pm through w S(oppcr nlmmt to the bot-
tnm of t-t tutw ‘No. 2 l~~ring a side arm. Test
tribe No. 2 shall be plmcd in nn ice bath. A
 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Method ml
.
second delimry tube ehall be ●ttached b the sido mined. The derkative ie believed to b meth-
stm of teat tub No. 2 and extended into an open oxy-i-butyl-mereuri-soetate with s melting
& tube No. 3 containing 0.5 gmm of mercuric point of about 55° C. ( 131° F.). The test shall
acetate in 10 mL of methyl ●lcohol. A l-gram be further confirmed by s mixed melting point
epwimen of the rubber compound that has been determination with the mercury derivative of
extracted with acetone and dried as described in known pdyiaobutylene or isobutylenc.
4.3.33 shall be phwed in the fimt test tube and 435 Po@J+dt nifihma. The pnlysulfid~
heated strongly to decompose and distill off the nabbers are easily identified by menns of odor
compound into the second and third teat tubes. ●nd high sulfur content. Additional qualitative
The liquid thnt collects in the second test tubo teeta include the pronounced swelling action of
shrill be rejected. The third ~ tube shall be acetone (unlike other rubbers except unvulcan-
heated to evaporate the methyl rnlcoho~ svoidixtg iacd nitriles) ●nd the extremely mpid reaction
excessive heating near the end of the erapom- (5 t~ 35 aeconda) at 40° C. (104° F.) with a
tion. Twenty-five ml. of petroleum ether (b. p. mixture of M@ volumes of concentrated ]litric
SO”* ]0° C, ( 122° A 18° F.) shall be ●dded to the and sulfuric acich
tet ttt~ and the mixture huHed and filtered. S. RESULTS
The lilt IYIIeshatl bP cvnporeted to a SUMIIvol- 6.1 Unless otherwime specified in the detuil
ume nnci chilled in kc to mystullixe the mercury qwcificat ion, otle specimen from each inspection
dcrivatiw. The rrystals slmll be dri(~d at M“ Y unit S}M11be tested.
!ie C. (95 °2!)0 F.) and4he nmltil~g point ckter- 52 The ulnato:uem found shtill be recorded.
 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com
..

Method 8011
Aoril 14, 1%7

PICKS PER INCH, BRAID

/
L SCOPE L PROCEDURE
1.1 mclhod is inhmlvd for usr in dcter-
This 4.1 Auy mturants or finishing mntcrinls
mi]iing of pivks per inch in die
tho II IIIIIIW SIKL1l k Il”tnomd from t.ho surfwx Of (Iw spi.
bmid of insulated wire nml cuhlex FiJr the pur- men by mews of the cloth nnd solvent. The
pose of this method ~ic~ per inrh” in de[imd counting instrument shall be pked on the
as the numb ‘r of cnrriem cotttainrd in 1 inch specimen so that the graduated surface is pnr-
of the bmid measured lm@hwise of tlte finished allel to the kngth of the specimen, The am
wire or cnhle. gmduntion on the scale and@ pointer shall be
2 SPECIMEN nut on a bmid iutemction ~nd the number of
21 The qwcimen shrdl be ● piece of the in- %arrkrs” uver a Iength of 1 inch of the 4mid-
spection uuit at latwt 4 inches in kn~ h with countad and the value recded. The vnhw oh-
lmtid intwct, from which any covering ovrw the tnined is the number of picks per inch.
bruid hxs been removed. 5. RESULTS
3wAPPARATUS AND REAGENTS 5J Unless otlvrwise specified in the detail
al The appnrntlls uud reugents sII:LI1lie ns specifim[ ilm, lwf)slwcinmns, ono fr(~li] wwll Clitl
fol lows:
of tlw inslwction Imit, slml] LJctested.
3.1.1 A thr~WI w;ntvr, pick YIILWor othvr
mtitd.dc in@=w)}clif I wnsistiJ)g
of n low power 5Q l“lw ]lumber of pirks per im h of tho
l~r:tid of Lhe inspdion unit shrill be tllc arerngu
ocular rnounti on u mck nnd pinion over a-
gmdunlrd mule. The position of the orulnr 0{ I 110 nwlts ol)t:ti IMXI “fmm t lie specimens
with tvqwt LO the scule shun be indicatwi by w tostld.
l)oillter. 53 ‘I”lIu III(IL+ })cr indi of IIic I)rni{l [If the
3.1.2 l!”;~~;?t?~’~‘h. in5]M’(?tilJn Unit shn!l bc rfword~’d to the nwlrmt
3.13 ~’h/mJfmvn or other 8uitaUe solvent. 0.1 pick.

FED. TEST METHOD STD. W. 228

 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

‘ethod 8kl
April 14, 1%7

CARRIERS, ENDS PER CARRIE& AND PLY OF YARNS; BRAID

L SCOPE bmid shall bo sepamted for a distance of at
-l+ ~is method is intended for use in detar- hurt 1 i)rh of the length of the spcimcn. The
mmng the number of carriem end8 per carrier, number of cnrnwa in the whole braid shn]] then
and ply of yarn in the braid of insulated wim be counted and the vduo recorded
~d oebh For the purpose of this meth~ 43 Ends per carrier. &veml of tho tmr-
end% ply, ply - and arrier are deilned se rkm shrtll be eepnmted, the numlwr of ends
follows: An ‘end” in m individual yam. A (yarM) per mrricr ouunted, nnd the value rw
~lyn is an individual tinglo yarn ins ply yarn. CQrded.
A ~ly yamw is the product fomned by twisting 4A Ply of yarn. ,%veml of tbe yarns droll
together two or more aingIe yarrm A %arrW’ be untwisted, the number of plies counted, and
ie the Y8rn or oombhtion of no-l y8me hid the dtw recorded.
pamllal in the bmid by s single bobbin of the & RESULTS
bmiding machin~ &l Unlas otherwina specified in the detdl
2 SPECIMEN spmi fimt.ion, one specimen f rum ench inqMc-
21 The specimen shall bes piece of the in- tion unit. shrill b testd.
spect ion unit nt hst 4 inches in length with the 5.2 ‘~]e number of cnrriers in t ~w hm it~, t hO
bmid intnct from which ●ny co?ering over the number of ●nds per carrier, end the number of
bmid has been rwnoved.. plies in the yarn of the inspection unit shall be
& APPARATUS AND REAGENTS tie NYJuh.aobtiin~l frwn the specimen testd.
M The ● ppantua and magunts shall be aa 53 When.mora than OI)Cqnwimen is tested,
follows : the nuIIIlwr of cnrrirm ill rlIc I)r:li(i, t)tc uurnlwr
2Ll A neeo% or other poinied “ ‘ ‘ uf Si-I& p~ Currier, Aiid the iiiiifih. r G: piiES iii
2JJ Wipinp cloth. the yarn of the inspect if.m unit bhnll be the nv-
II&l ChZw~07wb or other smit+le dverk erago of lhe mmlts Wainod from the qwcimene
4 PBOCEDURE tested.
U Any aatumnta or finishing msterids 6.4 The number of carriers pm Lwaid, de
till be removed fmrn the epecimen by me- per carrier, nnd piiee per yurn of [hv inspem iuu
of the cloth and aolvank unit Bhnli be rworderl to 1ho ncmwt W+O1Onmu-
& Number Of tiora fis C]OWWd bsr.

FED. TEST METHOD STD. W. =

 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Mclhod 8031
April 14, 1%7

YARNS PER INCH, FIIIROIJS COVE~JiW

slI:Ill lw IIlwril on tlI(I s]minwn w I lmt the grd-

FED. TEST METHOD STD. MO. 2Z

 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com
/

Method 8033
April 14, 1%7

YAKNS I’NJl JNCH, VARNISHED CLOTH

ting lxt]~’r :Ittd Ixid out snw~thly on n flatsur-
fALT$ witlmuf tt’ll~ittll. Tlw rwmltillg inst run-wnt
>h:t]l IV phwml ~lwrimen so tlwt the
011 tho
ppduntt-wl vd~ is ut ri~lt angles to the yams
to br roulttml. StnrtiIlg with the zero gradua-
tion of the wale nm? the pointer flush with one
of tlw end= ( vrnrp yarns), the number of ends
(wnrp ynrns) in ● di~ance of I inch of the
) ~lwvimcm shrill he counted and the wdue rn-
mwdrd. If the fnl)ric tape is 1 inrh or 1- in
width. all ●de dud! I* rrtnnted and the rtsults
qNWSIXI ns ends (warp yarns) per inch.
4.1 Filling yanm Tho nmuber of pi~
(filling ynrns) per inch shrill be determined ae
tk?st”riled in 4.2.

5. Ill?St.11.TS
5.1 1;nlms ot Iwrwiw specified in the detail
sperilicntirm. one specimen from each Inspection
unit shrill be tested.
5.2 “17wNNIS [ w:lrl) yRrII~\ IWr inch nf the
lnycr O( tnlw ~hall Itc the rewllts oh:tiuwl from
the specimen t-tad .
53 Tlw pirk.s [ Iillitlg ynrns) pw it@i of the
lnyer U( lnpc Atnll h the results ohlnincd from
thr specimen tested.
5&l When mom tlmn one’ specimen is
trdd, the ends (wnrp pm) per inch nnd the
picks (filling yarnsi per inrh ot fhr Inyer of
tnl)c shall he tlm avwmge nf the msul~a ob(nined
from the spw=imens tested.
5.4 ‘1’lIe emls per inch nnd the picks per inch
Of ench tape tested shrill be recordctl to the near-
eat whole number.

FED. TEST METHOD STD. NO. ~

 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Mctbd 8041
April 14, 1%7

YARN SIZE, WRAP AND SERVING

L SCOPE from the -rxttrnct ion nppnrntus nnd dried to a
1.1 This mctlmd is intended for use in deter- ronstant weight in”the oven at 70° = 2° C. ( 158°
mining the sim of cwt,ton yam in cottnn Wmpa =“ F.). The binder threads shall be removed
or cotton wrvings of insulated win snd abl~ froto the specimen, the total number of onda of
2 SPECIMEN yuna connteud and the vniue recordod as h’.
21 The specimen slmll b a piece of the 43 The specimen shall be conditioned for 1
ermring at hat 20 squnra inched in ●ea tsken honr at 06=2 pwcent relativo humidity and
from (he inspection unit in the form ofs oon- temperature of Too*!P C. (1 S8”=4” F.),
thuous ribbon, nnbroken exoept for binder vmighod nnd the valno recorded as W’.
.
threada & RESULTS
$ APPARATUS AND REAGENTS &l Cakulatiom The size of yam in cotkm
3.1 The sppamtua and magenta shall be as wraps” or servings of the specimen shall be cal-
follows : culated ● f ollowa:
3,1.1 %a)hld setradion appawcttw nlzcof mln-
o.olRxIrxLxP
3.12 Oven maintained St 70° A2” C. (l@ w
where:
=40 ~?.). #-the l],lflltw.r nr ~d~ Of ~nm W ~~erlhg ‘

3.13 AnaZyt{cal balanre and weights. L=tiIe lengtlt of Lhe specimen, Inches
P=EtlIe ply d the cotton yarn
3.L4 Wd ecde graduatad to ~z inch or W-tie ueightd tbe Speelmen,Vam5
fhwr or its decimal equivahmL S2 Unless othcrvviao specified in the detail
3.13 a~ciworw. specificntirm, one qmcimcn from ench inspection
3.1.6 {’Alornf ornt or other suitable so] vent, unit shall bc testml.
~. p~(jc-~~1~~ 5+% The size of the ynm in tho wrttp or wrv-
4J The ends of the spcimen shall be cut ing of the inspct.ion unit shall be the result
quare, the length measumd with a std scale obtiinod from the specimen tested.
to the newest ?42 inch and the who recorded es 53.1 When moro *8n onc specimen is
L. The specimen shall be foIded and trnnsfmrod tuked, tho sise of the pm in the wrnp or serv-
to nn extinction appamtu~ ing of the inspection unit shrill be the svemge
43 Tho specimen shall he extracted with the of tho roeults obtmined from the specimene
solvent. until all the aaturanta and finishing ma- t4!sted.
terisls hn~e been removed. The extraction is 5.4 Yam size of the ynm in the wrnp or
mmplote when the solvent from the siphon tuii serving of tbe inspection unit shall be reoorded
is dam. The apecinmn shall then be mmowd to the nenmt whole number.

FED. TEST METHOD STD. NO. 22S

 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Mctbod 8111
APril 14, 1967

DIRECTION OF LAY
L SCOPE 4. PROCEDURE
1.1 I“llis nwt hod is i~~tcnded for w-in deter- 4.1 The corrring nmtcrinl shrill b relnovrwl
mining tl)o di!tctirm of twist of my lw!icol t+. from tho sprcimcn nnd the chwcnts t[! 110IOX;UII-
mfmt such a.. S1rJtl& conduclor% tapq cottou iw+d cxposwl Bud clrnncxl if necowwry with tho
WJ21]H or scrvinph jute budding, ●rmoring solvent un{l cloth. Tho rlirwtion of lay of the
t JIIW.n rmlming wirn, jute Swvil)g, ●k., of insu- ●hmmc dull k rwodod u right-hmi or left”
lated wim and cmbl~ For of this
pqxmm hmd The fol)owing defhit ions ~hnll ripply to
specification, direct ion of lny is dohed as the the kms right-hand lay and Icft-hnud lny:
Intcrx! tiircct ion, eithnr right-kind or left- (6) Ri@t-hd lcy A ckkwiss twist of
hnml, in whirh an element pnsws over the top the eknwnt awny from the obsorver.
as it rccdcs frmu an observer looking along tho (b) L@-hud &y. A counterclockwise
nxis of the wire or cabk twist of the demont away from the observer.
2 SPEC1hfEN
5. RESULTS
2.1 “l”IIQqwwimm droll tw n piece nf the in- 5.1 l~tllrss tdwrvrisc spccifird in tllc d~tail
spection unit of sufhcient length to iIKluJe at
+rificntim. 0110sprciiomi frntu e:;cll in.+wt iot~
hulst t~rt) spirals of the (+nlwlt ttl h,! (Cstell
relit sh:lll bc Ii*still.
from which nny cm-wing over the demeut to be
63 ‘no tlirertion of lny of the IIelicnl clc-
tated hns ken removed.
metlt of IIN+iqm[ ion unit dtnll ho tho mwlt
S. AP1’ARATUS AND REAGENTS
3.1 The uppnrntus nnd rw~gw~ts shfi]l he ss obtnined frwu ttw qwrimm lcsted.
follows: 5.3 The Plolnvtit of LIlc itlspcrtio]l ul~it slInll
3.1.1 ll-;il~. - .7.C~ ho designotel EIV! its ilirrctim of lny (right-
3U L’hhmnforvn or other nuitulde solwmL tubml or Il!fbhlmtl) rom’dd

FED, TEST METHDD STD. NO. 228

 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Method 8121
April 14, 1%7

COVERAGE, BRAID, METAL AXMOR

L SCOPE met hod 1111 for diameter over the braid and tho
1.1 ~his method is intcmled for me in deter- vnl uc mwdd as 0.
mining I lie www~l~m of braided IN*I armor 5. RESULTS
of insuhlted wil~ and cable. 5.1 ~alculatioa. ‘Ilo covcragu of tl10
2 SPECIMEN trmided metal mnor of the specimen shall be
M The specimen shall be a piece of tho in- cldcuhltd as {Ollovra:
spect irm unit at least 12 inchm in hwgth f mm amern~, pemmt= (w-r) Xloo
which nny covering orer the ●rmor hna been where :
F=-NPd/aln A.
lvmlln’ed. A =ttw nngte d ?walf.t wttb nxla of cable: Tan. A Is
& APPARATUS REAGENTS 2“* f)P/c.
3.1 The O~JpnmtUSand rengents ahn]~ be as d-the dlamvkr ,of Imllrldwd bmld wirm, Inch.
described in the methods referenced in 4 (:=thp autnlwr d cmrrlrm.
~mfhe dIIIIIICter ~ CShle nmlvr armor. Inch-. “
4. PROCEDURE h~=ti~ n~n]kw of HIS ~ cnrrlrr,
4.1 The nm-hr of picks per inch in t)m J’+hc mmh,r of plrk~ per Inch of CIIbl~ WVlh
specimvn -shall Le detwm~itletl :1s dcscrilmd in
5.2 lJnlH othrmviar qwiitir(! in tlm detnil
metiml 8(1I 1 and the value recorded os l’. ~l)(.,.iflmti{)li, ww s[wimen fmnl e;]ch in~pe{tiotl
4.2 Tho null~ber of wires per carriw sIM1l
unit nhnll 1~ tested.
be determined as &scribed in melhod *21 and 53 The cwvmage of the nrmor of the inspec-
the value rerorded as N.
tion unit All he tho result cdknincd from lhe
4.3 Tl~e allglc of the bmitl sI1oII be detPr- spwinlell tmtwi.
$+4 mild as described in method 1031 and tile valtlo 5.3.1 IWWII more thnn one Bpecimen is
/@ recorded as A. tcstwl, [Im covt”mgv of tlw mV)IIW Oi li~c illspec-
4.4 The diameter of the individual bmid titm uIIit shul] he the nventgv of lho results ob-
wires shall be determined as described in method ta ined f mm the specimens tested.
1421 and the value recorded as d 54 ‘l’ho eovemge of the arnwr of the impec-
45 The diameter of the wble under the tion unit shrill he recorded to tho nenrest 1.0
mnor ehall be determined u .,described in peremt.

FED. TEST MEIHOD STD. W ~

 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

●
hfCthOd 8131

COVERAGE, WRAP OR SERVIRC

10 SCOPE TMWR 1
. ..-. — ..—. — ..-. —.—— —-—-——
1.1 This mrthod is intended for urn in deter- Si,w d pm Vduc of D
mining tho covemge of R cotton wving or wmp .— . .— ——
covering on insulated wi m or cnble. 0. OoM
14/l orso!2--------------------------
12/1 m2W2.- . ..- . . ..-. . . 010s
2 SPECIMEN Iollurmn . . . . ..- . . . ..-..:: ---------- .0114
1212. -------- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . .01.ss
21 The tyecimrnn Rhall bes piem of the im- -— ----- -- -- ---- . . . ..— ——- ---- —
pwt io)l unit of mdhicmt length to inclndo at
hww 20 squnro inches of the wmp or ucrving RESULTS
5.

froml which nny wwcriug over tho wmp or 5J Calculation Th6 coremgm of the cob
serving has beeu remrnwL (see methods re- tan wmps or twvin~ of ths spmimen alult be
rfllird ill 4.) eallwlntd an follown :

E#lm
3. APPARATUS AND REAGENTS C4nwucc of servlnc or wmr. pwfwnt= -
x
whwo :
3.1 The n~qmmt us 1!nd rengent:; sha] i bc m
.~ ~ f I,w lllin]l~r O( CWrlmof yarn In rll~ np~”tl~~o.
tlcscrilwd in Ihe nwt hndc rnfmmred in 4. .t =1 Iw rII14tI
lm~twww Ihv ynrn nd nstk ctf WIW W

rnhh .
4. PROCEDURE (,=tho l~nglh Of ]fiy ~r tlu. srrnp m msrvlnc, ID*W.O
4.1 The length of )ny of the serving or wrap 1)--- tb rwdnot W ynw 917* [ tnhl~ I).
slI:Ill Iw tll’tcrltlint’11 :1+{Im-rilml ill Ill:! lI(x1 1531 Ii_=-llw wlunl to J’ t“lls. A.
I’=-’lho @qIIJIl tt} 1, TaII. ,\ ●
and thp wdue recorded as L.
52 ‘Uhilws 01 imrwiw? slwI-i LoIi iii Ilifi dcti:i!
42 TIIP nngln of th swving ddl h deter.
qn.rilhvlt il!ll. onr qwitlwu fr4mi ench irtspac=
mind ns duscribd in mcthlti lW1 nml tllc WIIIO
ti4~ll uuit Auillb [Ad.
rec’ol”(lwl ns .’1.
54 “l”lw rwvwxgo 0( t III’ u riIp ur serving of
43 The tntn] numlnw of ends of ytrjl in the t ho imq uwl.iolt unit A II Ix the rvwdt ubtuincd
Fp=imcn shn II b dctwmirted as drscrihvd ill from Ihe qwimwl testcwL
met Id WMl A tho vnlur merwtlwl rw N. q”! j \YiIwl IIIOIW Ih: III {w FINW
.-. illltw is
4.4 TIIe ynrn sim slinll Iw (Irl rrllti Id as tmlt.fl. 1II(. (wwrngc of tlm wruIl or wwving of
drserilwd in me(hod ~1~41 and tlw \.nlIIP ~ t.lw iuslwt i,m uhit droll k tile nwrug~ of the
cortlod, The constnnt-l~ for ynrn twulls 01)1Ninwl from tho S]mrimcns tcstrd.
iu tnldv 1. 5.4 ‘1’he rrwrrngo of fhe wmp or seining of
4.5 If two mnp9 or servings the innpect ion unit shall bn rorwrdcd to the
ewh shall be tested Oepntately. nearest 1.0 percent.

FED. TEST METHOD STD. NO. 2Z

 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Method 8211
Aprif 14, 1%7

MOISTURE AIJSORPTION, INSULATION

I
I. SCOPE 8.1,12 Ethy) ~~dol, 95 pwcxuk
1.1 This mot hod in iiitendcd for useln deter- 4, PROCEDUNE
mining the amount of writer ahsbrbcd by the 4.1 Conductor No. 1 AWG ●nd smaller.
imwl?t ivn over n conductor. 4.1.1 The circumference of the sperimen
2 SPECIMEN shrill b cktrrmind WI krrihed in rndhod
21 If the condml.ar ~im is No. 1 AW(3 or 144.
Rnwllm, the specimen shall Umei6t of s piece 4J2 The anrfaos of the insubt.ion shrill km
of thP inspmlinn nnit 11 inches in length fnnn cleaned of sli filwrs nnd pnti icl= of foreign
w-hi441n ny covering over the inmdation has been material hy mrnn~ of the cloth nnd rthyi alco-
rrnmred. hol. The qwimc$l shall t.lwn he driml in B
2.2 If the condnrtor is No. OAWO or larger, vaonum (prasom of appreximatc)y 20 mm. of
the specimen shnlJ consist of a piece of the in= mercnry) over calcium chloride at a tempern-
sd:it ion npproximnfdy 4 inches in lmgtb, 1
ture of 70” *2’ C. (158”& 4° F.) for 24 hou~
hwli in width, nnd !{O inch in thickncm taken
cooled to room tempmatnre in a desiccator orar
from the iiwmlnticm of the insertion wit. The
rnlciwn chloride, nm? mighecl to the nearest
qwrinwn shrill bc buf?efd, mdhnd Ml 1, to re
move all corrngntions and when rwcnsnary to milligrnm within 3 minutes aflcr removal from
obtnin s thicknes of Ma inrh tho desiccator. The drying and weighing shrill
3. APPARATUS AND REAGENTS be oontinmd at 94-hour interwds nnt.il the
3.1 ‘I*IIc allpnrnt.lts nnd rvngcnts shall be es weight iB eonabmt within 1 milligmm in two
follows: conscmt iw Iwghings or Imtil nny one weight
%1.1 .l d.ytid hnlancc UIKI qpc;~)j t.v. fc :1.~:I~p? f IIW!I! IIP ~trw;mte wwi:~l~t. ThP Inw-
3.L2 (?{dh$ nbsorbent gwsa W Wvigi)i kiml i Iw. H*iliild n% jj “,.
9.13 Jki4mt.., vncwm. 4.13 Tlw qwiwn shrill b bent in the form
3.L4 lhying ovem ventilated, cqabb of of a U ammnd thr mandrel which droll IInve n
nminLtining tlm specimen ●t the required tem- dinmetcr fom tire-that of the@men. IWh
perature within *20C. {4° F~.). end of the spminlcn ehn!l be inw.rted throughs
3.1.5 .V mdns? with diameter of 4 t hrws tie hole in the cover plate of th~ wntcr bdh so thnt
ovrr-nll dinmeter of the aprrimfm to be tasted
10 inches of tha U-ehnpo of the specimen dtall be
(2. 1). “
expmed below the plate. If the specimrn doa
3.1.6” “ Ti~crm&ctn up to 100° C. (212° F.).
not fit the ho]- tightly, acrurntdy ‘drilbd,
3.1.7 Vffrf??t?npttm.p,
claely N ting, nonferrous metal washm shrill
3.13 WWhcm, nonferrous metaL
be used to complete the ●nclosure of t.ho hoka
3.L9 l!’/Itrr MA, cnpeb]o of maintaining
in the cover p)ntr+ nnd to assist in hoMing the
the .sperinwn at the nqnimd bmpemture
within =2” C. (4e F.). Thci bath Shall Con- specimens tightly in placa
sist of vitromw-enamckhteel or gl- -l MA TIM water bath sMl h filled with dis
eqnippad with ● ckeely fitting, ehmt-metal tilled water and the mm *th the specimen h
cover plate having IIOIMof au60ient size to W= place shall be plamd over the bath with the

commodato the ends of the epecimen. ‘1’lte U-portion of the epacimen immersed in the
cover SIIOIIbe of corrasion-resisting metal. wctm. The water level ehall h mdntsined
3M0 C%Mwm ch?m+fc, •nhydrm~ for flush with the under aide of the ccmer plnte
desiccnnL during the ~ dare being taken that no water
391.11 mtzzcd UMtar. ~ in contact with the ends of the specimen.

FEX TES7 GJETFJG S7& M, 228

 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Mdltod ml -.

4.L6 TIM qeoitnan shall be exposed in th water. The raroaining aurfem water 8h811 be
water bath fors period of 166 hours nts tam- removed by blotting lightly with clean, Iintlq
pcrnture of 70° =2” C. {153” *4’ F.) ●fter abeorbent gause sad tk specimen weighed as
which the corm plste with the specimen shall be demribed in 4.1.5. T%e epecimen ehsll be
mmored from the bath and transferred to s dried, amle& and weighed as dwcribed in 4.1A
similar vml filled with distilled water at s & RESULT’S
tampemtum of 94”=8” C. (766 *8° F.). The M cdcnMOa
qwcimen shall be nllovwd to remain in this bath 5J.1 The area of the irnmerwd portion of the
for not leas thnn 6 minutee nor more than 15 specimen shall be calculated be follom:
minutes The vraahere shrill then be cnmfully Conductor eke No. 1 AWG or smaller:
remowd from the specimen. The specimen AIvla,#muare~xL
ahnll be removed from the bath ●nd shaken to where :
remo~e Inoae water. The remaining surfnee c-me et~ of Speclmea becom wtll&
Iocbee.
water shall be removed by Motting the qxwiroen L=tbe len@h of lbe Imnwrml speclmm. tocbos.
lightly with clean, lintleas, absorbent gnuze,
Conductor k Xc. Oor ia~.r:
The qwcimcn shell then he weighed 10 the
ncnrest nlilli~=m within 3 minutm nfter rc- Ares, 8 quare lw+wa=~(~X W) +ST(L+W)
movnl from the water. This wright ALU be wlm~:
W’-tlw whltlt of the qwrlmon, Inch . ‘
recorded ns W’r, Ldhe lm:th of Ibc qurlmen, lncb.
4.1.6 Tho epecinwn dI:~ll he dried in the T-the Ihkkm.en of the g~wvltuen ●fter buglng, Iuch.
vncuurn, 4.1.1, over cnlcium chlorido at rt tem-
6.1.2 The moisi.nrs Asm@ion of tbe spu5-
ptwature of 70” *2” C. (158°=40 F.) for 24 nmn droll be cahmlnted nn folhwe:
hmm, cooled to room temprrnt ure in n rlesima- Where the original wriuhtt TV,, is Iew than
(or, :~nd weighed LO the ncrmst Iuilligmm the tinnl weigl~t, II’,, of the dried spmimcn:
witl)in
The tirying
3 nliltutc~
nn(! WPighing
after rermmil
shtdl be continued
from
at
(ltwimmt{m.
MnMnw nl-qwkw :W egmre !;r.* grsw——
Tr,- w,
m
-J”
24-hour Mervale untiI the weight is conebmt Wlmre the origimd weight, W,,. is grenter
within I milligram in two coneccutivo w-eigh- t hnn the final weight, lV,, of the drkd qmci-
in~ or until any one weight is greater than the men:
previous wei@L The lowed weight shall be W*-WS
Mdsture dnwrptlon per mmere Inrh. croulrn~ --N—
worded ns W4
lrhcrs :
42 Conductor Nm O AWG and larger. W,=tb+ crktnal ~Eht of spertmcn. xvnnw.
42.1 The huffed qmcimen shun be Awncd, lF,-tlte weight ~wlmen afwr bnmersiw. fmnrna ~
cooled, and the thickness drtcrmined as de-
ecribwl iu method 112L ‘1’hevnluu hdl be re-
W,- lhe wdght

S=1 he urm
c rzum.
of the qcdmen after

If lumwrimlportloa IIf qwhwa,

thul ur~lu&

eqLW9
)
corded as T.
inch .
422 ‘J%o specimen shall tkn be we;f$md ae
described in 4.1.2 and immersed in the water 52 UIJlms othcrwirn spocidcd in the dctnil
bath at a tempemture of 7[)- z!!” (;. ( 158° =4°
upecifhation, three specimens from coch hwpco-
tirm unit shall he tested.
)
F.) for n yeriod of lfi bourn, At the cnd of the
expoeure period, the tprimcn shall k t rnns- 5.3 mO ntOiA UIV absorption of the imnda-
ferred to a similar bath of distilled water at s t.ion of the inqmction unit 8haU be the ●verage
temperature of 24°att0 C. (75’’=5° F.). The of the results obta.med fmm the qecimam
spcrirncn ahnll be ●llowed to remain in this tested. ,.,.
b~tth for mt lFSSthnrt 5 minutes nor more than S4 Mnishm nheorptinn of the inauhdion of
15 minuka Tlte specimen shsl] be removed from the inspection unit shall be recorded ta the
the bath and ~hnken to remove loose surfnee nenreet 0.01 gram per quare inch.

FEJ, TZL-i lLE-;AGD STD. NG. 228

e
)
 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Mcthotl 8221
ADti 14, ‘1%7

MOISTURE ABSORPTION, FIX3ROUS COVER.INC

1. SCOPE US Anhydwun doium ehlori(k.
1.1 Thin method is intended for we in deter- u f“btilkd Watu.
minin@e-amount of water abaorbed by the L PROCEDURE
filmus cowing other thnn tap+a over the in- 4.1 Unkae ntherwiao qwiftrfl ill t ho dvtnil
sulation of ● mire or caldeb s~tion, the specimen shrill bo inmwrwd in
.. 2 SPECIMEN water ●t 21s xfi C. (70° =9° F.). for n lnwiod
2Ll The upechnen droll mmaiat of a pima of of**~hOur.
tlm inspection unit 24 * ?~ inch in l@tii frotn 42 The specimen shrill k fme from IIW.
which uny covering over the fibrous cuvaing to chanicnl damage ●cl hall not be bmt or ilvxwf
1 ha (rated haa been remowd. until it has renched room tempemt IIIC. I l;m-
&- APPARATUS AND REAGENTS dling and 5exing of the qmximen shaii IW ra=
{
&l The sppamtus ad ma~lt8 hall be as dwed to “the Awlute minimum Dw20uuy in
follows : mug:
/ ~Ll A &J&~O?. 4A IM qdmwt Ann k lwnt nriwml a
3.12 Aru?/y~i#”d hulmJrc and wc:7ht. mandml of dw @wm4m siweilird in Ittbit! L
.%13 ll-ater L@h equilqwl wil h n cover to 1 f (l,l. si.w {}[ tiIr wimor cuitlt to iw lwlIli is si.:u
~q mt tlust nnd dirt uml cttpul)ie of maintain. No. 2 A U’(; or arnaller, its m:llly Lnrm shnli irn -
ing the specimen nt ihe mquimd temperature nkntic abollt the Wtandml M wiii iwrmil. il ttJ con. “
{3 witilin = I“ U. (2° F.). form tiloaciy lU the olandml with n 2 to !/Y:-inch
*
3.1.1 .Uuwlrd of li)r sizo rwluircd itI t :!1)10L rtrnight ltw~~)l of tho six~’imm :It wlcli cl)d.

T~u].R 1. ) fit Ittlrel aizfn

~ ............... ~E:::::::::::i
............ #
No. 6-.......--------.........-----
UO. L.---- ........ . .. ... .. ... ... .
NO.2------------------------------
11$
1!;
:fi,
lL50,tNKleir, roils. . ------------------
7n0,0tMlcir. milk.
~wcb dr. m,,”
7AIMMNI
.-. --- . . . . . . . .. . ..-
mih. --------------------
- ltl~
Al!i
t.,
.-
NW 1.- . . . . . . . . . . ------------------ . . . . . . . . . . --------- --- l~lf

Nn. 0------------------------------ y{ tWjXIO cit. mid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1214

No. m . . . . . . . . . . -------- . . . . . . . . . -- s ~,~dr. mih-. -... ---. . . . . . . . . . . . 12?b
1% am ---------- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..m - 8% WMOOdr.ml la. . .. ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13%
No. 0000 ---------- ---------- ------- 8% I .awtOO rlr. ?UJla---------- .. . ... ... 13!j
2S0,000 cir. mlia . . . . . . . . . --------- .. s% l,2S0,fK10 eir. roils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17!f
SttO.tX)Udr. mtls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5!; I,MtO,OttOdr mih. . . . . ..- . . . .. . . . . ..i lti!,f
W,000 cir. mid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ~?{ l,7M,tiN dr. n~ik . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . lt)~i
4a),ooo Oir. Mb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6% 9,~,0U0 dr. mib . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20!i
I

t Tbo whros for mandmt tiismrtrr in the table apply thrfmhmt to Itwlstod conductors hsvin~ two fikwn
oovwhqm. For Ntm 14, 12, III, nwt R A ~~u cnmtuctura havhm mm 6twoua mverlIw the rnandrcl tioIMu~ arc to
b %* !L fib and ‘Mo Iuch, raspectiwtv

FED. TEST METHOD STD. NO. 228

 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

‘h sdjumnt turns mound the mandrel shall

not touch each other and dull be ~ inch to ~4
4.7 The moitttnra dxorption ehsll not be
corrected for the portion of the apccimen pro- )
inrh npnrt. If the eiae of the wire or -ble to- jecting dove the ettrfoce of the wster.
be tested is huger thun No. !2 A~VC?, a sitnpk 4A If at any time the vmtor in the bath be-
~-tum kihal]b made about the mandra]. comes dirty or ahnwe the presence of s eurface
L4 ‘ne specimen shrill he Iwmoved from the fihn of dust or ~ax, it shrill he replnccd with
mandrel without disturbing its form, and shall freeh distilled writer.
be placed in thr desecrator over nnhydrons cnl- & RESULT
cium chloride for not IW thnn 18 houm at room S.1 Calculation Tlw moistum nbsnrhed
ternperntm. It shall then he removed from by thr film-w rovrring of flw qwcinwn SIIOII Iw
the dcsimator und weighed to tho neomst ]0 Ing. Calcutatd an follfnve :
within 3 winlttm nlld the vnlw IWWtxkd u WA.

U Tho specimen shttll then ~ immemnrl in )

distilled svntw for ths twqukd pwind of time
at the required tamperatum vrith 1 inch = ~
inrh of ench end of the coil or U-bend projecting
abovr the surfwm of the wntcr. At the end of
the imnimsion period the qnwhnm] sIMII he .r~-
moved from the vrntcr bath, shakm rigoiwwly
for 5 seconds to remove the w.lhrring muisturc,
and weighed tothe nearest 10 mg. within Q nlin-
ut~ and the vnlua recordwl as W,.
4.6 All fibrous em-wing= other tl~ntl t:ipc
shall then be rcmovwl fronl tl)~! full Ir[lgth of
the qwcirnen. TIIe rnmlmtnr, insulztil~ll, wul )
tape+if ●ny, shall then be weighed to the near-
eet 10 mg. and the value tac.orded ae IT,,

FED. TEST METHOD STD. NO. 228

?
 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

METHOD S231
ADril 14, 1967

lNStl LATIOll SHRINKAGE (MOLTEN SOLDER METHOO)

. 1. SCOPE At a point l/2-Inch fronl the skinned end of the

wire, the specimen shall he given a 90’ bend over
1.1 This methwl is intended for use in N mandrel of its own diameter. The end shall
drtcrmining the amount of lnsulaUon shrtnkage then be jmmersvd for 5 seconds, tu within 1/8
vr a wire. inch of we insulation in a container of molten
(60-40 tin-lead) solder maintained at a temper-
2. SPECIMEN ature of approximately 320” C. (608” F), There
shall be no flux used in preparing the wire fur
2.1 The specimen shall be a 6-inch length solder!ng. The insul~tion shall not (lMC away
of insulated wire. from the conductor, open up over the bent portion,
nor shrink back more than that specified in
3. APPARATUS the detaii specification or specUicatim sheeL

3.1 The app=ams shall be as follows: 5. RESULTS

3, 1.1 A suitable container in which the solder
may he kept. 5.1 Unicss otherwise specified In the detail
specification or. specification sheet, one specimen
3, 1.2 Mandrels of the size spccifiefi in 4.1. from mch impection unit shall be tcsteci.

4. PROCEDURE 5.2 the amount of shrinkage shaii be

recorded.
4<1 Before tie addition of any outer covcri n~s,
~ 6-inch specimen of insulaled wire shall be taken
from a point at least six inches from the cnd of
an inspection unit and shall be prepared ior testin+!
by removing l/2-inch of heulation at one ●nd.

FED. TEST METHODSTD. NO. 228

 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Method 8311
April 14, 1%7

WEIGHT, WIRE OR CABLE, CONDUCrOR AND

COVERING MATERIAL
10 SCOPE . . 5.1.1 The weight. of 1,000 feet of the cover-
1.1 This rneth(d iR inten(kd for use in deter-
ing mntwin! shrill bo calculated as follows:
olining the weight of the [inidwl wire or cable, WA@t of ecworlng materlaL
col){lurtor nnd Iwvwing mnterinls of insulated ~~-~9 ~ ~,w
pounde pr ),MKl *“T
wim awl rnble. It is plr!iculnrly np~dicnble
Whmc :
tu UUC wrmlhcr-rwibtal~t wiro or any
typo IV=U1,!~lgtlt d Ibe S@IOea h rrems
t~tlmr immlnted wiro or cable purchnaed on A u’,= the wi?+bt or tbe condurtrw In grams
) woigl.d bnsis. Ii-the }ength of the epctmen la India
2 SPECIMEN 5M The weight of 1,000 feet of the con-
21 The speciumn shrill be n piere of dm in- ductor SIIU1lhe calculated as follows:
qwtion unit at least 2 fd in hmbtih. W#8bt of mmdrictm.
& APPARATUS AND REAGEN~
\ ,> 3.1 ‘J’]tc n] J~UrntllM mI{l rwt~~nts dml~ be M punrtn fwr MU) fret,= %x 2f1455
fdll )Ws :
5.13 Thr weight of 1.000 feet of the fiihed
3.1.1 IWt#,d .Gdc’ grn(~u~ltl’(] t ~~ 1;;, imh m’ wire or (yhlc shall be calculated as follows:
[ifwr, or its dcrinml equivnlrnt.
w,.M1l IMslted wire m cable, lwun~a m Looo f~~
3.1J2 RaZmuW rweumte to ‘o.20 grmu and mwt~lcbl of ewcrlits matml~ plue “wat@t of
weights. mad uo~w
\
$ 3.1.3 Wipkq cloth.
5.2 lTltlws IIt11,.!wisr slwcifird in the detail
3,1.4 Ch/oroil)rrn, tIr (ItlIor Sliilxllle w~lvollt.
1 qwcilirntion, one specimen from ench inspec-
4: PRO(YN)lTRE
‘i. tion unit simii be testcci.
4.1 The qwinmu, wilh WA rut aqmmly 5.3 Thn w~ight of the covering mWmi~
and smootht shtdl bo laid out mI n smooth hori- weight uf mmdm.tor, nnd ~~-eight Ot finished
zontal surfnce, the Iengtl) !jf 1he s]o’iltleli wire or ralde of the inspection unit shrill be the
nmneurvd to the neiuest w inch with steel remdt obtained from the specimeu *.
ncnle, nn{l the vn~ue =~rd~ ~ E. 5.21 Wkn more thnn mm tqwoinwn is
42 TIIC sp(+i!ll(,n &Il] IWI wrighwl 111within
trsted. the weight of the covering .mntcrid,
0.20 gram nml thr weight Hworded m W. weight of the rrmdurtor, mid weight of finished
43 TIIC rovming shall bo rmmvwl from the w;re or cltble of the inqwrtion unit shall be
.
cnndwtor rm(l the conductor frtwd of any ad- the avern~ of the mmlts obtniued fronl the
hering nmterhd with the solrrnt and wiping qmrimtvw t (W ml.
cloth, weighed to within 0.2) gram, ml the s.4 The weight of wwring mntcrird, weight
weight rerorded as Wa. of mmdurtor, awl weight of thiuhed wire or
5. RESULTS cable of the im@ction unit shall be mcordod
5.1 Calelktiom to {hrev significant. figores.

FED. TEST METHOD STD. ND. 228

 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

Method 8321
Ad 14. 1%7

SPECIFIC GRAWW, PYCNOMETER

L SCOPE 4S Unlem otherwim &ci6ed in the detail
1.1 This met hod is intended for w in cleter- specification, the determination IJhs]l be made
mining the specific gmvity of rubber inaulnting at a tempemture of $25”=0.5° C. (77°=10 F.),
compolmds and eheathe. It ie particularly ●p unless the coeKcient of expansion of the rubber
plicnble when the n~imcn is not in the form ‘compound is known, in which case, the de-
of one solid and continnoua pieta IL is not termination may be msde ti any convenient
● rapid msmethod &hi but is considered mo- temperature ud the value eorrectad to !25° C,
●ccurate. 42 The specimen ehall he weighed to the
2 SPECIMEN nettrmt0.1 mg. and the weight recorded ae IV,.
L1 The specimen shall coneiet of approxi- 43 The pycnomcter ahal] be filled with 05
mately 1 gram of the insulation or ehedh taken percent alcohol, weighed to the neerest 0.1 mini-”
from the inspection unit. gram and the weight recorded M W*
S APPARATUS AND REAGENTS 4.4 The specimen shallthen be placed in the
M The mppamtua ●nd reagente shall he se pyenometer which ehali he filled with alcohol
follows: and thn whole weighed to the nenmst 0.1 milli-
3.1.1 An analytical Ixdancc and weights. grwn, uml the weight recorded aa W,.
3.12 .4 pgrtlomeldrn 5. RESt?LT
3.13 i~inety-f””- percent ethyl ulcohoL 5.1 Tlw qwcifir grnrity of tl~e specinwm at
4. PROCEDU. b 25°/40 Cc dull b Cn)culated ns follows:
srleeltk! grevlty (256/4’ c.) -0.omx ~,_(~,_w,) x ewmc mm’ttr of ●kobol at =“/?s’ c.

,?-

●lcohol, grams. t@ed.

S2 Unlcea otherwise speri&d in the detail S.4 The specific gravity of the insulation or
specification, two specimens from each inapeo Bhenth of tho inspection unit ehtdl he recorded
tion unit shall be teeted to the ne.nmst 0.001. unit.

FED, TEST METHDD STD. NO. 228

Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

ADril 14, 1%7

SPECIFIC GRAVITY; IIYDROsTJfTIc ‘

FED. TEST METNOD STD. NO. 228

 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

INSTRUCTIONS: In a continuing effort to mske our stsndsrdisstion docwne nb better, the DoD prondee M form for use in
submitting commenti snd sug@stioM for improvements. AII ueen of milituy stenddizstion doeumen @ are invited to provide
suggestionA. Thle form MCY be detsched, folded along the lines indicated, tsped along the bee edge (DO NOT STAPLEJ, eod
romiled. Xn bkrck 5, be u cpecific m poeeibk ●bout ~icular probtem areae euch u wording wbkh required interpretation, wee
too rigid, restrictive, 100M, ambiguous, or wu incompatible, end giwe propoeed wordIng ch~ee which would alleviate tbe
problem. Enter in block 6 sny reme.rks not related to ● cpecifii puagrcph of the document. If block 7 u filled out, en
acknowledgement will be rnded to you within 30 deys to let you knor tbet your comrnenk were nccei?ed and em being

considered.

NOTE: ‘llru form rney not be used to rcqucct copies of documents, nor to request waivers, deviations, or clarification of
sp=ifi-tion requirement on current contrecta, Canmenti mbrnltted on tbie form do not constih te or imply ●uthorization
to wciw sny portion of the referenced document(s) or to ●neud contractual requlmrnents.

(Fold 4WU thb he)

(Fold dent thb line)

DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY

111111 NO●OSTAGE

El
NECESS4RY
IF MAILEO
IN THE
UNITED STATES

OFFICIAL BUSINES
PENALTY FOR PRIVATE uSE S300
BUSINESS REPLY MAILPERMIT NO. 12062
FIRST CLASS WASHINGTON D C

POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY

COMMANDER
US ARMY COMMUNICATIONS - ELECTRONICS COMMAND
ATTN: DRSEL-ED-TO
FORT MONMOUTH, NJ 07703
 Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com

I
I
1 STANDARDIZATION DOCUMENT IMPROVEMENT PROPOSAL
I (Seelnsmuctions- ReversEI Side)
. DOCUMENT NUMBER 2, DOCUMENT TITLE
I
I a NAME OF SU!SMITTING ORGANIZATION 4, TYPE OF ORGANIZATION (M8r& one)

I ❑ VENOOR

I •1
USER

ADDRESS (So-ec(, Ci&, Sfa N, ZfP Code)

I n
MANUFACTURER

I ❑ OTHER (S@dfy):

I
PROBLEM AREAS

I a Psragrwh Numbgr ●nd Word(n~:

b. Rocomnmndti Wo-dmg

c. Ren/Rationdo for Rccomnundation,

. REMARKS

a. NAME OF SUBMITTER (Latf, Fircl. MfJ – OpnOnN b WORK TELEPHONE NUMBER (lnc/uti Area
CO* ) - Ootional

MA ILJNG AD ORESS (Sovrt, Cttv, State, ZIP Cod8J - Ootmn@l S. DATE OF StJBMtSSt ON fYYMMDD)

mm ----- . ---
PREvIOUS ED JTION IS OBSOLETE